JP5812057B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to Yu technique machine.

Conventionally, in the Yu Technical machines, amusement improvement of the game by displaying various effect images on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is achieved. In such a gaming machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on a display device is stored in advance in a storage unit, and when displaying an image, the corresponding image information is read from the storage unit, and image processing is performed. In addition, the image is displayed on the display device.

JP 2006-223598 A

Now, as a storage means for storing image information for displaying an image on a display apparatus, the rate according to reading of the general information (reading speed) is slow casting are used. When such storage means is used, if the corresponding image information is read from the storage means after the image to be displayed is specified, the generation of the image to be displayed by the time to be displayed is not in time, and the time There is a problem that images may not be displayed.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of displaying without the images problems.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and the sub-control An image display means for displaying an image based on the control by the means, and an operation means arranged at a position where the player can operate, and dynamically displaying identification information by the image display means The sub-control means has a first storage means composed of a NAND flash memory storing image information for displaying an image on the image display means, and a higher speed than the first storage means. A read operation is possible, the second storage means for storing the image information stored in the first storage means, and the read operation is possible at a higher speed than the first storage means, and the first storage means stores the image information. Images A third storage means for storing distribution, based on at least the second memory means and said third image information stored in the storage unit, and an image control means for controlling the image to be displayed on said image display means, before a first transfer process execution means for executing a first transfer process of transferring a portion of the serial image information stored in the first storage means to the second storing means, the image information of the non-retained in the second storage means when used in the control of the image by the image control unit, a second to perform a second transfer process of transferring before the image information is used, the pre-Symbol image information of the third storage means navel from the first storage means a transfer process execution means, and a determination means for performing determination relating to the type of the third image information stored in the storage means, said second storage means, at least until a predetermined trigger visit, the first 1 transfer process Image information transferred by the execution means is retained, the image information transferred to the third storage means, which continues to be held until it is overwritten by another image information, the first transfer process, the image At least a part of the image information necessary for displaying the rear image to be displayed on the rear side of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display unit and the image display unit triggered by the operation unit being operated. Including at least a part of the image information necessary for displaying the image to be displayed, and transferring the information from the first storage means to the second storage means. The second transfer processing execution means is transferred to the second storage means . When non-held image information is used for image control by the image control unit, if the image information is stored in the third storage unit based on the result of the determination by the determination unit , the second transfer is performed. The sub-control unit is used when at least the second transfer process is executed, and the image information read from the first storage unit is the third storage unit. Ru comprising a fourth memory means is temporarily stored before being written to.

Gaming machine of claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine, Ru der pachinko machines or slot machines.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , main control means that performs main control of the game, sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image based on control by the sub-control means. An image display means for displaying the information and an operation means disposed at a position where the player can operate, and the image display means dynamically displays the identification information, and the sub-control The means is capable of performing a reading operation faster than the first storage means composed of a NAND flash memory storing image information for displaying an image on the image display means, The second storage means for storing the image information stored in the first storage means, and the reading operation can be performed at a higher speed than the first storage means, and the image information stored in the first storage means is stored. Third memory And image control means for controlling an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, and stored in the first storage means A first transfer process execution unit that executes a first transfer process for transferring a part of image information to the second storage unit, and image information that is not held in the second storage unit is controlled by the image control unit. When used, before the image information is used, second transfer processing execution means for executing a second transfer process for transferring the image information from the first storage means to the third storage means, and the third storage Determination means for making a determination on the type of image information stored in the means, and the second storage means is transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. The image information is held and the image information transferred to the third storage means continues to be held until overwritten with another image information, and the first transfer process is performed by the image display means. For displaying at least a part of image information necessary for displaying a rear image to be displayed on the rear side of the dynamic display of the identification information and an image to be displayed on the image display unit when the operation unit is operated. Including at least a part of necessary image information, and transferring the image information from the first storage means to the second storage means. The second transfer processing execution means stores the non-held image information in the second storage means. When used for image control by the image control means, the second transfer process is not executed if the image information is stored in the third storage means based on the result of the determination by the determination means. thing The sub-control means is used at least when the second transfer process is executed, and temporarily before the image information read from the first storage means is written to the third storage means. since a fourth storage means to be stored, there is an effect that can be displayed without problems the images.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is an arrangement | sequence diagram which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a winning aspect, the stop symbol corresponding to the winning aspect, a winning probability, and a medal payout number. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a three-sheet lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a two-sheet lottery table, and (c) is one sheet. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of a lottery table at the time of hanging. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the scanning area | region of the screen which an auxiliary | assistant display part has, and the display area where an image is actually displayed on the screen. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery table setting process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the display main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the start command process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result command process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of a pending | holding frequency command. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the continuous notice determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the range of the back image stored in video RAM for residence. It is the figure which showed typically the display screen and effective line setting of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an effect execution time table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of a continuous notice setting command. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of the fluctuation pattern command for a display. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image drawing process at the time of power-on performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing image transfer command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous preview image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the back surface image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image transfer process performed by the image controller in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the image storage discrimination | determination table. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous preview image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous preview image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image transfer process performed by the image controller in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the transfer execution determination process performed by the image controller in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the back surface D which is a back image displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in an island stage. It is a figure which shows the content of the back surface E which is a back image displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a city stage. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an effect execution time table. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the super reach change process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the image transfer discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the back surface image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the super reach back image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 21, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a rotating game machine which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine 10 will be described. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. 2 is a front view of a body 11. FIG.

  In the slot machine 10, when a player inserts a medal as a game medium from the medal insertion slot 45 and operates the start lever 41, the three reels 32L, 32M, and 32R with a plurality of symbols are rotated. When the player operates stop switches 42, 43, 44 provided corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. When the combination of symbols displayed by stopping is a predetermined combination, a privilege for giving a predetermined number of medals or a privilege for shifting to a gaming state is given to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed in a box shape with the front face opened as a whole by combining wooden panels, and is attached by, for example, nailing a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall. The casing 11 may be composed of a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel in addition to being composed of a wooden panel, or may be composed of a synthetic resin material or a metal material formed into an integral box shape. Also good.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 has a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. The front door 12 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 so as to be movable.

  Moreover, the locking device 20 is provided in the back surface on the opposite side of the opening / closing axis | shaft of the front door 12, and the front door 12 is made into the locked state which cannot be opened by the locking device 20. FIG. A key cylinder 21 that is integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is the thin upper portion of the front door 12, and as a result, a versatile key cylinder 21 having a short overall length can be employed. In this embodiment, Omlock (registered trademark) having a high function of preventing unauthorized unlocking is used as the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 is formed with three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into a single display window.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two vertically by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper portion of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are disposed on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually rotated, that is, independently driven by the driving of each stepping motor. . For example, the stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is determined by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. In the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has made one rotation, a detection signal is output to the main controller 101 described later each time the reel is detected. Therefore, main controller 101 determines the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5. For each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals, and three consecutive symbols among them are displayed on the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is configured to be visible at each of the upper, middle, and lower positions. Therefore, in order to switch the symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps the symbols visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, or displays the display window. It is possible to perform control to stop a predetermined symbol at a position where it can be visually recognized from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. The start lever 41 is a lever that is pushed by a hand (the direction in which the player is pushed is not limited) when the player starts a game (game). The start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number of medals are inserted. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started at the same time (however, it is not necessary to be simultaneous).

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disposed immediately below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped.

  At this time, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, only the stop mode in which the reaching symbols that have reached the base point position (the lower positions of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R in this embodiment) are stopped as they are. In addition, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a four-slip pattern There are five patterns for the stop mode to stop after the stop. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stop manner until the specified time (190 msec) elapses from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the symbol arrangement (hereinafter also referred to as “stop appearance”) that stops within a visible range from 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the player's operation. In addition, by adopting a configuration capable of sliding up to 4 symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning mode (see FIG. 7) described later that has won the lottery as much as possible within the specified time will be described later. While being able to stop on an effective line (refer FIG. 6), it can be made to avoid stopping the combination of the symbol corresponding to the winning mode which is not won by lottery on an effective line.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal path switching solenoid 46a. When the medal path switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the medal is guided to the discharge path 48, and when the medal path switching solenoid 46a is excited, the medal is selected. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  The storage passage 47 is provided with a inserted medal detection device (not shown) that detects the passage of the inserted medal. The output signal of the inserted medal detection device is input to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 counts the number of medals based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device. In addition, when the movement of the inserted medal (medal passing direction) is determined based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection apparatus, and the movement of the medal is different from the normal, the main control device 101 may clog the medal, It is determined that there is a possibility that fraud such as a medal is pulled out, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, an auxiliary display unit 65, etc., which will be described later, are configured to notify that a sensor error has occurred. Yes.

  The inserted medal detection device includes a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor configured by a photocoupler having a pair of light projecting portions and light receiving portions (each not shown) via medals passing therethrough. 45b (see FIG. 8). The first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are juxtaposed on the upstream side and the downstream side, respectively, in such a state that they are close enough to detect one passing medal at the same time. The detection sensors 45a and 45b are set to output a “Lo” signal when receiving light and a “Hi” signal when shielding light.

  When the medal inserted by the player is guided to the storage passage 47 side by the selector 46, the medal passes through the inserted medal detection device. At this time, first, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a disposed on the upstream side is first shielded and outputs a “Hi” signal, and then the second inserted medal detection sensor disposed on the downstream side. 45b becomes a light shielding state and outputs a “Hi” signal, and medals are simultaneously detected by the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b. When the medal further advances downstream in the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a disposed on the upstream side first enters a light receiving state and outputs a “Lo” signal. The second inserted medal detection sensor 45b disposed on the downstream side is in a light receiving state and outputs a “Lo” signal.

  That is, when a medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, the signal output from each inserted medal detection sensor 45a, 45b is first "Hi" by the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and then the second inserted medal. The detection sensor 45b becomes “Hi”. Then, after each inserted medal detection sensor 45a, 45b becomes “Hi”, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes “Lo”, and finally the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b becomes “Lo”. In the main control device 101, when the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b change at such timing, it is determined that the medal has been inserted normally, and the number of inserted medals is counted. Up.

  On the other hand, when a medal is jammed while passing through the inserted medal sensor device, or when a medal is pulled out illegally, a signal output from the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b is a case where the medal passes normally. Change at different times. The main control device 101 monitors changes in signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, and if the change is different from the change when the medal normally passes through the inserted medal detection device, It is determined that clogging or fraud has occurred, and the occurrence of a sensor error is notified to the display control device 81 described later by an error command. In the display control device 81, when the occurrence of a sensor error is notified from the main control device 101, the occurrence of the sensor error is notified from the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like.

  The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to a player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medal to the opening 48 a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, a reserve tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 52 a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 54.

  A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically operated, and the medal jammed in the selector 46 is medaled. It is returned from the discharge port 49.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. The slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals when winning a prize as virtual medals. When the checkout switch 59 is operated under the current situation, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as an actual medal.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is provided a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the number of remaining medals to be paid out before the bonus state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display parts 60-62 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  The upper part of the front door 12 has an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that produce various sound effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the gaming state. Speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 executes various display effects as the game progresses, and notifies the state when the power is turned on or when an error occurs. The auxiliary display unit 65 mainly plays games by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is referred to because it can be considered that the display unit is used. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65. Details of the display control device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

A lower plate 66 on which a model name, a character related to a game, and the like are displayed is mounted above the medal tray 50. In addition, an ashtray 69 that can be reversed to the lower side on the front side is provided on the left side of the medal tray 50.

  A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply device 91 (see FIG. 8), and includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 described later.

  The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10. This slot machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is turned off in the normal procedure, such as when the game hall is closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and held. However, if the power switch 71 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 72, the backup data is reset ( Initialized). If the reset switch 72 is pressed while the power switch 71 is on, the error state is reset.

  The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, when the hole manager or the like inserts a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and rotates it, the setting state of the slot machine 10 (setting of the winning probability of each winning mode) is changed from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. ”Can be changed. When the setting state is set to “setting 1”, the lottery of the winning mode (role) is performed so that the expected value of the medal payout number is the lowest, and when the setting state is set to “setting 6”, The lottery of the winning mode is performed so that the expected value of the medal payout number is the highest. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the setting state of the slot machine 10.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that manages and manages games is attached to the housing 11. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8, but the main control device 101 includes an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 102 that controls the main control, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 105 that stores a game program, and the progress of the game. A random access memory (RAM) 106 that temporarily stores necessary data, a free-run counter 107 that generates random numbers, a port 104 that communicates with various devices, and a clock that is used for time counting and synchronization. A main substrate including the circuit 103 and the like is provided, and the main substrate is housed in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other by a sealing unit so as not to be opened, and thereby the substrate box is sealed. In addition, it is good also as a structure which connects a box base and a box cover so that opening is impossible using a key member.

  Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an arrangement diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers from 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. These numbers are symbols that are visible to the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Is a number for recognizing and not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As symbols, “7” symbol (for example, 20th of left reel 32L), “youth” symbol (for example, 19th of left reel 32L), “replay” symbol (for example, 18th of left reel 32L), “ “Cherry” symbol (for example, 17th of left reel 32L), “Bell” symbol (for example, 16th of left reel 32L), “Watermelon” symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), “Star” symbol (for example, There are 6 types of the middle reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 5, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that there are three symbols from which the entire symbol can be visually recognized out of the twenty-one symbols attached to the corresponding reel. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, five combination lines are set so as to connect the positions where the symbols are visible. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the combination line set in the slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R and the combination lines.

  6, the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, the upper symbol of the right reel 32R, the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, the right The middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M, the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the right reel 32R, the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle reel A lower right line L4 that connects the lower symbol of 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and a right upward line L5 that connects the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are set. ing. Then, when the combination line that has been activated, that is, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals are paid out is given as a winning combination, or a privilege that the gaming state is shifted is provided. It has come to be granted.

  The maximum number of combination lines may be 6 or more, or less than 5. Further, the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, a V (reverse V) -shaped line or an L-shaped line may be used as an effective line.

  Next, referring to FIG. 7, the winning mode that the slot machine 10 can take, the stop pattern on the active line where the winning is established in each winning mode, the winning probability of each winning mode in the general gaming state, The medal payout number when winning is established in the winning mode will be described. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode, the stop symbol, the winning probability in the general gaming state, and the medal payout number. In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set to “setting 1” will be described as an example. However, when the setting state is set to “setting 2” to “setting 6” In addition, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” while maintaining the magnitude relationship of each winning probability determined by each winning mode and the number of inserted medals (the number of bets). Each winning probability is set so as to increase.

  As shown in FIG. 7, there is a BB (Big Bonus) prize as a status transition prize that gives a player a privilege that the gaming status shifts. When the “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line, a privilege to shift the gaming state to a bonus state that is a special gaming state is given as a BB prize. However, even if the “7” symbol stops along the left, middle and right on the active line, no medal is paid out. That is, when the combination of the “7” symbols is established on the active line, only the bonus state is transferred. In other words, it can be said that the “7” symbol is a state transition symbol for shifting the gaming state to the bonus state.

  Here, the bonus state will be described. The bonus state is composed of a plurality of RB (Regular Bonus) states, and the RB state is composed of 12 JAC games. The JAC game is a game in which the probability of winning a watermelon prize and a bell prize, which will be described later, which is a small part prize, is very high compared to the general gaming state. If the winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Further, the bonus state ends when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number (250 in this embodiment). That is, when the BB winning is established, the medal payout number at that time is 0, but when the gaming state of the gaming machine is shifted to the bonus state in accordance with the BB winning, 250 medals are given to the player. It is ensured that the payout is made with a smaller number of medals than in the general gaming state. In addition, when the number of medals paid out reaches a predetermined number during the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state ends. This is a contrivance for suppressing the player's euphoria by giving an upper limit to the number of medals to be paid out in the bonus state and ensuring the soundness of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols that shift to the RB state is not set, and the configuration shifts to the RB state immediately after the transition to the bonus state and immediately after the RB state ends. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus state is a game that continuously shifts to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

  This slot machine 10 corresponds to the number of medals inserted at the start of the game (the number of bets) by one, two, or three, and the winning probability of BB winning in the general gaming state (BB winning in one game) Is set differently according to the number of medals inserted at the start of the game (the number of bets). Specifically, the probability of winning the BB prize is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1 and 2 and the setting is 1/256 in the case of 3. As described above, the winning probability of the BB winning in the general gaming state is set to be lower than the case of three cards when the number of cards is one or two.

  Next, as a small role winning in which medals are paid out, there are a watermelon winning and a bell winning. If you stop alongside the "Watermelon" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, or "Watermelon" symbol from the left on the active line, a watermelon prize will be established, and the "Bell" symbol, "Bell" symbol, " If you stop alongside the “Bell” symbol, you will receive a Bell prize. Then, when the game is executed with three cards, 12 medals are paid out when a watermelon winning is established, and 6 medals are paid out when a bell winning is established. In addition, when the game is executed with one or two sheets, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability of winning a watermelon in the general gaming state is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1 and 2 sheets, and is set to 1/8 in the case of 3 sheets. On the other hand, the winning probability of the bell winning in the general gaming state is set to 1/65536 for the case of 1 and 2 and is set to 1 / 5.1 for the case of 3s. In this way, the watermelon prize and the bell prize are set so that those prizes are easily established in the case of three sheets, while in the case of one and two sheets, those prizes are rarely established. It is set not to.

  On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, a special small role winning is prepared that is realized only when the game is executed with one or two cards, or only when the game is executed with one card. . Special child role winning includes Cherry Bell winning and 7 Bell winning. Among these, the Cherry Bell prize is a special small part prize that is only established when one or two cards are used. The “Cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “Bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are on the effective line. It is established in the case of stopping at 3 and 3 medals are paid out. Also, the 7-bell winning is a special small role winning that is established only when the number of cards is 1 and when the “7” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped on the active line. As a result, two medals are paid out.

  Here, the symbols that stop on the effective line of the right reel 32R for both the Cherry Bell winning and the 7 Bell winning may be any symbols. In addition, when the game is executed with three cards, even if the “watermelon” or “7” symbol on the left reel 32L and the “bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M are stopped on the active line, the cherry bell wins. Alternatively, it is determined that a 7-bell prize has not been established and that it has been missed. Similarly, when the game is executed with two cards, even if the “7” symbol of the reel 32L and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M stop on the active line, the 7-bell winning is not established. Judged as out. If the game is executed with three cards, the “Cherry” symbol or “7” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “Bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the active line at the same time, and a cherry prize is awarded. Alternatively, a 7-bell prize may not be established. Similarly, when the game is executed with two cards, the “7” symbol of the left reel 32L and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the active line at the same time so that the cherry prize is not established. You may comprise.

  The probability of winning the Cherry Bell in the general gaming state is set to about 1 / 6.0 when the number is 1 and about 1 / 1.8 when the number is 2. In addition, the winning probability of winning 7 bells in the general gaming state is set to about 1 / 6.0 for only one card.

  Now, in a conventional slot machine, when a game is executed with one or two cards, the probability that various benefits are granted is extremely low as compared with the case where the game is executed with three cards. There is a three-seat dedicated machine that can be set, or cannot play a game with one or two cards and can only play a game with three cards. This is made as a device for increasing the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall, and aims to allow the player to play one game with three medals as much as possible.

  However, since the number of medals lent out from the hall before the game is not necessarily a multiple of 3, it is generally rented in units of 50, so it is highly probable that the number of medals is less than 3 There was a possibility of remaining. And if there are fewer than three medals, you can't play a game with the remaining medals on a three-seat dedicated machine, and you can hang one or two However, since the probability of granting a privilege is low, there is a risk that a medal is left in the hall or the player leaves the remaining medal. If a medal is left in the hall, the player loses by the value of the medal, and if the player brings back the remaining medal, the medal lent out in the hall cannot be collected, and the game There is also a problem that a player may play a game using a medal brought back from another hall, and the hall side suffers damage.

  On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, when a game is played with two cards, a Cherry Bell winning is established with a high probability of about 1 / 1.8, and when a game is played with one card The Cherry Bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1 / 6.0, and three medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one or two medals remain in the player's hand even if the winning probability of the BB winning in the case of one or two is extremely low In addition, it is possible to cause the player to execute the game with one or two cards while giving a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize will be established in which three medals are paid out. If the result of this game is a Cherry Bell winning, three medals are paid out, and the player uses the three medals under conditions that are more advantageous than one or two. The game can be played with a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be won. Further, even if the game is out of play, the game can be completed without leaving extra medals for the player.

  In addition, when a game is played with one card, a 7-bell prize is established with a high probability of about 1 / 6.0, and two medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one medal remains at the player's hand, two medals are paid out together with a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell winning will be achieved in which three medals will be paid out. It is possible to cause a player to execute a game by multiplying one while giving a sense of expectation that a 7-bell prize will be established. If the result of this game is that a 7-bell prize is established, two medals are paid out, and the player uses the two medals to make a Cherry Bell prize where another three medals are paid out. You can enjoy the game with the expectation of being won.

  In this way, even if one or two medals remain at the player's hand, the one or two medals will be used and three medals will be paid out. A player can be caused to play a game aiming for a 7-bell prize where medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without surplus.

  Here, referring again to FIG. 5, the “cherry” symbol, the “7” symbol, and the “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M in the reels 32L and 32M of the left reel 32L in which the cherry bell winning and the seven bell winning are established. The arrangement position will be briefly described.

  First, in the left reel 32L, the “cherry” symbols are arranged such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next is 7 symbols. For example, the 3rd “cherry” symbol and the 10th “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval is 7 symbols. Since the reels No. 0 and No. 20 are actually arranged adjacent to each other, the interval between the 17th “cherry” symbol and the 3rd “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L is 7 symbols. ing. On the other hand, the symbol “7” is also arranged in the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next is 7 symbols. For example, the 6th “7” symbol on the left reel 32L and the 13th “7” symbol are arranged so that the interval is 7 symbols, and the 20th “7” symbol on the left reel 32L The 6th “7” symbol is arranged so that its interval is 7 symbols.

  Thus, both the “cherry” symbol and the “7” symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 7 symbols. As described above, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding for a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, by adopting such a symbol arrangement, the “Cherry” symbol or the “7” symbol can be used when the Cherry Bell winning or 7 Bell winning is established, regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated. The display window 26L can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions.

  For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the third “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the “cherry” symbol is stopped at the lower stage if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 4th “replay” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the 10th “ The “cherry” symbol can be stopped in the upper stage, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the fifth “bell” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left reel 32L is slid by four symbols. If it stops later, the number 10 “cherry” symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 6th “7” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower level, the “7” symbol is stopped at the lower level if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the No. 7 “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the No. 13 “No. 7 ”symbol can be stopped in the upper stage, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number 8“ replay ”symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If stopped later, the 13th “7” symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, the “bell” symbol is arranged so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next symbol is 5 symbols or less. For example, the “bell” symbol of No. 0 and the “bell” symbol of No. 5 on the middle reel 32M are arranged so that the interval is 5 symbols, and the “bell” symbol of the ninth reel 32M is arranged. And the 12th “bell” symbol are arranged so that the interval is three symbols. In this way, the “bell” symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the symbols of the same type is 5 symbols or less. By adopting such a symbol arrangement, the middle stop switch 43 can be operated at any timing. Even in such a case, the “bell” symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M when the Cherry Bell winning or the 7 Bell winning is established.

  For example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 11th “7” symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower level, the “bell” symbol is stopped at the middle level if the middle reel 32M is stopped as it is. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 12th “bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, the middle reel 32M can be stopped after sliding the middle reel 32M for four symbols and then the number “17”. The “bell” symbol can be stopped in the middle.

  In this way, regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 42 and 43 are operated, the “cherry” symbol or the “7” symbol can be stopped in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the display window 26L. In addition, a “bell” symbol can be displayed in the middle of the display window 26M. Therefore, if a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize is won in the prize drawing lottery, it corresponds to a stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on any one of the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 (see FIG. 6), the so-called Cherry Bell prize or the 7 bell prize can be established without being missed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. As other winning modes that the slot machine 10 can take, a replay winning that is established when the “replay” symbol, the “replay” symbol, and the “replay” symbol are stopped from the left on the active line is provided. When the replay winning is established, the medal payout and the state transition are not performed, but the player can play the next game without reducing the medals owned and without inserting medals. Therefore, when a replay winning is achieved, the medals are paid out for the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted in the game, that is, 1 for 1 and 2 for 3 and 2 for 3 In this case, it can be considered that three medals are paid out. Note that the probability of winning a replay winning in the general gaming state is not limited to the number of medals inserted (the number of bets), and it is as high as about 1 / 7.3 in the case of 1-, 2-, 3- Set to probability. If this replay prize is established with a high probability, a special small role prize (Cherry Bell prize or 7 bell prize) will be established if a BB prize or a game with one or two cards is played. A lot of sense of challenge can be given to the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the “replay” symbols for establishing the replay winning are each reels 32L, 32M so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next is 5 symbols or less. , 32R. For example, the 8th “replay” symbol and the 11th “replay” symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval is 3 symbols, and the 1st “replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M and 6 The “replay” symbols of the numbers are arranged so that the interval is 5 symbols. As described above, the “replay” symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the interval between the symbols of the same type is 5 symbols or less. As described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In any case, the “replay” symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R when the replay winning is established. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 3rd “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower level, the 4th “replay” symbol is stopped in the middle level if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the first “replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, the middle reel 32M is slipped by four symbols and then stopped. The “replay” symbol can be stopped in the middle. Therefore, when the replay winning is won, the “replay” symbol can be stopped at the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6) regardless of the timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 being operated. Therefore, a replay winning can be established without so-called losing.

  In other cases, that is, when the combination of symbols described above on the active line does not stop, the medal payout or the game state transition is not performed at all, and the game goes off. That is, the “youth” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the “cherry” symbol on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the “star” symbol on the middle reel 32M are not involved in any winnings. In other words, it can be said that each of the symbols is a no-benefits symbol unrelated to the privilege given to the player. That is, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided with a bonus symbol related to winning such as a “bell” symbol and a non-privileged symbol irrelevant to winning such as a “young” symbol, for example. In the following, a combination of symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as a combination of winning symbols. For example, the BB symbol combination is a symbol BB winning combination, that is, a combination of “7” symbol, “7” symbol, and “7” symbol.

  As described above, in this slot machine 10, the probability of winning a BB prize when a game is played with three medals inserted is sufficiently higher than when the game is played with one or two medals inserted. Since it is set, the player can expect to receive a lot of medals when the BB winning is established, and can play one game by inserting three medals. As a result, medals are consumed quickly, and the utilization rate of the slot machine in the hall can be increased.

  On the other hand, if a game is played with one or two medals inserted, a Cherry Bell winning prize with three medal payouts is set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is set high. 1 or 2 medals remaining at hand while expecting the player to get 3 medals paid out when the Cherry Bell prize is established if 1 or 2 medals remain at the player's hand Can be entered to play a single game. Thus, if three medals are paid out due to the Cherry Bell winning, the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB winning. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is not good, the game can be ended without leaving extra medals for the player. Thus, the slot machine 10 can entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals to the player. And the problem that the player loses by ending the game without using the lent medal, the player can not collect the medals lent out by bringing back the remaining medals, or brought it back from another hall By using the medal by the player, it is possible to avoid the problem that the hall side is damaged.

  Also, when a game is played with one medal inserted, a 7-bell winning prize with two medal payouts is also set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is also set high. Once a medal is left in the game, if the 7-bell prize is established, the player will expect to receive 2 medals, and once the remaining medal is inserted, The game can be played. As a result, when two medal payouts are made due to the completion of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell prize to be completed, in which three more medal payouts are made. , You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting three medals that are paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy the medals and you can use up your medals even if you miss. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals while giving the player more enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in the lottery of the winning mode, when a Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out or a 7 bell prize where two medals are paid out is won, regardless of the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Because the stop pattern can be stopped on the active line without missing, as a result of the lottery of the game that the player started with one or two, the Cherry Bell winning or 7 Bell winning was won as the winning role In such a case, it is possible to reliably establish those winnings without depending on an artificial operation. In addition, the game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize while aiming for other prizes (for example, a BB prize).

  Here, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the general gaming state in the case of one-sheet and two-sheet game will be described. First, in the case of playing one card, the winning probability in the general game state of the watermelon winning and the bell winning is set to 1/65536, and when any winning is made, 3 medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning is set to about 1 / 6.0, respectively, and when the cherry bell winning is achieved, three pieces, when the 7 bell winning is achieved Two medals will be paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general game state of the replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay winning is achieved, as described above, it is equivalent to the case where one medal has been paid out. Can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the medal payout number is zero. Here, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game under the general gaming state is equal to the value obtained by multiplying the number of medals paid out corresponding to each winning probability and adding the multiplication results. Expected value is about 0.96. That is, in the general gaming state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out with respect to the number of bets (one) is about 96%, and it is expected that the number of medals owned by the player decreases by about 0.04 for every game played. .

  In addition, in the case of two cards, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the watermelon winning and the bell winning is set to 1/65536, and when any winning is achieved, 3 medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general game state of the Cherry Bell winning is set to about 1 / 1.8, and when the Cherry Bell winning is established, three medals are paid out. In addition, the winning probability in the general game state of the replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3, and when the replay winning is established, as described above, it is equivalent to the case where two medals are paid out. Can think. On the other hand, the winning probability in the general gaming state of the BB winning is set to 1/65536, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, but the medal payout number is zero. Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game under the general gaming state with two cards is about 1.94. In other words, in the general gaming state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (2) is about 97%, and it is expected that the medals owned by the player will decrease by about 0.06 for every game played. .

  In this way, in both cases of 1 and 2 sheets, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is set to a value close to 100%, so that the gaming machine can be used with 1 or 2 sheets. In this case, the medal is returned to the player with an expected value of almost 100%. In other words, even if a game is played with one or two cards, the medals will hardly decrease, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player will have one remaining Or you can make sure that you want to play a game using two medals. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player will leave the medal and finish the game.

  On the other hand, if the game is played with 1 or 2 cards, it is expected that the number of medals will decrease slightly, so if you repeat the game with 1 or 2 cards, the number of medals will increase. Instead, it has been reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming for an increase in medals by repeatedly playing the game with one or two. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with three cards having a high probability of winning a BB prize.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out is set to 3 which is the maximum bet number when the game is played with one or two cards and the Cherry Bell winning is established, and the game is performed with one card. The number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell prize is established is set to 2, but the number of medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell prize is established is set to a multiple of 3, and the number of medals to be paid out when the 7-bell prize is established. It may be set to a multiple of 2. However, if the number of payouts is set to 3 or 2 when the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is established, even if the expected value of the medal payout number is set to less than 100%, The winning probability can be set high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established and to increase the probability that three or two medals will be given to the player. You can make me want to play a game using medals.

  In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state is “setting 1” is shown, but even if the setting state is set to any of “setting 2” to “setting 6”, one win and The winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of two is set so that the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100%. In the present embodiment, the winning probabilities corresponding to each winning mode in the case of 1 and 2 are changed according to the setting state ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"). The winning probability of multiplying and two sheets may be constant regardless of the setting state. In other words, the winning probability may be changed according to the set state only in the case of three sheets. In addition, in the case of 1- and 2-seats, the winning probability of at least one of BB winning, watermelon winning, bell winning and replay winning according to the setting state ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6") Although changed, the winning probabilities of the Cherry Bell winning and 7 Bell winning, which are special small role winning in the case of 1 and 2 wins, are not changed and may be fixed values.

  In addition, in this slot machine 10, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells. When the game is played with three cards, the left reel 32L Even if the “Cherry” symbol is stopped and the “Bell” symbol is stopped on the middle reel 32M, the Cherry Bell prize will not be established and it will be handled as a detachment. It is possible to draw attention to the player as a winning prize. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol stops at the cherry bell winning stop symbol, the player can be given great joy.

  Similarly, the winning mode is established only when a 7-bell winning game is played with one card, and when the game is played with two or three cards, a “7” symbol is displayed on the left reel 32L. Even if the “bell” symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, the 7-bell prize will not be established and will be handled as a detachment. It can be noticed. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece, if the symbol stops at the stop symbol of 7-bell winning, a great joy can be given to the player.

  Also, in the present slot machine 10, even when a game is played with one or two cards, the BB winning is set although the winning probability is very low. Thereby, even when a game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be established.

  In the slot machine 10, when a game is played with one or two cards, a watermelon prize or a bell prize, which is a normal small prize other than a BB prize or a replay prize, is established. Also, unlike the medal payout number when the game is played with 3 cards, 3 medal payouts are made as in the case of the Cherry Bell winning, so that payout 3 medals are inserted and the player can play another game while expecting the BB prize to be established, and the player can surely enjoy the game without leaving any extra medals. it can. In the slot machine 10, the probability of winning a watermelon or a bell is reduced when a game is played with one or two cards, while the probability of winning a cherry bell or a seven bell is set high. As a result, the player can be further impressed by the fact that the Cherry Bell or 7-Bel prize is a special small part prize with one or two cards, and one or two cards. When a game is played, the player can have a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10.

  The main controller 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on the MPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the MPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects an operation of the start lever 41 are provided. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect operations of the stop switches 42 to 44, a first insertion medal detection sensor 45a and a second insertion medal detection sensor 45b that detect medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, A payout detection sensor 51a for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 51; credit insertion detection sensors 56a to 58a for individually detecting operations of the respective credit insertion switches 56 to 58; an adjustment detection sensor 59a for detecting an operation of the adjustment switch 59; Reset that detects the operation of the reset switch 72 Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that the setting key is inserted into the key detection sensor 72a and the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON are connected, and signals from these various sensors are input / output ports. The data is output to the MPU 102 via 104.

  A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91 b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power-off state and generates a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also when the power switch 71 powers off. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been shut off when this drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the MPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a time sufficient for executing the power failure process by the main controller 101 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a medal path switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a display control device 81, an external concentration terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), and the like are connected via an input / output port 104. Yes.

  The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 10, but the MPU 181, the image controller 186, and a substrate on which various memories are integrated are provided, and display control is performed after receiving a signal from the main control device 101. The device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is a main board that manages and manages games. Various display units 60 to 62 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

  In the display control device 81, the character ROM 187 for storing various image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is constituted by a NAND flash memory which is a small area and has a large storage capacity and is an inexpensive memory. . Thus, the capacity of the character ROM 187 can be easily increased, and a large number of images can be prepared as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, in order to enhance the player's interest, the auxiliary display unit The images displayed on the screen can be diversified and complicated. Note that the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.), the display control device 81 has a memory with a slow reading speed. Even when image data is used as a storage means for image data, an invention has been made to display an image without any problem at a time when it is desired to be displayed. Details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The above-described MPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. A RAM 106 for securing and a free-run counter 107 for generating random numbers are incorporated. The MPU 102 also includes various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, and various counters such as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, as is well known. Built in.

  The free-run counter 107 is a counter configured by hardware that generates and updates random numbers from 0 to 65535 in a short cycle. After confirming the operation of the start lever 41 based on the output signal of the start detection sensor 41a, the MPU 102 latches the value of the free-run counter 107 by a hardware circuit and stores the latched value in the RAM 106. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter 107 each time the start lever 41 is operated. The value of the free-run counter latched and stored in the RAM 106 is used to draw a winning mode (combination) of a game started by operating the start lever 41.

  The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and a program for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 12 and subsequent figures is stored in the ROM 105 as a part of the control program. The ROM 105 is provided with at least a lottery table storage area 105a for storing a lottery table used for lottery in a winning mode.

  Here, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lottery table selected in the general gaming state when the setting state is set to “setting 1”. FIG. 9A shows three inserted medals. (3) Multi-drawing lottery table used when (3), (b) is a 2-ply lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is 2 (2), (c) is The drawing shows a 1-sheet drawing lottery table used when the number of inserted medals is 1 (1).

  Each lottery table is set with an index value IV, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning mode for winning, and a point value corresponding to the winning probability corresponding to the winning mode. PV is set for each lottery table. Specifically, BB winning is associated with IV = 1 as a winning mode, Watermelon winning is associated with IV = 2, Bell winning is associated with IV = 3, and IV = 4. Is associated with a cherry bell prize, IV = 5 is associated with a 7-bell prize, and IV = 6 is associated with a replay prize.

  Also, in the three-sheet drawing lottery table, as shown in FIG. 9A, PV = 256 is associated with IV = 1 (BB winning), and PV = 256 with IV = 2 (watermelon winning). 8192 is associated, PV = 12850 is associated with IV = 3 (bell prize), PV = 0 is associated with IV = 4 (cherry prize), and IV = 5 (7 bell prize). ) Is associated with PV = 0, and IV = 6 (replay prize) is associated with PV = 8980.

  Here, the lottery method of the winning mode will be briefly described. When the random number value of the free run counter 107 is latched by the operation of the start lever 41 and stored in the RAM 106, first, the value of the point value PV associated with IV = 1 (BB winning) (FIG. 9A). In the lottery table shown in FIG. 14, 256) is added to the value of the latched random number, and this is used as the determination value DV (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the determination value DV is larger than 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination of the game (see S305 and S306 in FIG. 14), and the lottery is ended. That is, when a lottery is performed using the three-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, when the latched random number value is in the range of 655280 to 65535, the BB winning prize is determined as the winning combination. . Therefore, the winning probability is set to 1/256 as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the determination value DV is 65535 or less, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (see S307 in FIG. 14), and the value of the point value PV corresponding to the value of the index value IV after the increase is added to the determination value DV. Then, the determination value DV is updated (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the updated determination value DV is larger than 65535, the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV after the advance is determined as a winning combination, and the lottery is completed. Further, the index value IV is incremented by 1 to update the determination value DV (addition of the point value PV corresponding to the IV after the advancement), and determination of the updated determination value DV (whether the determination value DV is larger than 65535). ) Is repeated until the winning combination is determined or until there is no determined combination (IV exceeds the maximum value) (see S304 to S308 in FIG. 14).

  Accordingly, when a lottery is performed using the three-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the watermelon winning is determined as a winning combination when the latched random number value is in the range of 57088 to 655279, When the value of the latched random number is in the range of 44238 to 57087, the Bell winning combination is determined as a winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 35258 to 44237, the winning of the replay is determined as a winning combination. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/8 for the watermelon winning, is set to about 1 / 5.1 for the Bell winning, and is approximately set for the replay winning. It will be set to 7.3.

  In the three-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9A, the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (Cherry Bell winning) and IV = 5 (7 Bell winning) is set to 0. Therefore, even if the determination value DV is updated using this value, the value does not change before and after the update. When the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 and IV = 5 is added to the determination value DV, since the determination value DV is 65535 or less, when IV = 4 and IV = 5 Even if the determination value after the update is determined, it is not determined to be larger than 65535. Therefore, by setting the point value PV corresponding to IV = 4 (Cherry Bell prize) and IV = 5 (7 Bell prize) to 0, the Cherry Bell prize and the 7 Bell prize are not selected as the winning combination. It has become.

  In the two-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB winning), and PV = 1 is associated with IV = 2 (watermelon winning). , IV = 3 (Bell Winner) is associated with PV = 1, IV = 4 (Cherry Bell Winner) is associated with PV = 36400, and IV = 5 (7 Bell Winner) is PV. = 0 and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay winning). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the two-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as a winning combination, and the latched random number When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random value is 65533, the bell winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number is within the range of 29133 to 65532. At some point, the Cherry Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is within the range of 15153 to 29132, the replay winning combination is determined as the winning combination. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, and is approximately 1 / 1.8 for the cherry bell winning. The replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3. Since the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7-bell winning) is set to 0, as described above, the 7-bell winning is not set as a winning combination.

  Further, in the one-sheet drawing lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, PV = 1 is associated with IV = 1 (BB prize), and PV = 1 is associated with IV = 2 (watermelon prize). PV = 1 is associated with IV = 3 (Bell Prize), PV = 10880 is associated with IV = 4 (Cherry Bell Prize), and IV = 5 (7 Bell Prize). PV = 10880 is associated, and PV = 8980 is associated with IV = 6 (replay winning). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the one-sheet lottery table shown in FIG. 9C, when the value of the latched random number is 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination, and the random number of the latched random number When the value is 65534, the watermelon winning is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is 65533, the bell winning is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value is in the range of 54653-65532. At some point, the Cherry Bell winning combination is determined as a winning combination, and when the latched random number value is in the range of 43773 to 54652, the 7 Bell winning combination is determined as the winning combination, and the latched random number value is 34793-43772. When it is within the range, the replay winning is determined as the winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/65536 for the BB winning, the watermelon winning, and the bell winning, respectively, and about 6.0 for the cherry bell winning and the 7 bell winning. It is set to 1 / minute, and the replay winning is set to about 1 / 7.3.

  In the lottery table storage area 105a, for each “setting 1” to “setting 6”, a one-hatch lottery table, a two-hatch lottery table, and a three-hatch lottery table for the general gaming state are stored. Yes. Also, a bonus state lottery table used when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state is prepared for each of “setting 1” to “setting 6”. Then, a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning mode (combination) is set according to the setting state and gaming state of the slot machine 10 and the number of inserted medals (number of bets). That is, when the number of bets is three in the general gaming state, a three-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set, and when the number of bets is two, When a two-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state is set and the number of bets is one, a one-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. When the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a bonus state lottery table corresponding to the set state of the slot machine 10 is set (see FIG. 15). Then, using the set lottery table, a lottery of a winning mode is performed.

  Note that, as the lottery table used when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a different lottery table is not provided according to the number of bets (1 to 3). This is because the game is played with the number of bets being limited to three in the state. Therefore, in the bonus state, the corresponding bonus state lottery table is simply set according to the setting state (“Setting 1” to “Setting 6”) of the slot machine 10.

  In this slot machine 10, when in the general gaming state, the three-hatch lottery table, the two-hatch lottery table, and the one-hatch lottery table shown in FIGS. BB winning prize probability when the game is played with three medals inserted can be set sufficiently higher than when the game is played with one or two medals inserted. . Therefore, as described above, it is possible to have one player play a game by inserting three medals while expecting the player to obtain a lot of medals when the BB winning is established. As a result, medals are consumed quickly, and the utilization rate of the slot machine in the hall can be increased.

  In addition, when a game is played by inserting one or two medals, it is possible to set a Cherry Bell winning prize with three medal payouts as a winning combination candidate, and to further increase the winning probability. Therefore, if one or two medals remain at the player's hand, the player expects the player to get three medals when the Cherry Bell prize is established, while the one or two remaining at hand. A single game can be played by inserting medals. Thus, if three medals are paid out due to the Cherry Bell winning, the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB winning. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is not good, the game can be ended without leaving extra medals for the player.

  In addition, when a game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-bell winning prize with two medal payouts can be set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability can be set higher. If one medal remains in the player's hand and the player expects the player to get two medals if the 7-bell prize is established, the player will throw in the remaining medal. Can be played once. As a result, when two medal payouts are made due to the completion of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell prize to be completed, in which three more medal payouts are made. , You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting three medals that are paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy the medals and you can use up your medals even if you miss. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals while giving the player more enjoyment of the game.

  Thus, the slot machine 10 can entertain the game to the end without leaving extra medals to the player.

  Further, by using the 1-sheet drawing lottery table or the 2-sheet drawing lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 105a, the winning probability of each winning mode can be set to the value shown in FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the ratio of the number of medals paid out with respect to the number of bets can be set to a value less than 100% and as close as possible to 100% in both cases of 1 and 2 sheets. it can. Therefore, even if you play a game with 1 or 2 cards, the medals will hardly decrease. Alternatively, it is possible to reliably make a player want to play a game using two medals, and the possibility that the player leaves the medal and finishes the game can be further reduced. On the other hand, if the game is repeated with one or two cards, the number of medals decreases, so the player can increase the medal by repeating the game with one or two cards. It can be made not to aim. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, it is possible to direct the player to play the game with three pieces having a high probability of winning a BB prize.

  In addition, by switching and using each lottery table according to the number of bets, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bells. If it is done, it can be handled as a miss without establishing a Cherry Bell prize, so pay attention to the player as the Cherry Bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one or two. Can be made. Similarly, a winning mode that is established only when a 7-bell prize is played with a single game is used, and a 7-bell prize is not established when a game is played with two or three cards. Since it is handled as a detachment, it is possible to draw attention to the player, assuming that the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol stops with the cherry bell winning symbol or the seven bell winning symbol, a great joy can be given to the player.

  In addition, even if the game is played with one or two cards, it can be set so that a BB winning is achieved although the winning probability is very low. Even when a game is played, the player can have a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be established.

  In the slot machine 10, the probability of winning a watermelon or a bell winning when a game is played with one or two is reduced, while the probability of winning a cherry bell or seven bell is set high. It is possible to give the player a further impression that the Cherry Bell prize or the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize with one or two cards, and one or two cards. When a game is played by hanging, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established.

  In this embodiment, the point value PV corresponding to IV = 5 (7-bell winning) is set to 0 in the 2-sheet lottery table, and IV = 4 (Cherry Bell winning in the 3-sheet lottery table. ) And IV = 5 (7-bell winning), by setting the point value PV to 0, the winning mode is selected, while the winning mode is not selected, but the winning mode is selected. It is good also as a structure which does not win the said winning aspect by not setting the index value IV which becomes and not performing the lottery of those winning aspects.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 106 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. In the RAM 106, a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of a combination, and a sliding table used when stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In addition to the slide table storage area 106b for storing the game information, the status information storage area 106c for storing the gaming status such as the bonus status, etc., at least a backup area is provided.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including power shutdown by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power-off based on the backup area information. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by the power failure process (see S103 in FIG. 12), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  Further, the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 102 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is shut off, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 81 of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 81. In the description of FIG. 10, the detailed description of the portions described in the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 8 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. The display control device 81 displays an image and a microcomputer centering on the MPU 181 that is arithmetic processing means. An image controller 188 for drawing and displaying the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and a character ROM 187 storing image data displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are mounted.

  The MPU 181 is connected to an input / output port 186, a character ROM 187, and an image controller 188 via an internal bus, and a signal latch circuit 182 that latches a control signal such as a command transmitted from the main controller 101, and a predetermined A clock circuit 183 that outputs a rectangular wave having a frequency, a program ROM 184 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 181 and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63, and the like, and is stored in the program ROM 184. A work RAM 185 for securing a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program is connected. Note that a one-chip microcomputer in which the program ROM 184, the work RAM 185, the signal latch circuit 182 and the clock circuit 183 described above are built in the MPU may be used.

  The MPU 181 is connected to a power supply device 91, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 via an input / output port 186. The power supply device 91 is configured to receive a power failure signal that is output when the drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Further, the MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 101, and executes drive control of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 via the input / output port 186. . Hereinafter, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are collectively referred to as an auxiliary effect unit.

  The work RAM 185 is provided with at least a received command storage area 185a and a bet number storage area 185b. The received command recording area 185a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 101. When the display control device 81 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 latches the received command by the signal latch circuit 182 and generates a command interrupt signal toward the MPU 181. The MPU 181 executes command interrupt processing (not shown) triggered by the generation of the command interrupt signal, and stores the command latched by the signal latch circuit 182 in the received command storage area 185a. The received command storage area 185a is configured to operate as a FIFO (First In First Out) type ring buffer, and a command received from the main controller 101 is received in the received command storage area 185a by main processing executed by the MPU 181. If stored, the commands are read in the order in which they are stored, and processing corresponding to each command (for example, start command processing shown in FIG. 19, lottery result command processing shown in FIG. 20, error command processing shown in FIG. 21, etc.) ).

  The bet number storage area 185b is an area for storing information relating to the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted at the start of the game. In the slot machine 10, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted and the start lever 41 is operated by the player, the number of medals inserted (the number of bets) by a normal process executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101. A start command including information related to this is set (see S209 in FIG. 13), and the start command is transmitted from the main control apparatus 101 to the display control apparatus 81 by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 (see FIG. 13). (See S110 in FIG. 12). By receiving this start command, the display control device 81 grasps that the start lever 41 has been operated and a game start command has been generated, and executes a start command process (see FIG. 19). Information regarding the included bet number is extracted and stored in the bet number storage area 185b (see S801 in FIG. 19). In the bet number storage area 185b, information regarding the bet number included in the start command may be stored as it is, or information regarding the bet number may be stored in a format different from the information regarding the bet number included in the start command. You may make it store.

  In the display control device 81, based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the number of medals inserted at the start of the game (the number of bets) is grasped, and the auxiliary effect section is executed based on the bet number. Control the production mode. For example, when it is determined that the game is started with the number of bets being three based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 receives various commands received from the main control device 101. The production mode is selected based on the gaming state of the slot machine 10 determined by the determination and the result of the lottery (the determination of whether or not the winning mode is determined) based on the start command, and the auxiliary production unit executes various types of production (FIG. 20). S902).

  As an effect corresponding to the number of bets of three, for example, as a normal effect, a character that performs a predetermined action is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a “normal effect”, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is “Challenge BB prize!” The message “BB winning challenge production” is displayed to prompt the player to arrange the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode, and the message “BB winning selection!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the upper lamp A random number counter (not shown) prepared in the display control device 81 includes a lighting of 63 and an audio output from the speaker 64, and a “BB winning announcement effect” for notifying that the BB winning mode is set as a winning combination. )) Or the result of a lottery (judgment determination of the winning combination) grasped by a lottery result command received from the main controller 101, which will be described later, received from the main controller 101. Depending on the game state of the slot machine 10 to be grasped by the state command, it determines the representation embodiment to be executed by the auxiliary rendering unit from among the rendition.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is started with the number of bets being one or two, the auxiliary control unit executes the result based on the result of the lottery performed based on the generation of the start command by the main control device 101. The production mode to be selected is selected. For example, it is determined that the number of bets is one and the cherry bell winning mode, the 7-bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or in which winning mode If it is determined that the player has not won, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display the message “Challenge 7 bell challenge!” And output a dedicated sound from the speaker 64. The auxiliary effect section is controlled to execute “Cherry Bell Winning / 7 Bell Winning Challenge Effect” in which the upper lamp 63 is lit in a dedicated manner (see S911 in FIG. 20). In addition, it is determined that the number of bets is two and either the Cherry Bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is won by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, or any winning mode is not won. If it is determined, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display unit 65 to display a message “Challenge is a challenge!”, And causes the speaker 64 to output a dedicated sound, so that the upper lamp 63 is in a dedicated mode. The auxiliary effect section is controlled to execute “Cherry Bell winning challenge effect” to be lit (see S910 in FIG. 20).

  When a game is played with one card, the expectation that 3 or 2 medals will be paid out according to the establishment of the 1 Cherry Bell Award or 7 Bell Award Mode by "Cherry Bell Award / 7 Bell Award Challenge Direction" Can be strongly held by the player. In addition, when a game is played with two cards, the “Cherry Bell winning challenge production” can give the player a strong sense of expectation that three medals will be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning mode is established. . Therefore, the player can play the game with one or two cards while having fun, and can make the player strongly think that he wants to play the game without leaving an extra medal.

  It should be noted that the “Cherry Bell Award / 7 Bell Award Challenge Effect” and the “Cherry Bell Award Challenge Effect” may be effects produced in at least one of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65. . Separately from these, a lamp is provided on the game panel 25. For example, when a single board is used, the lamp is lit red, and when two boards are used, the lamp is lit blue. May be configured to be executed.

  Further, when it is determined that the number of bets is one or two, if the BB winning mode is determined by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 displays the BB As an effect of notifying the player that the winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a “BB winning notification effect” for displaying the message “BB winning!” On the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed (see S904 in FIG. 20). ), If it is determined that the watermelon winning mode is won, the display control device 81 displays “watermelon winning” on the auxiliary display unit 65 as an effect to notify the player that the watermelon winning mode is set as a winning combination. “Watermelon winning announcement effect” that displays the message “Win!” Is executed (see S906 in FIG. 20), and if it is determined that the bell winning mode is won, the display control device 81 Then, as an effect of notifying the player that the bell winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a “Bell winning notification effect” is executed in which a message “Bell winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 20). (See S908).

  Here, when the player starts the game with one or two cards, that is, when the number of bets is one or two, BB is determined according to the lottery table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C. The winning probability of the winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are kept very low, while the winning probability of the Cherry Bell winning mode and the 7-bell winning mode is set high, so that the player can select the BB winning mode, There is a high possibility of playing a game without expecting the formation of the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode, and conversely expecting the establishment of the cherry bell winning mode and the 7-bell winning mode. In addition, in the slot machine 10, the Cherry Bell winning mode and the 7 Bell winning mode are effective with the stop pattern corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, which are not missed at any timing once they are won as the winning combination. Since it is configured to stop on the line, the player who started the game with one or two is attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R displayed on the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. There is a high possibility of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 without looking at the symbols.

  Therefore, when a game is played with one or two cards, even if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning role, and the player is not aware of it, Since the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all winning modes that may be missed, the BB winning mode and the like may be missed. In addition, the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the game until the BB winning mode is established (that is, until the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode are aligned on the effective line). If the player finishes the game without noticing the winning of the winning mode, another player establishes the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has won the winning of the BB winning mode As a result, there is a risk of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case where the game is played with one or two slots, the slot machine 10 has a BB winning mode, a watermelon winning mode, or a bell winning mode. Winning is notified by the display of the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, the notification is made while the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the player can know the winning of any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode. Accordingly, when the player plays a game with one or two cards, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning) ascertained by the notification is obtained. Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the active line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player misses the game, the player can receive a new medal and continue the game until the BB winning mode is established. it can.

  The above notification may be made by turning on the upper lamp 63 or outputting sound from the speaker 64. Two or more kinds of display of the auxiliary display unit 65, turning on the upper lamp 63, and outputting sound from the speaker 64 may be performed. It may be performed by a combination. Further, a notification-dedicated lamp may be provided on the game panel 25, and a notification effect corresponding to each winning combination may be performed according to the lighting color of the lamp.

  As described above, the character ROM 187 is a memory that stores image data displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. An image controller 188 is also connected to the internal bus, and the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187 to transfer the image data stored in the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 connected to the image controller 188 or the normal use. It can be transferred to the video RAM 190.

  The character ROM 187 is composed of a NAND flash memory 187a. Since the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, the capacity of the character ROM 187 can be easily increased. For example, in the present slot machine, many images are stored as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes. Thereby, in order to raise a player's interest more, the image displayed on the auxiliary | assistant display part 65 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 187a has a defective data block in which data cannot be written due to its nature. Therefore, the character ROM 187 is provided with a known arbitration circuit 187b (see, for example, Patent Document 1) that performs data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 187a while avoiding a defective data block. Provided. The arbitration circuit 187b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 187a in the character ROM 187 and avoids access to the defective data block, so that the MPU 181 has a different defect in each NAND flash memory 187a. The character ROM 187 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used as the character ROM 187, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 187 from becoming complicated.

  The image controller 188 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. Then, based on an instruction from the MPU 181, an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is drawn, and data (drawing image data) corresponding to the drawn image is input through the input / output port at a predetermined timing. By transferring to 65, the drawing image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  A resident video RAM 189 and a normal video RAM 190 are connected to the image controller 188, and image data required for drawing an image by the image controller 188 is read out from the character ROM 187 by the MPU 181 in advance before drawing. It is transferred to the video RAM 189 for normal use or the normal video RAM 190. At this time, the MPU 181 determines whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 (and to which address to store it) according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 184. To decide.

  When the image controller 188 draws an image, image drawing processing is executed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without using the image data in the character ROM 187. As a result, even if the character ROM 187 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed, the image controller 188 uses the image data stored in advance in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 from the character ROM 187. Since the drawing is performed, the image can be immediately drawn without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 187. Therefore, a desired image can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a desired time.

  The MPU 181 determines whether the image data required when the image controller 188 draws an image is stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 (and at which address) the MPU 181 stores the program ROM 184. Is determined according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the image storage, and when the image controller 188 is instructed to draw the image, the necessary image data storage destination (resident video RAM 189 and normal video) Which address of the RAM 190 is stored and which address is stored). The image controller 188 reads necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 based on an instruction from the MPU 181. As a result, the image controller 188 does not need to determine the storage location where the necessary image data is stored, and thus can concentrate on drawing the image.

  When the image controller 188 receives an image drawing instruction from the MPU 181, the image data required for drawing is stored based on the type of image required for drawing (in the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190. It may be determined in which address it is stored and at which address it is stored. In this case, when the MPU 181 stores image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the image controller 188 displays the type of image (or corresponding image) displayed by the stored image data. The address of the character ROM 187 storing the data) and the storage location of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 181, and the image type (or corresponding) is stored in the RAM provided in the image controller 188. The address of the character ROM 187 storing the image data) and the storage destination of the image data may be stored in association with each other. Then, based on the information stored in the RAM, the image controller 188 may determine the storage location of the image data necessary for the image. By determining the image data storage destination by the image controller 188, the processing load of the MPU 181 can be reduced.

  The resident video RAM 189 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) having one input / output port (hereinafter referred to as “1-port type”), and image data transferred from the character ROM 187 is overwritten while the power is turned on. It is used so that it can be kept without being lost. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 189 is resident in the resident video RAM 189. The resident video RAM 189 includes data corresponding to an image displayed when the power is turned on among images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, data corresponding to an image displayed frequently, and the main control device 101. Alternatively, data corresponding to an image to be displayed immediately among images determined to be displayed by the display control device 81 is transferred from the character ROM 187 and is resident.

  On the other hand, the normal video RAM 190 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is constituted by a one-port DRAM (Dynamic RAM). In the normal video RAM 190, when the image controller 188 draws an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 189, the image data read from the character ROM 187 in advance is drawn. Is for storing temporarily. Further, image data (drawn image data) drawn by the image controller 188 is also stored in a drawn image area (not shown) provided in the normal video RAM 190, and the image controller 188 matches the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Thus, by transmitting the drawing image data stored in the drawing image area of the normal video RAM 190 to the auxiliary display unit 65, an image corresponding to the drawing image data is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  The resident video RAM 189 includes a power-on main image area 189a, a back image area 189b, a character symbol area 189c, a notification effect image area 189d, and an error message image area 189e.

  The power-on main image area 189a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 while the display control device 81 is performing initialization processing at the time of power-on. The main image when the power is turned on is a message image for notifying a player or the like that initialization processing is being performed when the power is turned on, such as “Waiting for power! Please wait for a while”. Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

  In the display control device 81, when the power switch 71 is turned on and power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81, the MPU 181 accesses the character ROM 181 directly, and the character ROM 181 first corresponds to the main image when power is turned on. Data is read out and transferred to the main image area 189a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 189 via a buffer RAM 188a described later provided in the image controller 188 (see S702 and S703 in FIG. 17). When the image data is stored in the power-on main image area 189a, the MPU 181 instructs the image controller 188 to draw the power-on main image (see S70 in FIG. 17). As a result, the image controller 188 draws the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 189 a and displays the drawn power-on main image on the auxiliary display unit 65. . Then, the main image at power-on is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

  Here, for initialization processing of the display control device 81, other image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 (image data other than the main image when the power is turned on) is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189. Processing is included (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). That is, since all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on, the image controller 188 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189 after the initialization process. Image drawing processing. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 189 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, the responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to displaying some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be kept high. it can.

  Further, immediately after the power is supplied, the display control device 81 transfers the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 189. After the input main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, control is performed so that the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed. After being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 until all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character RO187 to the resident video RAM 189. Continue to be.

  In this slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is resident from the character ROM 187 due to the slow reading speed. Although it takes a long time to be transferred to the video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, first, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is supplemented. Since the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189 after being displayed on the display unit 65 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189. While being played, players and hall personnel , Main image when displayed power-on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored in the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189, so that when a power failure occurs instantaneously, the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 189. If the remaining data remains, the power-on main image can be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the power-on main image area 189a at the time of power recovery.

  The back image area 189b and the character design area 189c are areas for storing image data corresponding to back images and character designs used in various effects displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, respectively. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 6 such as a character design.

  In the display control device 81, when it is determined that the gaming state of the slot machine 10 shifts to a different gaming state (for example, from the normal state to the bonus state) based on the command received from the main control device 101, the back image and the character design are displayed. It is configured to change the back image and the character design when changing or performing various other effects, and the back image and the character design are required to change immediately according to the contents of the received command.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, image data corresponding to the back image and the character design is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process performed in the display control device 81 when the power is turned on. Are transferred in advance to a back image area 189b and a character design area 189c through a later-described buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). When the display control device 81 changes the back image or the character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, but the resident video RAM 189. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 188 by reading out image data previously resident in the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 187.

  In the back image area 189b, image data corresponding to all back images may be resident, or image data corresponding to some back images may be resident. Further, when image data corresponding to a part of the back image is resident, at least data corresponding to the back image to be displayed immediately in response to a received command from the main control device 101 may be resident. As a result, when the back image is changed immediately upon receiving a reception command from the main control device 101, image data corresponding to the back image after the change is always resident in the back image area 189b. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  Further, when the rear image is scrolled and displayed over time, the image data corresponding to the entire range to be scrolled may be resident in the rear image area 189b, or within a predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed on the screen may be resident in the rear image area 189b. Further, for a predetermined back image such as a back image displayed after power-on, image data corresponding to the entire range to be scrolled is resident in the back image area 189b, and for another back image, a predetermined time from the time when the back image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within may be resident in the rear image area 189b. As a result, at least the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the time when the rear image is changed is resident in the rear image area 189b. Even in such a case, an image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data resident in the back image area 189 b and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  In addition, when changing to a rear image that is scrolled and displayed, it is more preferable to always start display from a fixed initial position as the position of the rear image displayed at the time of change. . As a result, the image data to be resident in the back image area 189b can be limited to the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the fixedly set initial position, and the data amount can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from when the rear image is changed resides in the rear image area 189b, the image data resident in the rear image area 189b by the image controller 188 is used. While the image is drawn and the drawn image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 reads out image data corresponding to the remaining scroll range from the character ROM 187 and transfers it to the normal video RAM 190. It may be.

  Thus, while the rear image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the scroll range corresponding to the rear image data resident in the rear image area 189, the scroll range not resident in the rear image area 189 is supported. Since the back image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 190, the back image data already stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used when displaying the back image of the scroll range that is not resident in the back image area 189. Thus, an image can be immediately drawn by the image controller and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, at the time of shifting from the display of the back image of the scroll range residing in the back image area 189b to the display of the back image of the scroll range not residing in the back image area 189b, the back image is read again from the character ROM 187. Since there is no need, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 187, the transition of the back image can be performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, in the character symbol area 189c, data corresponding to all character symbols may be resident, or data corresponding to some character symbols may be resident. Further, when data corresponding to a part of character symbols is resident, at least data corresponding to character symbols to be displayed immediately in response to a received command from the main control device 101 may be resident. As a result, when the character design is changed immediately upon receiving a reception command from the main control device 101, image data corresponding to the character design after the change is always resident in the character design area 189c. An image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data and displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  The notification effect image area 189d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the error message image area 189e is used when an error occurs in the slot machine 10. In this area, image data corresponding to an error message displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is stored.

  For example, if the game is played with one or two bets, and the result of the lottery is that one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, or the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, the display control device 81 In accordance with the winning combination, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to perform control so that a BB prize announcement effect, a watermelon prize announcement effect, and a bell prize announcement effect are performed (see S903 to S908 in FIG. 20). In this case, in the display control device 81, the winning combination is grasped by the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, and various announcement effects are performed according to the grasped winning combination. It needs to be performed before the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated by the player. In addition, since the main control device 101 operates the start lever 41 by the player after the start lever 41 is operated, the stop buttons 42 to 44 can be operated by the player after the start lever 41 is operated. In a very short time until the main control device 101, the main control device 101 draws a winning combination, and the lottery result is notified from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a lottery result command. The corresponding notice effect must be performed by the means 81. In this slot machine 10, the image data corresponding to each of the BB prize notice effect, the watermelon prize notice effect, and the bell prize notice effect is provided in the notice effect image area 189d. Is resident in advance, the display control device 81 is based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. When performing the BB winning announcement effect, the watermelon winning announcement effect, or the bell winning announcement effect, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 187, but is previously resident in the notice effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189. Each notification effect image can be drawn by the image controller 188 by reading out the image data. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187. Even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, the stop button is received after receiving the lottery result command for each notification effect image. 42 to 44 can be displayed before they can be operated by the player.

  Further, in the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 causes the inserted medal to be inserted based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device (the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b). When it is determined that the medals are jammed or the medal is pulled out illegally, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of a sensor error by an error command as described above. Also, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the main control device 101, the main control device 101 notifies the display control device 81 of the occurrence of the error together with the content of the error by an error command. The display control device 81 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the auxiliary display unit 65 when an error command is received.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the slot machine 10, the error message is displayed in the error message image area 189e. Since the image data corresponding to the various error messages is resident in advance, the display control device 81 newly updates the image data corresponding to the predetermined error message from the character ROM 187 based on the error command received from the main control device 101. The image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image by reading the image data previously resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189 instead of reading the image data. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error messages from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed.

  The image controller 188 is provided with a buffer RAM 188a. The buffer RAM 188a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132) of the NAND flash memory 187a provided in the character ROM 187. It is configured by SRAM (Static RAM) having kilobytes, and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 181.

  When transferring image data from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 reads data for one block from the character ROM 187, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 188a, and stores it in the resident video RAM 189 or normal video. When the RAM 190 is not used, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190.

  If the buffer RAM 188 is not provided and image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the character ROM 187 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 187a, so that the reading speed is low. Therefore, during the transfer of the image data of the desired size, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 constituted by the 1-port DRAM is occupied by the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 187 for a long time. Time and other data access cannot be performed. Accordingly, during that time, the image controller 188 cannot read the image data from the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 to draw an image or transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. There is a possibility that the image display of the auxiliary display unit 65 is delayed. Further, even when a multi-port type DRAM (a type in which a plurality of input / output ports are provided) is used for the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190, one port is occupied by image data transfer from the character ROM 187. Therefore, control using the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 in the image controller 188 is limited, and the control may be complicated.

  On the other hand, since the slot machine 10 is provided with the buffer RAM 188a composed of SRAM capable of high speed operation in the image controller 188, the image data read from the character ROM 187 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a. Then, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to.

  The display of the image on the auxiliary display unit 65 is periodically performed at regular time intervals (for example, about every 30 milliseconds), and the image controller 188 displays the image display timing on the auxiliary display unit 65. In accordance with this, drawing of the image and drawing image data must be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the access to the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 needs to give priority to reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading of drawing image data.

  In the slot machine 10, a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 188 is accessing (that is, in use) the resident video RAM 189, and the image controller 188 is for normal use. A normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the video RAM 190 is being accessed (that is, in use) is provided in the image controller 188. These access flags are both set to ON when the image controller 188 is accessing the corresponding video RAM, and set to OFF when not accessing. When the MPU 181 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 checks the contents of the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190, and reads out the image data necessary for drawing. In addition, it is confirmed whether or not the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are in use by the image controller 188 for writing or reading the drawing image data. Then, when the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190 are not used, control is performed to transfer the image data. Thus, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without interrupting the reading of the image data necessary for drawing and the writing or reading of the drawing image data.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the display timing of the image in the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of the screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 and a display area where an image is actually displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 11, an area larger than a display area where an image is actually displayed is set as a scanning area, and when an image is displayed on the screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, Scanning from the left to the right and from the top to the bottom of the screen is performed while driving each pixel constituting the screen (a so-called raster scan). At this time, since the drawing image data is actually set only in the display area where the image is displayed, the period during which the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area is scanned (so-called blank period) The image controller 188 does not transfer drawing image data to the auxiliary display unit 65. That is, during the blank period, even when the auxiliary display unit 65 is scanned to display an image, it is not possible to draw an image using image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. In addition, the drawing image data stored in the normal video RAM 190 is not read out and transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, since there is always a period in which the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are not used during this blank period, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is as follows. By using the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 generated during the blank period, it can be performed reliably.

  In the MPU 181, as a method for confirming whether the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use, signals transmitted / received between the image controller 188 and the resident video RAM 189, or an image controller The MPU 181 may monitor a signal transmitted / received between the 188 and the normal video RAM 190 and check whether the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use from the state of the signal. Further, when the image controller 188 starts access to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 or ends access, the MPU 181 notifies the MPU 181 of the information from time to time so that the MPU 181 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use.

  Further, when the image controller 188 scans the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 confirms the driving state of the image controller 188 or a notification from the image controller 188 to determine whether the blank period is in progress. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 189 and 190 are not used. Thereby, only the scanning state of the auxiliary display unit 65 of the image controller 188 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the auxiliary display unit 65 is not used. Therefore, the determination can be easily performed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 will be described. The processing of the MPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1.49 msec), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process activated in response to an input. In the following, a process related to the progress of the game, that is, a timer interrupt process and a normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 12, a timer interrupt process periodically executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. In the MPU 102 of the main control device 101, a timer interrupt is generated every 1.49 msec, for example, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is executed by the MPU 102 in response to the timer interrupt.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, a register save process is performed (S101). In this register saving process, the values of all registers in the MPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set (S102). If the power failure flag is set (S102: Yes), a power failure process is executed (S103).

  Here, an outline of the power failure process executed in S103 will be described.

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 102 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. This prevents the reel unit 31 from running out of control until the power supply is completely cut off, and abnormal output from an output device such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

  Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal when the power failure is eliminated is stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of, for example, the case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the process proceeds to S104. If the power failure signal is continuously output, the infinite loop is entered. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output even under an infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the main processing is performed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in the process of S102 (S102: No), various processes after S104 are performed. That is, in the process of S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. Next, the MPU 102 itself performs an interrupt end declaration process that allows the next timer interrupt to be set (S105), and the stepping motors of the respective rotary drive motors to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A stepping motor control process for driving the motor is performed (S106). Next, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 8) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read. At the same time, a sensor monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the reading result is normal (S107).

  In this sensor monitoring process, when there is an abnormality in the reading result of each sensor, for example, the inserted medal is clogged or pulled out from the detection result of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b. Is detected, it is determined that a sensor error has occurred, and the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) is notified of the occurrence of the sensor error. An error command including information is transmitted to the display control device 81.

  In the subsequent process of S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed (S108). Further, the bet number of medals and the result of counting the number of payouts are output to the external concentration terminal board 121. In / out counter processing is performed (S109).

  Next, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a start command and a lottery result command to be described later to the display control device 81 is performed (S110). After that, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed in the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed (S111), and then the segment set in the segment data setting process A segment data display process for supplying the data to the display units 60 to 62 and displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. is performed (S112).

  Then, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed (S113), and the values of the registers saved in the backup area in the processing of S101 are stored in the MPU 102, respectively. (S114). Thereafter, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S115), and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

  Next, normal processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing.

  The normal process is a process for performing main control related to the game. When the normal process is executed by the MPU 102, first, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S201), and then the game can be performed. A pre-start process is performed for this (S202). In this pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like finish initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in the subsequent S203 to S213 is performed.

  As the game management process, first, in the process of S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, each winning flag indicating winning of each winning except for the BB winning), and the like. Clear and start wait processing is performed in the subsequent processing of S204.

  In the start waiting process of S204, it is determined whether or not a replay winning has been established in the previous game, and if a replay winning has been established, an automatic inserting process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet. To complete the start wait process. In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, when a replay winning is established in the previous game, the player can play this game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

  On the other hand, if none of the replay winnings has been established, a sensor for confirming whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result obtained in the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (see S107 in FIG. 12) An abnormality confirmation process is performed. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is set to an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process for paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal I do. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process If either one is performed, a medal insertion process is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended as it is.

  After completion of the start waiting process in S204, it is then determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the specified number (S205). If the bet number has not reached the specified number (S205: No), S204 Returning to the start waiting process, the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed. In the present embodiment, the specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state of the slot machine 10.

  That is, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state, the prescribed number is set to 1 to 3, and when it is in the bonus state, the prescribed number is set to 3. Thereby, in the general gaming state, the game can be started not only with three bets but also with one or two. When the game is started with one or two bets (one or two), the above-described one-lot drawing table or two in the lottery process (see S210) described later. The winning lottery table is set and the winning mode (role) lottery is performed. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, there is a high probability that the number of medals to be paid out is three. It is possible to establish a winning or 7-bell winning with two medal payouts. If three medals are paid out due to the Cherry Bell winning, the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB winning. The player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. Also, if two medals are paid out due to the completion of the 7-bell prize, the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell prize to be completed, where another 3 medals are paid out. You can enjoy another game. If the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can play the game by inserting three medals that are paid out while expecting the BB prize to be established. Can enjoy. Further, even if the result of the game executed by inserting one or two medals is not good, the game can be ended without leaving extra medals for the player. As described above, even if the number of bets is one or two in the general gaming state, the player can update the player by using the one-sheet lottery table and the two-sheet lottery table set in this embodiment. The game can be enjoyed and the game can be enjoyed to the end without extra medals.

  On the other hand, by setting the specified number of bets when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, in the bonus state, the watermelon having a large medal payout number is set while allowing the player to insert three medals. By increasing the winning probability of winning a prize or winning a bell and setting the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in one game high, the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state can be achieved to 250 with a small number of games. Therefore, the player can receive a lot of medals in a short time, while the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased on the hall side.

  If the number of bets has reached the specified number as a result of the processing of S205 (S205: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (S206). If the start lever 41 is not operated (S206: No), the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated (S206: Yes), the slot machine 10 is configured such that a game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are bet. Therefore, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game. Therefore, in such a case, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance (S207). In the subsequent process 208, an effective line setting process for setting an effective line is performed (S208). In this effective line setting process, all combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 are set as effective lines.

  Then, a start command is set (S209). Here, the start command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp that a start command has been generated. In this normal process, information regarding the bet number (the number of medals inserted) accepted in the process of S205 is included in this start command and set. The start command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for storing various commands generated in the normal process, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) executed every 1.49 ms. This is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the processing of S110 of (see). Thereby, the display control device 81 grasps that the start command of the game is generated by receiving the start command and grasps the number of medals (the number of bets) inserted by the player for the game. It is possible to cause each auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) to execute various effects according to the number of bets.

  Thereafter, the lottery process of S210, the reel control process of S211, the medal payout process of S212, and the bonus state process of S213 are executed in order, and the process returns to S203. Then, in the interruption process (S103) of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 12), the processes from S203 to S213 are repeatedly executed until the power switch 71 is turned off or an infinite loop due to a power failure is entered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the lottery process (S210) executed in the normal process (see FIG. 13) in the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the lottery process.

  In the lottery process, first, a random number used when the winning mode (role) is selected is acquired (S301). In the slot machine 10, as described above, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter 107 at that time. By reading the value of the counter 107 and storing the value in a predetermined area of the RAM 106, a random number value used for the lottery is obtained.

  After the random number is acquired by the process of S301, a lottery table setting process for setting a lottery table for performing a lottery in a winning mode is performed (S302). Here, the details of the lottery table setting process in S302 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a lottery table setting process executed in the MPU 102 of the main controller 101. In this lottery table setting process, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined, and further, according to the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) and the setting state set in the slot machine 10, the lottery table storage area 105a. A corresponding lottery table is set from among a plurality of lottery tables stored in.

  In this process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a bonus state (S401). As a result, if it is not a bonus state (S401: No), the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a general game. Since it is in a state, it is then determined whether or not the number of inserted medals (number of bets) is 3 (3) (S402). If the number of bets is three (S402: Yes), six three-sheet lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Among them, a three-sheet lottery table corresponding to the currently set state is set (S403), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, when the game is started with three bets, a three-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  If it is determined that the number of bets is not three as a result of the process of S402 (S402: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of bets is two (two). If the number of bets is two (S404: Yes), the six two-sheet lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Among them, a two-sheet lottery table corresponding to the currently set state is set (S405), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. Thus, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, when the game is started with two bets, a two-sheet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  If it is determined that the number of bets is not two as a result of the process of S404 (S404: No), it can be determined that the number of bets is one (multiply by one). Of the six one-sheet drawing lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the one-sheet drawing lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set. (S406), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the general gaming state, when the game is started with one bet, a one-hatch lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

  On the other hand, if the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the setting is provided corresponding to the setting states of “setting 1” to “setting 6” that the slot machine 10 can take. Of the six bonus state lottery tables, the bonus state lottery table corresponding to the currently set state is set (S407), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the lottery process is returned to. Thereby, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state, a bonus lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set.

  As described above, in the lottery table setting process, the lottery table storage area 105a stores the current gaming state of the slot machine 10, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets), and the setting state set in the slot machine 10. A corresponding lottery table is set from the plurality of lottery tables.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description of the lottery process will be continued. When the lottery table setting process in S302 ends, the index value IV is then set to 1 (S303), and a determination value DV used when performing a lottery (win / no-go determination) in the winning mode is set (S304). In this decision value setting process, a new decision value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current decision value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a new point value PV corresponding to 1 that is the current index value IV is added to the random value. The determination value is DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, a lottery of a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is performed. In this lottery, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535 (S305: Yes), the winning flag of the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 (S306). That is, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 1, in the process of S306, the BB winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and when IV = 2, the determination value DV exceeds 65535. In the process of S306, the watermelon winning / winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When IV = 3, the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it is set in the storage area 106a and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 4, in the process of S306, the cherry bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, and determination is made when IV = 5. When the value DV exceeds 65535, in the process of S306, the 7-bell winning winning flag is set to the winning flag storage area 106a. Set, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 at IV = 6, in the processing of S306 sets the replay winning winning flag to the winning flag storage area 106a.

  By the way, if the set winning flag is one of the watermelon winning flag, the bell winning flag, the cherry bell winning flag, the 7 bell winning flag, or the replay winning flag, the corresponding flag is set. It is reset after the played game is over (see S203 of the normal process shown in FIG. 13). On the other hand, when the set winning flag is the BB winning winning flag, the BB winning winning flag is reset as one of the conditions that the BB winning is established. In other words, the BB prize winning flag may be valid for a plurality of games. For example, after the BB winning winning flag is set, if the symbols are not aligned in the BB winning mode stop pattern, that is, if the BB winning is not established, the BB winning winning flag is not reset and is carried over to the next game. It is.

  In the process of S306 in a state where the BB winning winning flag is carried over, if the current index value IV is 1, the BB winning winning flag is not set, and if the current index value IV is 2 to 6, the index value is set. Set the winning flag corresponding to IV. In other words, in a game in which the BB prize winning flag is carried over, if a winning mode other than the BB winning is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, whereas if the BB winning is won, the corresponding BB winning flag is set. Do not set.

  If it is determined in the process of S305 that the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (S305: No), it means that the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (S307), and then it is determined whether or not there is a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determinant to be drawn by lottery (whether or not is determined) ( S308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determinant to determine whether or not to win (S308: Yes), the process returns to S304, and the determination of whether or not the winning mode is successful is continued. At this time, in the process of S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for the determination of whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In the process of S305, whether or not the winning mode is successful is determined based on the determination value DV.

  Here, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the general gaming state by the lottery table setting process of S302, the three-hatch lottery table for the general gaming state, the two-hatch lottery table, the one-hatch lottery table Since the lottery table to be used is set from the table according to the number of bets, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 9, the winning probability of the BB winning when the game is played by inserting three medals is 1 A lottery in a winning mode is performed after the game is set to be sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to have one player play a game by inserting three medals while expecting the player to obtain a lot of medals when the BB winning is established. Therefore, medals are consumed quickly, and it becomes possible to increase the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall.

  In addition, when a game is played by inserting one or two medals, a Cherry Bell winning prize with three medal payouts is set as a winning combination candidate and the winning probability is set high, and the winning mode is Since a lottery will be held, if one or two medals remain at the player's hand, if a Cherry Bell prize is established, it will be possible to obtain three medal payouts that can aim at the establishment of the BB prize with a high probability While expecting the player, one or two medals remaining at hand can be inserted to allow one game to be played. In addition, when a game is played by inserting one medal, a 7-bell prize with two medal payouts is also set as a winning combination candidate and the winning probability is set high, and the lottery of the winning mode is selected. So, if one medal remains in the player's hand, the player expects that two medal payouts aiming for the Cherry Bell prize will be obtained again if the 7-bell prize is established, One game can be played by inserting one remaining medal. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player to the end without leaving extra medals.

  Further, when a lottery table for one-sheet drawing or a lottery table for two-sheet drawing is set and a lottery in a winning mode is performed, as described above with reference to FIG. Even in this case, the ratio of the number of medals paid out with respect to the number of bets can be set to a value less than 100% and as close to 100% as possible, and the lottery of the winning mode can be performed. Therefore, even if you play a single or double game, the medals will hardly decrease, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, use that one or two medals. And you can be sure that you want to play games. On the other hand, if the game is repeated with one or two cards, the number of medals will decrease, so that the player can not aim for an increase in medals by repeating the game with one or two cards. If there are three or more medals, the player can be directed to play the game with a high probability of winning a BB prize.

  In addition, by switching each lottery table according to the number of bets and performing a lottery in a winning manner, as described above with reference to FIGS. The winning mode is established only when the game is played, and when the game is played with 3 cards, it can be handled as a miss without establishing the Cherry Bell winning, so there is one Cherry Bell winning It is possible to draw attention to the player as a special small role prize dedicated for hanging and two-seat. Similarly, a winning mode that is established only when a 7-bell prize is played with a single game is used, and a 7-bell prize is not established when a game is played with two or three cards. Since it is handled as a detachment, it is possible to draw attention to the player, assuming that the 7-bell prize is a special small role prize dedicated to one piece. Therefore, when the game is played with one or two cards, if the symbol stops with the cherry bell winning symbol or the seven bell winning symbol, a great joy can be given to the player.

  In addition, even when the game is played with one or two cards, although it is an extremely low winning probability, it is possible to perform a lottery of the winning mode by setting so that the BB winning is established. When a game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a BB prize will be established.

  In addition, when the game is played with one or two cards, the chances of winning a watermelon or a bell are reduced, while the probability of winning a cherry bell or a 7-bell is set high, and lottery So that the player can be further impressed that the Cherry Bell prize or 7-bell prize is a special small part prize with one or two cards. When a game is played with two cards, the player can have a sense of expectation that a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize will be established.

  After the winning flag is set in the process of S306, or when it is determined that there is no determinant to be lottery in the process of S308 (S308: No), it means that the lottery of the winning mode has ended. In such a case, a lottery result command is set (S309). Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, and the winning mode corresponding to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is displayed. A lottery result command is generated so that information suggesting that the winning combination is included. Therefore, not only the winning flag set by the lottery of this game but also the BB winning mode is a winning combination when the BB winning winning flag is carried over from the past game and stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. This is suggested by the lottery result command. If the winning flag is not set in the winning flag storage area 106a, it is suggested by the lottery result command that there is no winning combination and the player is out.

  The lottery result command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for storing various commands generated in the normal process, and is executed every 1.49 ms, like the start command. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the process of S110 of the interrupt process (see FIG. 12). By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 executes drive control of the upper lamp 63 and the auxiliary display unit 65 to suggest a winning combination, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result command is set before the reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the winning mode lottery is performed. The lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81 within about 1.5 ms at the latest after the command is set (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt process). The display control device 81 is configured to execute a lottery result command process (see FIG. 20) described later without delay when a lottery result command is received. Therefore, after the start lever 41 is operated by the player. While the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is impossible, an effect or the like suggesting a winning combination can be executed by the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination suggested by the presentation before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, and the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the recognized winning combination. Can be adjusted.

  Next, a slip table setting process for setting a slip table (stop table) for reel stop control is performed (S310), and the lottery process is terminated. Here, the slip table is a table in which it is determined how much the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid (rotated) and stopped from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, the slip table is a reaching symbol (arrival symbol) that has reached the base point position (in the present embodiment, the lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R) when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed. No.) and a stop data group capable of deriving the relationship between the stop symbol (stop symbol number) actually stopped at the base point position.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reaching symbol reaching the base point position is stopped as it is. A stop mode, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a four symbol portion Five patterns of stop modes are prepared, including a stop mode for stopping after sliding. In the sliding table, for each symbol number of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode to be set when the symbol indicated by the symbol number becomes the reaching symbol is defined from among the five patterns. A number of sliding tables are prepared for each winning mode.

  By setting this sliding table, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stopping manner from when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated until a specified time (190 msec) elapses. It is possible to make the player feel as if the symbol arrangement (stop appearance) that stops within the visible range from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the player's operation.

  In the slip table setting process of S310, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is confirmed, and the smooth table uniquely corresponding to the set winning flag is stored in the smooth table storing area of the RAM 106. Set to 106b. This makes it possible to stop a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning mode (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, as much as possible within the specified time, on the active line (see FIG. 6), It is possible to avoid the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning mode not winning the lottery from stopping on the active line.

  Here, as described above, the BB winning winning flag is configured so that once the flag is set, it is carried over to the next game until the BB winning is established, so the lottery performed in one game The winning flag corresponding to any of the watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning, and replay winning and the carry-over BB winning winning flag which are carried over are simultaneously set in the winning flag storage 106a. There may be. In this case, instead of the BB winning, the processing is performed so that the sliding table corresponding to the watermelon winning, the bell winning, the cherry bell winning, the 7 bell winning or the replay winning in which the winning flag is set is set in the smooth table storage area 106b. Done. As a result, the winning flag is cleared for each game, and if the winning is not established, the status as a winning role will be lost. The watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning, The replay winning can be established more reliably. The BB winning winning flag corresponding to the BB winning that has not been won here is continuously maintained and carried over to the next game.

  When the cherry bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in the slip table setting process of S310, the cherry bell winning winning table is stored in the smooth table storing area 106b. Here, the “cherry” symbol which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the cherry bell winning is established is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind becomes seven symbols. As described above, the “cherry” symbol can be stopped at any one of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display window 26L regardless of the timing of operating the left stop switch 42. In addition, the “bell” symbol, which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the Cherry Bell winning is established, is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is five symbols or less. As described above, even when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any timing, the “bell” symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M.

  Therefore, in the cherry bell winning slide table, no matter what symbol has reached the base point position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, whatever symbol number is reached), the display window 26L A stop mode in which the “cherry” symbol can be stopped is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions, and any symbol arrives at the base point position when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed (that is, The stop mode is set so that the “bell” symbol can be stopped at the middle position in the display window 26M. Thus, when the Cherry Bell winning flag is set, the stop symbol corresponding to the Cherry Bell winning is displayed on the middle line L2 by the Cherry Bell winning sliding table regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. , A right-down line L4, or a right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the so-called Cherry Bell winning can be established without missing.

  Further, when the 7-bell winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the 7-bell winning sliding table is stored in the sliding table storing area 106b. Then, the “7” symbol, which is the stop symbol of the left reel 32L when the 7-bell winning is established, is arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 7 symbols, like the “Cherry” symbol. In addition, as described above, the “bell” symbol which is the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M when the 7-bell winning is established is arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between the symbols of the same kind is 5 symbols or less. Has been.

  Therefore, in the 7-bell winning table, as with the Cherry Bell winning table, no matter what symbol has arrived at the base point position when the left stop switch 42 is pressed (that is, any reaching symbol number). However, any stop position that can stop the “7” symbol is set at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions in the display window 26L, and the base point position is changed when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed. Even if the symbol has arrived (that is, with any symbol number), a stop mode in which the “bell” symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the 7-bell winning winning flag is set, the 7-bell winning sliding table displays the stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell winning in the middle line L2 regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the player. , A right-down line L4, or a right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a 7-bell prize without so-called failure.

  As described above, in the case of winning the lottery in the winning mode, when the Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out or the 7 bell prize where two medals are paid out is won, the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, the stop symbol corresponding to the cherry bell winning or the stop symbol corresponding to the seven bell winning can be displayed on any one of the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a cherry bell prize or a 7-bell prize without so-called missing. Therefore, when the player starts the game with one or two cards, it is possible to reliably establish the cherry bell prize or the seven bell prize without depending on an artificial operation. In addition, a game can be played in anticipation of the establishment of a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize while aiming at a stop pattern of other prizes (for example, a BB prize).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the reel control process which is the process of S211 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the reel control process executed by the MUP 102 of the main controller 101.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (S501). In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started to rotate in the previous game. Wait until When the wait time has elapsed, a wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in a motor control storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106 is performed. Do. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (see S106 in FIG. 12) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and the rotation start process ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the MPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting up a lamp (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. Is notified to a player or the like.

  After the rotation start process of S501, a pre-stop process is then performed by the processes of S502 to S505. In the pre-stop process, it is first determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502). If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated (S502: No), the process of S502 is repeatedly executed to stand by until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, a stop command. Whether or not has occurred is determined (S503). If no stop command has been issued (S503: No), the process returns to S502 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. Thereby, when the stop switch corresponding to the non-rotating reel is operated, it is ignored.

  On the other hand, if a stop command is generated (S503: Yes), then whether or not the current stop command is the third stop command, that is, whether or not the stop switch is operated when only one reel is rotating. Is determined (S504). If the current stop command is the third stop command (S504: Yes), the subsequent process of S505 is skipped, the pre-stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the case of the first stop command that is generated when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, or the second stop command that is generated when two reels are rotating (S504: Yes), The process proceeds to S505, the first change process of the slip table is performed, and the pre-stop process is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to S506.

  Here, the first change process of the slide table is a process of changing the slide table stored in the slide table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 before stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command. In the first change process of the slide table, for example, when the first stop command is generated by operating the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42, the slide table is changed.

  Now, when the pre-stop processing of S502 to S505 is completed, it means that the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is operated to advance the game, and a stop command is generated. In such a case, a stop control process shown in S506 to S512 is then performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

  First, in S506, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the lower stage at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol reaching the lower stage is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Subsequently, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the data of the symbol number corresponding to the reaching symbol among the slip tables set in the slip table storage area 106b (S507). Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the lower stage is determined (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol (S509). If they are not equal (S509: No), the process of S509 is repeatedly executed. If they are equal (S509: Yes), a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reels is performed (S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (S511). When all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped (S511: No), the second change process of the slip table is performed. This is performed (S512). And it returns to the process of S502 and performs the process before a stop again.

  Here, the second change process of the slide table is a process of changing the slide table stored in the slide table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second change process of the slide table, the slide table is changed based on the set winning flag and the stoppage of the stopped reel. For example, in a situation where only the bell winning winning flag is set, when the 12th “bell” symbol of the left reel 32L and the 12th of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the upper part of the left reel 32L No. 13 and No. 13 “7” symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped, so the sliding table is changed to avoid the establishment of the BB winning.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S511 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (S511: Yes), a payout determination process is performed (S513), and this process ends. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out as one of the conditions that a combination of winning symbols is arranged on an active line.

  In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on each active line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a winning is achieved on the effective line. Determine. If a winning combination has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination matches the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination combination matches the winning flag, the winning combination combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination combination are set in a payout information storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not match the winning flag, an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed while the slot machine 10 is in an error state. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination is completed for all the active lines, the payout determination process is ended.

  Next, the outline of the medal payout process in S212 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area (not shown) in the payout determination process in S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process (see S513 in FIG. 16) that a winning for paying out medals has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not a replay winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination processing. Then, if the replay winning is not established, the medal payout process is finished as it is. If the replay winning is established, the replay state setting process is performed to change the gaming state to the replay state, and the medal payout process is finished. To do. In the start waiting process (see S204 in FIG. 13) executed in the normal process described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

  On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals are paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, when the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the payout number is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven and the medal is discharged from the hopper device 51. It pays out to the medal tray 50 through the exit 49. In the medal payout process, a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout is also performed. If the current gaming state is a bonus state, the payout number is subtracted from the value of a remaining payout counter, which will be described later, and the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the bonus state process executed in S213 of the normal process (see FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101.

  First, an outline of this bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state process, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a game that continuously shifts to the RB state is performed until a predetermined number of medals are paid out (250 in the present embodiment). is there. Then, 12 JAC games are played in one RB state, and if a winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Further, the bonus state is ended when the medal payout number reaches the predetermined number, and when the medal payout number reaches the predetermined number in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state is ended.

  Next, details of the bonus state process will be described. In the bonus state process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is a bonus state (S601).

  In this BB determination process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a (S602). When the BB winning winning flag is set (S602: Yes), the reel control is performed. Based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process executed in S513 of the process (see FIG. 16), it is confirmed whether or not a BB winning has been established (S603).

  When the BB winning is established in the process of S603 (S603: Yes), the BB start process is executed (S604). In the BB start process, the BB winning winning flag stored in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset and the setting flag stored in the state information storage area 106c is cleared, and then the BB setting flag is changed to the state information storage area 106c. To BB game, which is a kind of bonus game. Also, a process of setting 250 to the remaining payout number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the BB game and displaying 250 on the remaining payout number display unit 61. I do. Incidentally, whether or not the current gaming state is the bonus state (see S601) is determined based on whether or not the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c.

  Subsequently, in the process of S605, an RB start process is executed (S605). In the RB start process, 8 is set in the remaining JAC winning counter for counting the number of possible JAC winnings, and 12 is set in the remaining JAC game counter for counting the remaining number of JAC games. Each counter such as the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is provided in the state information storage area 106c. In the RB start process, an RB command transmitted to the display control device 81 is also set in order to grasp that the RB game is started.

  Next, in the process of S606, a status command is set (S607). Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the current gaming state. That is, if it is determined in the processing of S602 that the BB winning winning flag is not set (S602: No), a status command indicating that the game is a normal game is set, and a BB winning is established in the processing of S603. If it is determined that the game has not been performed (S603: No), a state command indicating that the game is a BB carryover game is set, and if the RB command is set in the process of S605, it indicates that the game is a BB game. Set the status command.

  Then, after the process of S607, a game number display process is performed (S607), and this process ends. In the game number display process, when the current game state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the like is performed.

  Also, in the process of S601, when the gaming state is the bonus state (S601: Yes), based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process executed in the process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16). It is confirmed whether or not a watermelon winning or a bell winning that is a role winning is established (S608). When a watermelon winning or a bell winning is established in the processing of S608 (S608: Yes), the value of the remaining JAC winning counter is decremented by 1 (S609), and further, the value of the remaining JAC game counter is decremented by 1 (S610). Further, when the watermelon winning and the bell winning are not established (S608: No), one JAC game is consumed, so the value of the remaining JAC game counter is subtracted by 1 without performing the processing of S609 ( S610).

  Subsequently, in the processing of S611, it is confirmed whether either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become 0 (S611). In the process of S611, when any of them is 0, that is, when the JAC winning is established 8 times or the JAC game is digested 12 times (S611: Yes), it means that the RB game end condition is established. Therefore, an RB end process for resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S612). Accordingly, the JAC game is performed 12 times in one RB state, and if the winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state can be ended even before the JAC game is performed 12 times.

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout number counter is 0 (S613). If it is not 0 (S613: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. Since this means that the BB game end condition is not satisfied, the above-described RB start process is executed (S614). Thereafter, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (607), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when neither the remaining JAC winning counter nor the remaining JAC game counter is 0 in the processing of S611, that is, when the JAC winning is not yet established 8 times and the JAC game is not consumed 12 times. (S611: No), it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout number counter is 0 (S615). If the counter value is not 0 in the process of S615 (S615: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number and the BB game end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, a state command indicating that the game is a BB game is set (S606), a game number display process is executed (S607), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 in the process of S615 (S615: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the bonus state end process shown in S616 to S617 is performed. Execute. In the bonus state end process, first, the above-described RB end process is executed (S616), and then the BB end process for clearing the data in the state information storage area 153b is executed (S617). Further, in the above-described processing of S613, even when the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S613: Yes), it means that the BB game end condition is satisfied, so the BB end processing of S617 is executed. To do. After the BB end process is performed, a state command indicating that the game is a normal game (that is, a general game state) is set (S606), a game number display process is performed (S607), and this process ends. Thereby, the bonus state can be terminated when the number of medals paid out reaches 250. If the medal payout amount reaches 250 in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state can be ended by the processing of S616.

  Next, each control process executed by the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 181 is roughly classified into a display main process that is activated when the power is turned on, a display timer interrupt process that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 1 msec), and a command input from the main controller 101. And command interruption processing for storing received commands in the received command storage area 185a. The command stored in the received command storage area 185a is checked during the display main process, and various processes are performed according to the contents of the command. Hereinafter, among the display main process, the command stored in the received command storage area 185a, the start command process for performing the process for the start command, the lottery result command process for performing the process for the lottery result command, and the process for the error command are performed. The error command processing will be described.

  First, the display main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the display main process. This display main process is executed when the power is turned on by recovery from a power failure or by turning on the power switch 71, and the display control device 81 and the initial stage of various devices such as an auxiliary effect unit controlled by the display control device 81. Processing, command check processing received from the main control device 101, power failure processing when a power failure occurs, and the like are performed. Also, the transfer processing of the resident image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is executed by display surface processing as one processing of the initialization processing.

  When the display main process is executed, first, as one process of the initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 181 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 181 and the I / O device are performed. (S701). Next, the process proceeds to S702, and as an initialization process, an image that is resident in the resident video RAM 189 in S702 to S710, that is, a power-on main image, a back image, a character design, and an announcement Image data corresponding to each image such as an effect image and an error message image is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189.

  Specifically, in the process of S702, first, the main image data at power-on is first read from the character ROM 187, and the data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S702). When the power-on main image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the power-on main image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is then transferred to the resident video RAM 189 and stored in the power-on main image area 189a. (S703). If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is less than or equal to the capacity of one block (eg, 132 kilobytes) of the NAND flash memory 187a, which is also the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 188a, the process of S702 and S703 is performed once. Since all the main image data is transferred to the resident video RAM when the power is turned on, the process directly proceeds to S704. If the data capacity of the main image data at power-on is larger than the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, all the main image data at power-on will be the main image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 189. The process of S702 and S703 is repeatedly executed until it is stored in 189a, and then the process proceeds to S704.

  In step S704, the image controller 188 is instructed to draw a main image when the power is turned on (S704). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the power-on main image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, draws the power-on main image, and draws the drawn power-on main image. The corresponding drawing image data is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 190 and then transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65 in accordance with the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65. Therefore, the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this display, other resident image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and a normal image is drawn by the processing of S711 described later. Until it is instructed to continue.

  In this slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is resident from the character ROM 187 due to the slow reading speed. It takes a long time to be transferred to the video RAM 189. Therefore, as in the main display process, after the power is turned on, first, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the hall related person can check the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. . Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in an operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that the slot machine 10 can be immediately started operating without a problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 187a with a slow reading speed for the character ROM 187 can suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  After the processing of S704, it is then confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in this embodiment) (S705). When it is in a lowered state (S705: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is cut off, and a power failure process is executed (S706).

  On the other hand, if the system state is not a voltage drop state in the processing of S705 (S705: No), then the image data to be resident except the main image data at power-on is sequentially stored from the character ROM 187 in the NAND flash memory 187a. One block is read out and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S707). When one block of image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the resident video RAM 189 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 189 is in use by reading accompanying drawing of the main image when the power is turned on (S708). While the video RAM 189 is in use (S708: Yes), the process of S708 is repeatedly executed to wait for the process. If it is determined that the resident video RAM 189 is not used (S708: No), the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the area corresponding to the image data, that is, the rear image. It is stored in any of the area 189b, the character design area 189c, the notification effect image area 189d and the error message image area 189e (S709).

  As described above, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the time is passed from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed through the buffer RAM 188a configured by SRAM. Is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a, and when the resident video RAM 189 is not used, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 in a short time. Can do. Thus, while image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the resident video RAM 189 can be prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. The data stored in the resident video RAM 189 at the time of image drawing can be read without delay, the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be drawn without delay, and the drawn image data can be transferred to the auxiliary display unit 65. Can do.

  After the processing of S709, it is determined whether or not all the image data to be resident has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710). If untransferred resident target image data remains (S710: No) Returning to the process of S705, the processes of S705 to S710 are executed again, and the process of transferring the image data for one block from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is performed. Here, by the process of S705, it is determined whether the system state is a voltage drop state every time image data for one block is transferred. As a result, even if the system state becomes a voltage drop state while transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time, the state can be reliably grasped. it can.

  If it is determined by the processing of S710 that all the image data to be resident has been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710: Yes), then it is displayed in normal time (when a special effect is not displayed). The image controller 188 is instructed to draw a normal image (S710). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the back image and the character design stored in the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189, draws a normal image, and temporarily renders the drawn image data to the normal video. After being stored in the RAM 190, a process of transferring to the auxiliary display unit 65 in accordance with the display timing of the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed. Therefore, a normal image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a player or a hall-related person can recognize that the initialization of the display control process has ended.

  Further, the image data to be resident is all transferred to the resident video RAM 189 during the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on by the processes of S702 to S710. The image controller 188 can perform image drawing processing while using the resident image data. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 by drawing the image.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 189 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, the responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to displaying some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be kept high. it can.

  Subsequently, an interrupt mode permitting the command interrupt process and the display timer interrupt process is set (S712), the initialization process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S713. In the process of S713, it is confirmed whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in the present embodiment) as in the process of S705 (S713). If the system state is a voltage drop state (S713: Yes), it is determined that the power supply is cut off, and a power failure process is executed (S714).

  On the other hand, when the system state is not a voltage drop state in the processing of S713 (S713: No), it is then determined whether display timer interrupt processing has been performed (S715), and display timer interrupt processing has been performed. If so (S715: Yes), a drive data output process for outputting drive data to the auxiliary effect section is executed (S716). Thereby, the output of the drive data to the auxiliary effect section is controlled so as to be executed at a cycle of 1 msec in which the display timer interruption process is performed. The determination as to whether or not the display timer interrupt process has been performed is turned on every time the display timer interrupt process is executed, and is turned off every time the drive data output process is executed. (Not shown) is provided in the work RAM 185, and is performed by detecting the value of this interrupt processing execution flag. That is, if the interrupt process execution flag is on, it is determined that the display timer interrupt process has been performed (S715: Yes), and the drive data output process is executed (S716).

  If it is determined in S715 that the display timer interrupt process is not executed (S715: No), or if the process in S716 is completed, an unprocessed received command is stored in the received command storage area 185a. It is determined whether or not (S717). If there is an unprocessed received command (S717: Yes), the received command check process is executed (S718), the received command stored in the received command storage area 185a is analyzed, and the received command is determined. Processing is executed (S719). For example, if the received command is a start command, start command processing (see FIG. 19) is executed, if it is a lottery result command, lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) is executed, and if it is an error command, error command processing (see FIG. 19). (See FIG. 21). Details of each command processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Whether it is determined in the processing of S717 that there is no unprocessed received command in the received command storage area 185a (S717: No), or if the processing of S718 is completed, then the random number value used when selecting an auxiliary effect, etc. The update process is executed (S719), the process returns to S713, and thereafter the processes of S713 to S719 are repeatedly executed.

  Next, the start command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing start command processing. This start command process is a process executed when the start lever 41 is operated and a start command indicating that a game start command has been received is received from the main controller 101. The MPU 181 stores a command received from the main control device 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, and the command is a start command. If it is determined, the start command processing is executed.

  In this start command process, first, information related to the bet number included in the start command is extracted, and the extracted information related to the bet number is stored in the bet number storage area 185b of the work RAM 185 (S801). As described above in the description of S209 in FIG. 13, the bet number suggested by the information included in the start command is the medal inserted by the player for the game indicated by the start command to be started. The display control device 81 stores the information related to the bet number in the bet number storage area 185b, thereby assisting the production of the game to be started in accordance with the number of bets placed on the game. Control can be performed by an effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65).

  In the start command process, other processes corresponding to the start command are executed in response to the start command of the game ascertained by receiving the start command, such as control for causing the auxiliary effect section to execute various effects (S802). ), This process is terminated. Thereby, various effects can be made to be performed by the auxiliary effect section as the game starts.

  Next, a lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing. This lottery result command processing receives from the main control device 101 a lottery result command indicating the result of a lottery (whether or not a winning combination determination) is performed in the main control device 101 in response to a game start command by operating the start lever 41. This process is executed when The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main control device 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check process (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, and the command is a lottery result command. If it is determined that there is, the lottery result command process is executed.

  In the lottery result command processing, first, information on the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether the number of bets placed on the game whose start command is indicated by the start command is three. It is determined whether or not (S901). If the number of bets is three (S901: Yes), an effect corresponding to the number of three bets is started in the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65). Set (S902), and the lottery result command processing ends. Thus, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the set effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  At this time, when changing the back image or character design to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on another command received from the main control device 101, it corresponds to the back image area 189b or the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189. If image data of the back image or character design to be resident is resident, the image controller 188 reads the image data corresponding to the back image or character design from the resident video RAM 189 and draws the image. As a result, the time for newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 constituted by the NAND flash memory 187a having a long read time can be omitted, so that the image controller 188 can immediately draw and generate a predetermined image. . Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, the back image and the character design can be changed immediately.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of bets is not three as a result of the process of S901 (S901: No), the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is one or two. It can be understood that it is a sheet. Therefore, it is next determined whether or not the winning combination grasped by the lottery result command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is in the BB winning mode (S903). If the BB winning mode is a winning combination (S903: Yes), a message “BB winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is a BB winning mode. “BB winning announcement effect” is set (S904), and the lottery result command is terminated. Accordingly, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the BB winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  If the winning combination is not in the BB winning mode as a result of the processing of S903 (S903: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the watermelon winning It is determined whether or not it is an aspect (S905). If the watermelon winning mode is a winning combination (S905: Yes), the message “Watermelon winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is a watermelon winning mode. “Watermelon winning announcement effect” is set (S906), and the lottery result command is terminated. Accordingly, each auxiliary effect unit is driven so that the watermelon winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  If the winning combination is not in the watermelon winning mode as a result of the processing of S905 (S905: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the Bell winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is an aspect (S907). If the bell winning mode is a winning combination (S907: Yes), a message “Bell winning winning!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the player that the winning combination is a bell winning mode. “Bell winning announcement effect” is set (S908), and the lottery result command is terminated. Thus, each auxiliary effect section is driven so that the bell winning notification effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  As described above, the winning combination in the game in which the number of bets is set to 1 or 2 by the process of S903 to S908 is determined by any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode. If it is, it is possible to cause the auxiliary effect section to execute a BB prize announcement effect, a watermelon prize announcement effect, and a bell prize announcement effect for notifying the player that the role has been won.

  Here, as described above, when the number of bets is one or two, the winning probability of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is suppressed to be extremely low. There is a high possibility of playing a game in anticipation of the establishment of the Cherry Bell winning mode or the 7 Bell winning mode. In addition, when the Cherry Bell winning mode or the 7 Bell winning mode is a winning combination, the winning combination can be established without losing any of the stop switches 42 to 44, so that one winning or the A player who has started a game with two cards is likely to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, or the bell winning mode is won as a winning role, and the player does not notice it, the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all overlooked. Since there is a possibility of winning, there is a risk of missing the winning combination. In addition, since the winning of the BB winning mode is valid across the game until the BB winning mode is established, if the player finishes the game without noticing the winning of the BB winning mode, another player However, the BB winning mode is established based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has won the winning of the BB winning mode may lose as a result.

  On the other hand, if any of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode is won in the game in which the number of bets is set to one or two by the processing of S903 to S908, the winning Are announced through a BB prize announcement effect, a watermelon prize announcement effect, and a bell prize announcement effect. Since the notification is made without delay in accordance with the reception of the lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101, as described above, the notification is performed while the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated by the player. Is called. Therefore, before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, the player can know the winning of any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode. Accordingly, when the player plays a game with one or two cards, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning) ascertained by the notification is obtained. Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop symbol in order to stop the stop symbol corresponding to the mode) on the active line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, when the winning of the BB winning mode is announced, even if the player misses the game, the player can receive a new medal and continue the game until the BB winning mode is established. it can.

  In addition, when the BB winning mode is carried over from the past game and a plurality of winning combinations are set together with the winning combination in the current game lottery, the slip table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 In S310 of FIG. 14, a sliding table corresponding to a winning combination other than the BB winning mode is set. In this lottery result command processing, a lottery is performed when the number of bets is set to one or two. The winning combination determined by the result command is determined from the BB winning mode (see S903). As a result, if the winning combination in which the slip table is set is a watermelon winning aspect or a bell winning aspect, the winning combination may be missed, but if the BB winning aspect is set as a winning combination, Since the BB winning announcement effect is preferentially performed, the player can be surely grasped that the BB winning mode more advantageous to the player is the winning combination.

  In addition, as described above, in the lottery result command process, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 by the main process executed by the MPU 181. It is executed when it is determined to be a command. The lottery result command is a reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the lottery (whether the winning combination is determined) accompanying the game start command. (See S309 in FIG. 14), and within about 1.5 ms later (that is, after a time lag until the command is transmitted by the timer interrupt process), the lottery result command is displayed. Is transmitted to the device 81.

  Further, in the display control device 81, image data corresponding to images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in various notification effects such as a BB winning notification effect, a watermelon winning notification effect, and a bell winning notification effect are notified in the resident video RAM 189. Since the display control device 81 is resident in advance in the effect image area 189d, the display control device 81 performs the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. When the image controller 188 determines that the image controller 188 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 but reads the image data previously resident in the notification effect image area 189 d of the resident video RAM 189, the image controller 188. Each notice effect image can be drawn. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, each notification effect image is immediately received after receiving the lottery result command. These notification effect images can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

  Therefore, after the player operates the start lever 41, it assists the notification effect etc. of the winning combination from when the player operates any of the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It can be executed by the production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, since the player can grasp the winning combination before operating any of the stop switches 42 to 44, the recognized winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) is established. Can be surely aimed at the player.

  As a result of the processing of S907, if the winning combination is not in the Bell winning mode (S907: No), if the number of bets is 2, whether the Cherry Bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination, If the number of bets is one, it can be determined that the Cherry Bell winning mode, the 7 Bell winning mode, or the Replay winning mode is set as a winning combination, It can be understood that the combination is not set (that is, it is out of place). Therefore, next, information regarding the bet number stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the number of bets placed on the game indicated by the start command is two. Determination is made (S909).

  If the number of bets is two (S909: Yes), the message “Challenge!” Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a dedicated sound is output from the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 is dedicated. The “Cherry Bell winning challenge effect” to be lit in the above manner is set (S910), and the lottery result command processing is terminated. Thus, each auxiliary effect unit is driven by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process so that the cherry bell winning challenge effect is executed. If the number of bets is not two (S909: No), it can be grasped that the number of bets is one, so the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a message “Cherry Bell and 7 Bells Challenge!” A special sound is output from the speaker 64 and a “Cherry Bell Winning / 7 Bell Winning Challenge Effect” for turning on the upper lamp 63 in a dedicated manner is set (S911), and the lottery result command processing is terminated. As a result, the auxiliary effect units are driven so that the cherry bell winning and 7 bell winning challenge effects are executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

  By the processing of S910, the “Cherry Bell winning challenge effect” is executed in the auxiliary effect section, so that when the game is played with two cards, it is expected that three medals will be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning mode is established. The player can have a strong feeling. In addition, in the process of S911, the “Cherry Bell Award / 7 Bell Award Challenge Effect” is executed in the auxiliary effect section. Therefore, when the game is played with one piece, the Cherry Bell prize or the 7 bell prize mode is displayed. It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that three or two medals will be paid out upon establishment. Therefore, since the player can play a game with one or two cards while having fun, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that he wants to play a game without leaving an extra medal.

  Next, error command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command process is a process in which an error detected by the main control device 101 is notified by the auxiliary effect unit, and the MPU 181 performs the work RAM 185 in the received command check process (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main process. When the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a and it is determined that the command is an error command, this error command processing is executed.

  In this error command process, first, information on the error type included in the error command is extracted (S951). Then, display of an error message corresponding to the extracted error type is set (S952), and this error command processing is terminated. As a result, an error message corresponding to the auxiliary display unit 65 is displayed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process, the upper lamp 63 is blinked, and an alarm sound is emitted from the speaker 64. Each auxiliary effect section is driven.

  Here, as described above, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. Since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the message image area 189e in advance, the display control device 81 reads out the resident image data based on the error command received from the main control device 101. Thus, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188. Therefore, it is not necessary to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 187. Even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. After the processing is completed, the image controller 188 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 189, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 configured by the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the auxiliary display unit 65 by drawing the image. In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 are made resident in the resident video RAM 189. Responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the user to displaying some image on the auxiliary display unit 65 can be kept high.

  In the slot machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 187 a is used for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 due to the slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to be transferred to the resident video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at the time of power-on. Is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or the hall-related person can display the main power-on time displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The image can be confirmed.

  Therefore, the display control device 81 can transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on. it can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 189. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, so that the slot machine 10 can be immediately started to operate without any problem when the power is turned on. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the use of the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 187 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 59, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 200 will be described as a second embodiment. FIG. 22 is a front view of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board 213 of the pachinko machine 200, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 200.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 200 has an outer frame 211 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 211. And an inner frame 212 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 212, the outer frame 211 is provided with two metal hinges 218 at the upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), and the side on which the hinge 218 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. A frame 212 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side.

  A game board 213 (see FIG. 23) having a large number of nails, winning holes 263, 264 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 212 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 213. Note that the inner frame 212 has a ball launch unit 312a (see FIG. 25) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 213 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 312a to the front area of the game board 213. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 212, a front frame 214 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 215 that covers the lower side of the front frame 214 are provided. In order to support the front frame 214 and the lower plate unit 215, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 214 and the lower pan unit 215 are supported to be openable and closable to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 212 and the locking of the front frame 214 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 221 of the cylinder lock 220 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 214 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 214c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 216 having two sheet glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 214, and the front surface of the game board 213 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 200 through the glass unit 216.

  On the front frame 214, an upper plate 217 for storing a sphere is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened. Prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 217. The bottom surface of the upper plate 217 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 217 is guided to the ball launch unit 312a by the inclination. A frame button 222 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 217. For example, the frame button 222 changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281, changes the effect pattern of the change display (change effect), or changes the effect contents at the reach effect. For example, it is operated by a player.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 200, “stage in town”, “underwater stage”, and “empty stage” are three. There are two stages. Various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 222 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation. ”→“ Empty Stage ”→“ City Stage ”→... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  The front frame 214 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window 214c, there are provided electric decoration parts 229 to 233 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 200, these lighting parts 229 to 233 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 229 to 233 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 214 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 22), there is provided a display lamp 234 that has built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 235 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 214 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 232, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 213 (see FIG. 23) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 200. In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, a plating member 236 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 229 to 233 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 240 is disposed below the window 214c. The ball lending operation unit 240 is provided with a frequency display unit 241, a ball lending button 242, and a return button 243. When the ball lending operation unit 240 is operated with a bill or a card inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 200, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 241 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 242 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 217 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 243 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, the ball rental operation unit 240 is unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly rented to the upper plate 217 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  The lower plate unit 215 located on the lower side of the upper plate 217 has a lower plate 250 formed in a substantially box shape in which the upper surface is opened in order to store balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 217 at the center. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 250, an operation handle 251 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 213 is disposed. Touch sensor 251a, a push button-type stop switch 251b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 251 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 251 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 251a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 251. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 213 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 251 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 251a and the stop switch 251b are off.

  A ball removal lever 252 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 250 downward is provided at the lower front portion of the lower plate 250. This ball release lever 252 is always urged to the right, and by sliding to the left against the urge, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 250 opens, A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 252 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 250 is placed below the lower plate 250. As described above, the operation handle 251 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 250, and the ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 250.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the game board 213 has a wooden base plate 260 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball guide nails, windmills and rails 261 and 262, a general winning opening 263, The ball entrance 264, the variable winning device 265, the variable display device unit 280, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 212. The general winning opening 263, the first winning opening 264, the variable winning device 265, and the variable display device unit 280 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 260 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 213. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 213 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 212 through the window 214c (see FIG. 22) of the front frame 214. Below, the structure of the game board 213 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 262 is formed on the front surface of the game board 213 by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 262 in the same manner as the outer rail 262. The arc-shaped inner rail 261 formed in the above is planted. The inner periphery of the front surface of the game board 213 is surrounded by the inner rail 261 and the outer rail 262, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 213 and the glass unit 216 (see FIG. 22). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 213 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 261 and 262 and the arc member 270 (a winning opening etc. are provided, Area).

  The two rails 261 and 262 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 312a to the upper part of the game board 213. A return ball prevention member 268 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 261 (upper left portion in FIG. 23) to prevent a situation where a ball guided to the upper part of the game board 213 once returns to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 269 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 262 (upper right part in FIG. 23) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. Further, a resin arc member 270 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end portion of the inner rail 261 and the upper right end portion of the outer rail 262 is a base. The plate 260 is driven and fixed.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 237a and a 7-segment display 237b as light emitting means on the upper right portion of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 23). A display device 237 is provided. The first symbol display device 237 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 310 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200. The plurality of LEDs 237a indicate whether or not the state is changing by a lighting state, or, as a stop pattern after the end of the change, as a result of a lottery performed for entering the first entrance 264 (start winning prize). The corresponding symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of holding times is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 237b is for displaying the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 237a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 200 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors.

  In the pachinko machine 200, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 264, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is determined that the big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and hourly jackpot are prepared. The LED 237a not only shows whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Also, “time-saving big hit” is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds and is in a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball easily enters the first entrance 264. On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (short-time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first entrance entrance It means a game state in which a ball easily enters H.264. It should be noted that instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 200, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 264 is opened, or once It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases by hit.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 263 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 280 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 280 is configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a ball entering the first ball inlet 264 (start winning prize) as a trigger. There are provided a 3 symbol display device 281 and a 2 symbol display device 283 composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol with the passage of a ball at the second entrance 267 as a trigger.

  The third symbol display device 281 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 314 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle and right Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281.

  The variable display device unit 280 is provided with a center frame 286 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 281. In the third symbol display device 281 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 310 is performed by the first symbol display device 237, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 237 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 281 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 264 before the stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 237, the number of times the ball enters is held up to four times, and the number of times the ball is held is first. This is indicated by the symbol display device 237 and the number of lighting of the holding lamp 285. Four hold lamps 285 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 281. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 264 is configured to be held up to a maximum of 4 times, but the maximum holding frequency is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the hold lamp 285 is deleted, and the number of times of the variable display hold based on the entrance to the first entrance 264 is displayed as a number on a part of the 3rd symbol display device 281 or an area divided into 4 areas. You may make it display in the aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) different only by the frequency | count of holding | maintenance. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the lighting display may not be performed by the holding lamp 285.

  The second symbol display device 283 displays a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entrance 267. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 200, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 283 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 264 is in an operating state for a predetermined time (opened). Configured). The number of passes of the ball through the second entrance 267 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the first symbol display device 237 described above and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp 284. Four second symbol holding lamps 284 corresponding to the maximum number of holdings are provided, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 281.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 283 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol. A part of the display device 281 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 284 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 281. In addition, the passage of the second entrance 267 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of suspensions, like the 1st entrance 264, but 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, (8 times). In addition, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the second symbol holding lamp 284 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 280, a first entrance 264 through which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 264, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 213 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 310 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237. Further, the first entrance 264 is also one of the entrances through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 265 is disposed below the first ball opening 264, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 265a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 200, when the lottery in the main control device 310 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 265a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 265a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 265a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 265a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 265 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 265a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 265a is normally closed in a state where a ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward, and the ball is temporarily formed in an open state in which it is easy to win the specific winning opening 265a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 265a, and the LED 237a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 237, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 265a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 265a while the port 265a is opened. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 213. It can be visually recognized through the small window 235 (see FIG. 22).

  Further, the game board 213 is provided with an out port 266. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 263, 264, 265a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 266. A number of nails are planted on the game board 213 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 24, control board units 290 and 291 and a back pack unit 294 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 200. The control board unit 290 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 310), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 313), and a display control board (display control apparatus 314). The control board unit 291 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 311), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 312), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 315), and a card unit connection board 316.

  The back pack unit 294 includes a back pack 292 that forms a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 293 as a unit. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 310, the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 315, and the card unit connection board 316 are housed in the board boxes 300 to 304, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 300 to 304 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  The board box 300 (main control device 310) and the board box 302 (payout control device 311 and launch control device 312) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 300 and 302, or if the substrate boxes 300 and 302 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 300 and 302 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 293 includes a tank 330 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 294 and opens upward, a tank rail 331 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 330 and gently tilts toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 331. A case rail 332 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 333 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 332 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 416 (see FIG. 25). ing. The tank 330 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 333 as appropriate. A vibrator 334 for applying vibration to the tank rail 331 is attached to the tank rail 331.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 320, the firing control device 312 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 321, and the power supply device 315 is provided with a RAM erase switch 322. The state return switch 320 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 416 (see FIG. 25). The operation knob 321 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 322 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 200 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200.

  The main controller 310 is equipped with an MPU 401 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 401 includes a ROM 402 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 401 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 402 is executed. A certain RAM 403 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 311 and the sound lamp control device 313 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sub-controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 310 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 200 such as a lottery lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 283. The RAM 403 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 403 of the main controller 310 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 in order to perform a lottery lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 283, etc. Used in.

  The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 include a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 283, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 40). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 403. The RAM 403 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has an access to the first entrance 264. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the entry timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 264. Stored in And the value of the random number that becomes the big hit is set by the big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 of the main control device, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is set by the big hit random number table. A jackpot is determined when the value matches a random number that is a jackpot. In addition, this jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (period that is not probabilistic) and one for high probability (highly probable) that has a higher probability of jackpot than that low probability. The number of random numbers that are included in the jackpot is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between a low probability and a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 at the time of the big hit, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9), and a maximum value (for example, In the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 9, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 9). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 264. Stored in the area.

  Therefore, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is displayed. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of detachment.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area is a random number that is a big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is that of the big hit It becomes. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first per random number counter C1, the number of random number values that are jackpots at low probability is 3, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low probability jackpot random number table. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that is a big hit at a high probability is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448 , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that is the jackpot stored in the low probability jackpot random number table and the value of the random number that is the jackpot stored in the high probability jackpot random number table are duplicated values. In order not to become, the value of the random number which becomes each big hit is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 200, the value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 200 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a jackpot, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-9. In the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is “6, 7, 8, 9”, the big hit type is “15R probable change that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum round number is 15 big hits. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “4, 5”, the big hit type is “2R probable change that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of two rounds. When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0, 1, 2, 3”, the big hit type shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 big hits. At the same time, there is a “time-saving big hit” that is in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 200 according to the present embodiment is configured such that three types of hits (15R probability variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, and short time per unit) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first per type counter C2. Has been.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects an effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. When the “rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99) and the “reach out of front / rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach is reached Three stop (rendering) patterns with “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 264. Stored.

  In addition, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values from which stop patterns are selected are provided in the ROM 402 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop pattern is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 200 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the “completely out” stop pattern is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely off” is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 264. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 264 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 281 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 281 are determined by the sound lamp control device 421 and the display control device 314. . The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 267. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined to be winning, and the symbol “◯” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 283. Is displayed and the first entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 40).

  As described above, the RAM 403 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 310 displays the big hit lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processes of the pachinko machine 200 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 283 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 26, the RAM 403 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 401 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 401, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored. Further, the RAM 403 has at least a holding number counter 403a. Note that the RAM 403 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the pachinko machine 200 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 403 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 403. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 200 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 403. Writing to the RAM 403 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 40), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 403 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 39) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 401 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The number-of-holds counter 403a holds the number of times the variable display (variable display performed on the third symbol display device 281) is held on the first symbol display device 237 based on the entrance to the first entrance 264 (start winning prize). This is a counter that counts up to 4 times (the number of standby times). The initial value of the number-of-holds counter 403a is set to zero, and 1 is added to the maximum value 4 each time a ball is inserted into the first entrance 264 and the number of times the variable display is held is increased ( (See S1403 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the hold number counter 403a is decremented by 1 every time a change display based on the entry (start winning) to the first entrance 264 is executed (see S1204 in FIG. 35).

  The value of the hold number counter 403a (that is, the hold number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 313 by a hold number command (see S1411 in FIG. 37). The hold number command is 2 bytes (16 bits) transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp controller 313 each time the hold number counter 403a is incremented by 1 when the ball enters the first entrance 264. Configuration command. The voice lamp control device 313 turns on the hold lamps 285 by the number corresponding to the hold count based on the value of the hold count counter 403a notified by the hold count command.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the configuration of the hold count command will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the bit configuration of the hold count command. In the following description, in the 2-byte command, the upper byte is referred to as the upper byte, and the lower byte is referred to as the lower byte. In each byte, the most significant bit (MSB) is assumed to be “seventh bit” and the least significant bit (LSB) is assumed to be “0th bit”.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte are composed of a fixed value “0111” (binary number), and this command is a hold count command. It shows that. The voice lamp control device 313 confirms the value of the seventh bit to the fourth bit of the upper byte in the command received from the main control device 310, and receives it when the value is “0111” (binary number). It is recognized that the received command is a hold count command (see S2007 in FIG. 44).

  Also, in the hold count command, the lower byte is composed of the hold count. When the main control device 310 transmits a hold frequency command to the sound lamp control device 313, the main control device 310 uses the value of the hold frequency counter 403a incremented by 1 when the ball enters the first entrance 264 (start winning) as the number of hold times. This applies to the 2nd to 0th bits of the lower byte of the command. In addition, 0 is set in all the seventh to third bits of the lower byte of the hold count command. As a result, the entire number of lower bytes of the number-of-holds command can represent the number of times the variable display is held on the first symbol display device 237 based on the entrance to the first entrance 264 (start winning prize).

  When the voice lamp control device 313 receives the hold count command from the main control device 310, the voice lamp control device 313 extracts the hold count of the variable display held in the main control device 310 from the lower byte of the received hold count command (S2008 in FIG. 44). reference). In this way, the voice lamp control device 313 uses the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 310 every time the hold number counter 403a is incremented by 1, so that the number of hold times of the variable display held in the main control device 310 itself. The value can be obtained. As a result, the variable display hold count managed by the hold count counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 deviates from the actual variable display hold count held in the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even in this case, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending number command received.

  On the other hand, the number-of-holds command also serves as a continuous notice permission command for instructing the audio lamp control device 313 whether or not to allow the third symbol display device 281 to display the continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests (notices) that the result of the lottery performed along with the entry to the first entrance 264 (start prize) is likely to be a big hit. It is an effect that the same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 together with the variation effect over all the variation effects (variation display) that are sometimes held. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 together with the variation effect that has been put on hold, the player will be given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the change effects that have been put on hold are completed. It can be held against.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the role as the continuous notice permission command in the hold number command is as follows. As shown in FIG. 27, the continuous notice permission flag represented by the first bit of the upper byte of the hold number command and the continuous notice represented by the 0th bit of the upper byte. This is done by the after game state flag. The continuous notice permission flag indicates whether or not the third symbol display device 281 is permitted to display the continuous notice effect. When the value is “1”, the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. This indicates that display is permitted, and in the case of “0”, it indicates that display of the continuous notice effect is not permitted on the third symbol display device 281. In addition, the game state flag after the continuous notice indicates that the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the success / failure determination performed at the time of entering the first entrance 264 serving as a transmission trigger of the holding number command) is “ It indicates whether it is a big hit or out, and when the value is “1”, it indicates “big hit”, and when it is “0” (binary number), it indicates “out”.

  In main controller 310, apart from the jackpot lottery executed at the start of fluctuation (see S1301 in FIG. 36), the first random number counter is also used when entering the first entrance 264, which is a transmission trigger for the hold count command. Stores the values of C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3 in the holding ball storage area, and determines whether or not the counter value is a big hit from each stored counter. The jackpot type at the time of jackpot and the stop pattern at the time of losing are determined. Then, the setting of the continuous notice permission flag and the game state flag after the continuous notice is performed based on the result of the determination as to whether or not to enter the first entrance 264.

  For example, if the result of the determination is “15R probability variation jackpot”, the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1” and the game state flag after continuous notice is set to “1” (see S1407 in FIG. 37). In the case of “reach”, the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1” and the game state flag after continuous notice is set to “0” (see S1409 in FIG. 37). In other cases, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to “0”, and the game state flag after continuous notice is set to “0” (see S1410 in FIG. 37). In this way, when the jackpot is the most advantageous gaming state for the player (15R probability variation jackpot), or even if it is out of reach, reach that impresses the player just before the jackpot ( The value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1” only in the case of front / rear reach). Thereby, when a continuous notice effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281, a high expectation can be given to the player.

  When the number-of-holds command is received by the sound lamp control device 313, the sound lamp control device 313 confirms the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the number-of-holds command, and the value is “ If “1”, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see S2107 in FIG. 45). At this time, the sound lamp control device 313 has a predetermined probability of determining the start of the continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination probability”) as the 0th bit (that is, continuous) It is configured to be changed in accordance with the value of (post-notification game state flag) (see S2103 to S2105 in FIG. 45). This change in the predetermined probability will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the processing related to the continuous notice effect, the main control device 310 performs only the permission determination of the continuous notice effect based on the result of the determination performed when entering the first entrance 264, and The determination result is included in the hold count command as a continuous notice permission flag and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313. Then, the audio lamp control device 313 determines the actual start of the continuous notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous notice effect based on the value of the continuous notice permission flag of the hold count command. Thereby, the process in the main controller 310 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entrance to the first entrance 264, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 200. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 having a high processing capability is used for the audio lamp control device 313, a variety of presentation modes for the continuous notice effect can be set.

  In addition, in the main control device 310, if it is a jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, or even if it is out of the game, it is one step before the jackpot for the player In the case of an reach that gives an impression (rear and forward reach), a continuous notice permission flag that permits the continuous notice effect is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 313 in the hold count command. That is, when the result of the determination made when entering the first entrance 264 is not only a big hit, but also when the front and rear are out of reach, the main controller 310 allows the continuous notice effect, and the information is displayed as an audio lamp. Since it is transmitted to the control device 313, the audio lamp control device 313 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even in the case of a back and forth reach. As a result, even if the discontinuation continues as a result of the lottery, it is possible to have a high expectation to the player by performing the continuous notice effect, and the player is bored. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the continuous notice effect is permitted, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold number command is set to “1” and the hold number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313. Therefore, with this one hold count command, two pieces of information of the hold count and the continuous notice permission flag can be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313. Thereby, in addition to being able to accurately grasp that the execution of the continuous notice effect is permitted in the audio lamp control device 313, the number of suspended variable effects to which the continuous notice effect is added (the number of hold times) is set. Accurately grasp. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 313 is easier than in the case where the number of times of variation effect hold and the continuous notice permission flag are transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 by different commands. Can be.

  Furthermore, since the number-of-holds command in the present embodiment also includes a game state flag after continuous notice, information related to the game state flag after continuous notice in addition to the number of fluctuating effects on hold and the continuous notice permission flag is also sound lamp control. The device 313 can be accurately grasped. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the continuous notice determination probability or select the continuous notice effect mode based on the game state flag after continuous notice. Accordingly, when the main control device 310 transmits information to the voice lamp control device 313, the number-of-holds command, the number of times that the variable effect is held, permission information for the continuous notice effect, and information based on the game state after the continuous notice effect is sent. By including them in one, the control in the sound lamp control device 313 can be facilitated.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. An input / output port 405 is connected to the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 via a bus line 404 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 405 includes a payout control device 311, a sound lamp control device 313, a first symbol display device 237, a second symbol display device 283, a second symbol hold lamp 284, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 265a. A solenoid 409 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open / close forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 401 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 405. Send. The input / output port 405 is connected to various switches 408 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 453 described later provided in the power supply device 315, and the MPU 401 is output from the various switches 408. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 453.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by driving the payout motor 416. The MPU 411 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 412 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 411, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 413 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similar to the RAM 403 of the main control device 310, the RAM 413 of the payout control device 311 stores the stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 411 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 411 are stored, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 413 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the pachinko machine 200 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 413 is backed up. As with the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 411, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 415 is connected to the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 414 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 310, the payout motor 416, the firing control device 312 and the like are connected to the input / output port 415, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 311 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 311, but not connected to the main control device 310.

  The launch control device 312 controls the ball launch unit 312a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 251 is obtained when an instruction to launch a ball is given by the main control device 310. The ball launch unit 312a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 251a is detected by the touch sensor 251a that the player is touching the operation handle 251, and the stop switch 251b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the rotation amount of 251, and a sphere is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 251.

  The sound lamp control device 313 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 426, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 229 to 233, the display lamp 234, and the hold lamp 285). It controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 281 performed by the display control device 314 such as a variation effect (variation display) and a continuous notice effect. The MPU 421 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 422 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 421, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 423 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 via a bus line 424 including an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 310, a display control device 314, an audio output device 426, a lamp display device 427, a vibration sensor 428, a frame button 222, and the like are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 313 monitors the input from the frame button 222. When the player operates the frame button 222, the voice lamp control device 313 changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 or displays a change display (change display). The voice output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are controlled so as to change the production pattern of the production and the content of the production at the reach production, and the display control device 314 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 314 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 281. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  The vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 200, the entrance to the entrance is an important factor that determines the game state, so the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and intentional entry into the entrance is prevented. There is a need. Therefore, if it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 428 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 200 by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 314. In the display control device 314, control is performed so that an error message image corresponding to the type of error (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 without delay.

  The ROM 422 of the sound lamp control device 313 stores at least a continuous notice determination table 422a. Further, the RAM 423 is provided with at least a holding number counter 423a, a continuous notice determination counter 423b, a continuous notice number register 423c, a continuous notice number counter 423d, a continuous notice mode counter 423e, and a continuous notice mode flag 423f. Here, for convenience of explanation, the continuous notice determination counter 423b and the continuous notice determination table 422a will be described first, and then the remaining counters, flags, and registers will be described.

  The continuous notice determination counter 423b is a loop counter used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once every time the command determination process (see FIG. 44) of the sound lamp control device 313 is executed. The continuous notice determination counter 423b is updated by, for example, incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127).

  When the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main controller 310 is “1”, the sound lamp control device 313 determines the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b and will be described later. Based on the continuous notice determination table 422a, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S2106 and S2107 in FIG. 45).

  The continuous notice determination table 422a is displayed when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main controller 310 is “1”, that is, from the main controller 310 to the third symbol display device. It is a table for setting “continuous notice determination probability” when there is a notification permitting display of the continuous notice effect in 281. Here, the continuous notice determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 281 starts the continuous notice effect upon receiving a notification permitting display of the continuous notice effect. The audio lamp control device 313 compares the continuous notice determination table 422a with the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b, and when the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is within the range indicated by the continuous notice determination table 422a, It is determined that the symbol display device 281 starts the continuous notice effect (see S2106 and S2107 in FIG. 45).

  Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 422a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 422a. As shown in FIG. 28, the continuous notice determination table 422a has two tables, a big hit time continuous notice determination table 422a1 and a losing time continuous notice determination table 422a2. When the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main controller 310 is “1”, the voice lamp control device 313 receives the 0th bit ( The table used for setting the continuous notice determination probability is selected from the two tables in the continuous notice determination table 422a according to the game state flag after continuous notice). That is, when the game state flag after continuous notice is “1” (the game state after the end of continuous notice effect is “big hit”), the big hit continuous notice determination table 422a1 is selected, and the game state flag after continuous notice is “0”. "(The game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is" out "), the out-of-game continuous notice determination table 422a2 is selected (see S2103 to S2105 in FIG. 45). Thereby, the continuous notice determination probability can be changed according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit” or “out”).

  Each of the big hit continuous notice determination table 422a1 and the losing continuous notice determination table 422a2 can be taken by the number-of-holds counter 423a in the sound lamp control device 313 (the number of times the variable effect held by the main control device 310 is held). In correspondence with the values “1” to “4”, ranges of the continuous notice determination counter 423b for determining the start of the continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) are respectively defined.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 28, the jackpot time continuous notice determination table 422a1 defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the hold count counter 423a, and the value of the hold count counter 423a. “0” to 15 is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with “2”, “0 to 39” is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the hold count counter 423a, and the hold In association with the value “4” of the number counter 423a, “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  Further, the off-time continuous notice determination table 422a2 associates with the value “1” of the hold number counter 423a, defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range, and associates with the value “2” of the hold number counter 423a. “0-9” is defined as the continuous notice determination range, “0-25” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the hold count counter 423a, and the value “ In association with “4”, “0 to 39” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  The voice lamp control device 313 receives the hold count command from the main control device 310, and when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is “1”, the continuous notice determination is performed. When either one of the big hit time continuous notice determination table 422a1 and the off-time continuous notice determination table 422a2 is selected as a table for setting the probability, the value of the holding number counter 423a at that time is selected from the selected continuous notice determination table. The associated continuous notice determination range is specified, and when the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b at that time is included in the continuous notice determination range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Now, both the big success time continuous notice determination table 422a1 and the out-of-line continuous notice determination table 422a2 in the example of FIG. However, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to determine that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, and the probability of continuous notice determination becomes high. It can be said that the higher the number of suspensions of the variable display in the main control device 310 is, the higher the continuous notice determination probability is. Here, since the continuous notice effect is performed over all the fluctuating effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined, the higher the number of hold times, the higher the continuous notice determination probability becomes. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, when comparing the big hit time continuous notice determination table 422a1 and the lost time continuous notice determination table 422a2 in the example of FIG. 28, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the same holding number counter 423a is the big hit time continuous. The advance notice determination table 422a1 is defined to be the same as or wider than the outlier continuous notice determination table 422a2. That is, the probability of continuous notice determination when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “big hit” is the same as or more than the probability of decision of continuous notice when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out” Is set to be higher. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state is likely to become a “hit” after the end of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to give a high sense of expectation to the player. Also, normally, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the determination made at the time of entering the first entrance 264) is “big hit” is more than the probability of being “out”. Since it is set small, if the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect is "displaced", it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed, while in the case of "hit", It is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  As described above, the main control device 310 determines whether or not to permit the continuous notice effect when the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning decision is made when entering the first entrance 264 is not only a big hit but also a back and forth reach. The determination result is notified to the sound lamp control device 313 as a continuous notice permission flag of the hold count command. Then, the sound lamp control device 313 may decide to execute the continuous notice effect even in the case of a back-and-forth outreach, etc., according to the determination result (the value of the continuous notice permission flag of the hold count command) and various conditions. Since it is possible, execution of the continuous notice effect can be performed under various conditions. Thereby, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if the discontinuation continues as a result of the lottery, since the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player a high expectation and prevent the player from being bored. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The number-of-holds counter 423a of the RAM 423 is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 237 (and the third symbol display device 281), and the number of variable effects held on the main control device 310. This is a counter that counts up to 4 times (the number of standby times). When the voice lamp control device 313 receives a hold number command transmitted from the main control device 310 when the hold number of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 264, the hold number command 44, the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310 (that is, the hold count of the variable display held by the main control device 310) is stored in the hold count counter 423a (see S2008 in FIG. 44). ).

  Also, the voice lamp control device 313 receives a variation pattern command that is a variation display instruction command from the main control device 310, and sets the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 281 with the reception of the variation pattern command. The value of the number counter 423a is decremented by 1 (see S2207 in FIG. 47). Thus, since the value of the hold count counter 423a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 310, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310.

  The value of the holding number counter 423 a is used for lighting processing of the holding lamp 285. That is, among the four holding lamps 285, only the number of the holding lamps 285 corresponding to the value of the holding number counter 423a is turned on, and the remaining holding lamps 285 are turned off (see S1905 in FIG. 42). In addition, the value of the hold number counter 423a is set when the continuous notice determination range is set according to the number of holds from the continuous notice determination table 422a (one of the big hit continuous notice determination table 422a1 or the off-time continuous notice determination table 422a2). (See S2106 in FIG. 45). Further, the value of the holding number counter 423a is also used for setting the continuous notice number register 423c when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S2108 in FIG. 45).

  The continuous notice number register 423c is a register that defines the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the hold number command received from the main controller 310, the sound lamp controller 313 stores the value of the hold number counter 423c at that time in the continuous notice number register 423c. Thus, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is defined so that the continuous notice effect is executed for all the changing effects held at the time of determination of the continuous notice effect (see S2108 in FIG. 45).

  The continuous notice counter 423d is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. The initial value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the hold number command received from the main controller 110, the continuous notice effect number counter 223d is set to 1. (See S2109 in FIG. 45).

  When the variation pattern command which is a command command for variation effect is received from the main control device 310, the MPU 421 refers to the continuous notice effect number counter 223d, and while the value indicates a value other than 0, the third symbol The display device 281 is set to perform the continuous notice effect, and the effect form of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the values of the continuous notice mode flag 423f, the continuous notice number register 423c, and the continuous notice number counter 423d. (See FIG. 48). Further, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0, the start of the continuous notice effect has not been determined, and therefore the continuous notice effect is set to non-execution (see S2252 in FIG. 48).

  When the mode of the continuous notice effect is set, update processing of the continuous notice number counter 423d is performed (see S2263 in FIG. 48). If the start determination is not made, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is continuously held at zero.

  If the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d before the update is not 0 and not equal to the value of the continuous notice count register 423c, the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d is incremented by 1, and the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d before the update is increased. Is equal to a value other than 0 and equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is reset to zero. Thus, the mode of the continuous notice effect is set so that the continuous notice effect is executed by the number of executions defined by the continuous notice number register 423c.

  Here, as described above, the value of the continuous notice number register 423c is the value of the hold number counter 423a at the time when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, that is, held by the main controller 110 at that time. This is the number of suspensions of the variable production. Therefore, by performing the update process of the continuous notice number counter 423d as described above, the continuous notice effect is displayed for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110 when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined. A mode is set, and the continuous notice effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281. And since the determination of the continuous notice effect is made based on the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the end of the continuous notice effect. it can.

  The continuous notice mode counter 423e is a counter used for selection of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. In this pachinko machine 200, two types of modes are prepared as the effect modes of the continuous notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Of these, one aspect is a step-up effect type continuous notice effect, and another aspect is the same effect type continuous notice effect.

  The step-up type continuous notice effect displays “egg” during the first variation effect, “chick” during the second variation effect, and “chick” during the third variation effect, This is a mode in which the “chicken group” is displayed during the fourth variation effect. In addition, when the value of the continuous notice number register 423c is 3 or less, that is, when the number of variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set is three or less, the last set of the continuous notice effect is set regardless of the number of continuous notice executions. The “chicken group” is displayed in the variation effect.

  As a result, the symbol displayed in the continuous notice effect changes gradually (steps up) every time the changing effect is performed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the player gradually changes the symbol. By looking at the player, when the chicken group is displayed, the player can have a sense of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed. In addition, when the variation effect set for the continuous notice effect is 3, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of “egg” → “chick” → “chicken group”, and the change effect set for the continuous notice effect is 2. In some cases, a continuous notice effect is performed in the order of “egg” → “chicken group”, and when the variable effect set for the continuous notice effect is 1, the “chicken group” is displayed suddenly. In this way, when the number of variation effects set for the continuous notice effect is 3 or less, the symbols on the way are skipped and the chicken group is displayed suddenly, so that the player can select the suddenly displayed chicken group. Seen, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the same effect type continuous notice effect, except for the last change effect among the set change effects, “bubbles” are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 immediately after the change effect is stopped. It is a production to make. As a result, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect and the 15R probability variable big hit, the 2R probability variable big hit, or the short-term big hit does not appear, the “bubbles” appear continuously after the stoppage. The player can have a sense of expectation that a big hit is obtained after the end of the continuous notice effect, and can be motivated to continue playing the game.

  The continuous notice mode counter 423e is updated once every time the command determination process of the sound lamp control device 313 is executed (see S2001 in FIG. 44). The continuous notice mode counter 423e is updated by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 15 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 15).

  When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the sound lamp control device 313 determines the effect form of the continuous notice effect according to the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e. In the present embodiment, when the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is 3 to 7, the same effect type continuous notice effect is set as the effect form of the continuous notice effect, and in the case of other values, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is set. Step-up type continuous notice effect is set.

  The effect mode of the continuous notice effect determined here is set in the continuous notice mode flag 423f. Specifically, when the step-up type continuous notice effect is set as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect, “0” is set in the continuous notice mode flag 423f and the same effect type continuous notice effect is set. In this case, “1” is set in the continuous notice mode flag 423f (S2110 to S2112 in FIG. 45).

  The continuous notice mode flag 423f is referred to by the sound lamp control device 313 when a change pattern command which is a change effect instruction command from the main control device 310 is received, and the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and When the continuous notice mode flag 423f is “0”, it is displayed together with the variable effect according to the values of the continuous notice number register 423c and the continuous notice number counter 423d so that a step-up type continuous notice effect is performed. Set the symbol to be selected from “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group”. In addition, when the value of the continuous notice count 423d is other than 0 and the continuous notice mode flag 423f is “1”, “ Set "bubbles".

  When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the sound lamp control device 313 generates a continuous notice setting command including the value of the continuous notice number register 423c and the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f, and the display control device. To 314. Thereby, the display control device 314 grasps the number of continuous notices of the continuous notice effect to be executed from the value of the continuous notice number register 423c and grasps the form of the continuous notice effect from the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f. Accordingly, image drawing control related to the continuous notice effect is executed.

  In addition, the RAM 423 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 310 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not the variable display should be started. It has a variation start flag (not shown). Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 44) of the voice lamp processing device 313 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process S2002 is performed. , S2005, S2007, and S2010, the command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed. The variation start flag is turned on when a variation pattern command output from the main control device 310 is received (see S2003 in FIG. 44), and is turned off when the variation display is set on the third symbol display device 281. (See S2203 in FIG. 47).

  The display control device 314 is connected to the voice lamp control device 313 and the third symbol display device 281, and changes in the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 313. It controls display (variation effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 314 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 315 includes a power supply unit 451 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 200, a power failure monitoring circuit 452 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 322 (see FIG. 24). And an erasing switch circuit 453. The power supply unit 451 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 310 to 314 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 451 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 408, solenoids such as a solenoid 409, motors, etc., 12 volts, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 310 to 314 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 452 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 and the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 452 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 451, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 451 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 38).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 453 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 310 when the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 200 is powered on, the main control device 310 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 311 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 311.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 314. The display control device 314 includes an MPU 431, a ROM (program ROM) 432, a work RAM 433, a character ROM 434, a resident video RAM 435, a normal video RAM 436, an image controller 437, an input port 438, and an output port 439. And bus lines 440 and 441.

  The input side of the input port 438 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 313, and the output side of the input port 438 is connected to the MPU 431, ROM 432, work RAM 433, character ROM 434, and image controller 437 via the bus line 440. ing. A resident video RAM 435 and a normal video RAM 436 are connected to the image controller 437, and an output port 439 is connected via a bus line 441. A third symbol display device 281 is connected to the output side of the output port 439.

  Note that the pachinko machine 200 has a model with exactly the same specifications as the symbol structure displayed on the third symbol display device 281 even if it is a different model with a different lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 314 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 431, the character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 will be described first, and then the ROM 432 and the work RAM 433 will be described.

  First, the MPU 431 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 281 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 313.

  The character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 are all the character ROM 187, the image controller 188, the resident video RAM 189 provided in the display control device 314 of the slot machine 10 in the first embodiment. It has the same configuration or function as the normal video RAM 190.

  That is, the character ROM 434 is a memory that stores image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and includes a NAND flash memory 434a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes. Therefore, since a large number of images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be stored, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player. It has become.

  Further, the character ROM 434 is the same as the arbitration circuit 187b provided in the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, which performs data address conversion to read / write data while avoiding a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 434a. A known arbitration circuit 434b having a function (see, for example, Patent Document 1) is provided.

  The image controller 437 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 281 at a predetermined timing, and is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 in advance when the power is turned on. The image is drawn using the image data that is resident and resident, or the image data transferred from the character ROM 435 to the normal video RAM 436 each time based on an instruction from the MPU 431.

  Here, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 434 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on. Therefore, after the initialization process is finished, the image resident in the resident video RAM 435 is displayed. The image controller 437 can perform image drawing processing while using the data. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 281 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 435 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310 or the display control device 314. Even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be kept high.

  In addition, the image controller 437 has a buffer RAM 437a configured by a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 434a, like the buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 in the first embodiment. doing.

  Here, in the first embodiment, when transferring image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 directly reads out one block of data from the character ROM 187 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 188a. The MPU 181 executed the process of transferring the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a to the resident RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 when the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 was not used. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the image controller 437 performs transfer from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 based on an instruction from the MPU 431.

  Specifically, when the MPU 431 determines that image data needs to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 and determines that image data needs to be transferred, it should be transferred. The leading address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 is transferred), and the transfer destination (resident The transfer command including the head address of the video video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190) is transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437. The transfer command may include the address at the end of the character ROM 434 storing the image data, instead of the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  When the image controller 437 receives the transfer command, the image controller 437 reads data for one block from a predetermined address in the character ROM 435 according to various information included in the transfer command, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 437a, and stores it in the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video. When the RAM 436 is not used, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 437a is transferred to the resident RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data of the data size indicated by the transfer command is transferred (see FIG. 59).

  Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being in time.

  The image controller 437 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. A period that is not used for the display process on the device 281 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 435 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 434 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on, like the display control device 81 in the first embodiment. In addition to an hour main image area 435a, a back image area 435c, a character symbol area 435e, and an error message image area 435f, a power-on variation image area 435b and a third symbol area 435d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 435a is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing initialization processing when the power is turned on, similarly to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image to be displayed when the power is turned on. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 435b, a game is started by the player while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 281, and a ball entering the first ball inlet 164 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main control device 310 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 451 is started, the MPU 431 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a. Then, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 (see S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 50).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing initialization processing at the time of power-on. First, while the display control device 314 is performing the initialization process at the time of turning on the power, at the normal time, as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when a display variation pattern command that is a command to start variation is received from the audio lamp control device 313 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the display control device 314 As shown in FIG. 30 (b), on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a stop image at the time of power-on of the “O” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. 30 (c). In addition, the “×” symbol power-on stop image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the fluctuation period at the same position as the “◯” symbol. Then, the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 310 is determined from the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command from the sound lamp control device 313. The image shown in FIG. 30 is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and in the case of “out”, the image shown in FIG. 30C is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 431 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 435a to the image controller 437 when the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is completed. By instructing the drawing of the main image at power-on, the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The MPU 431 controls the main image to be displayed when the power is turned on until the initialization processing of the display control device 314 is completed. On the other hand, during the initialization process, a transfer command is transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437 so that image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. The

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the hall official confirms the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Can do. Accordingly, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. Also, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 435b, and the images shown in FIGS. 3B and 3C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As described above, since the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 435 b, so the power is turned on. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 264 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

  Further, since the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is stored in the main image area 435a at power-on and the fluctuation image area 435b at power-on of the resident video RAM 435, a power failure is instantaneously generated. If the data resident in the resident video RAM 435 remains, the image data resident in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b at the time of power recovery can be used. The power-on main image and the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The back image area 435c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 similarly to the back image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIG. 31, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c of the back image will be described. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing three types of back images and a range of back images stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 for each back image. FIG. 31 (b) shows the back side corresponding to the “underwater stage”, and FIG. 31 (b) shows the back side corresponding to the “empty stage”. For C, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c is schematically shown.

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to C, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are prepared in the character ROM 434. The image controller 437 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to C (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured so that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the display region, the smoothness is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 222 to change the stage, the MPU 431 first sets the position between the position a and the position a ′ as the initial position of the display area, and the image at the initial position is the third symbol display device. The image controller 437 is controlled so as to be displayed at 281. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 281, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 435c in each back image will be described. As for the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage, all the image data corresponding to the entire rear surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 435c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 434 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, with respect to the back surface B corresponding to the underwater stage and the back surface C corresponding to the empty stage, only the image data corresponding to the partial area of the back surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b, is stored in the resident video RAM 435. Stored in the back image area 435c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 222 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 222 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal that the image data of the entire scrolled range (image corresponding to the position a to the position d) is resident in the resident video RAM 435 for all the back images. However, if this is done, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 435, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is determined. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 222, at least the image in the range from the position a to the position b is immediately used by using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. The initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281, It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed. it can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200, while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b from the left to the right, image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the transfer to the back image E area 436e can be completed. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the stored image data, the position b is used using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 without delay. The range of position d from 'can be scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  The image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data stored in the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 437 by the MPU 431, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and then the normal video By using the image data stored in the back image E area 436e of the RAM 436 to display the image from the position b ′ on the 3rd symbol display device 281, the back image is scrolled with smooth connection to the 3rd symbol display device 281. It is displayed.

  Further, the MPU 431 uses the image data of the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 to display the image between the position c and the position d on the third symbol display device 281 as a display area. Then, the MPU 431 uses the image data in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 to display the image between the position a and the position a ′ as a display area on the third symbol display device 281. The image controller 437 is controlled. Thus, the third symbol display device 281 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the position a and the position c flows toward the left.

  As described above, since the image data corresponding to the back surface B and the back surface C is stored in the back image area 435c only in the image data corresponding to a partial area on the back surface, the capacity of the back image area 435c can be kept small. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 435d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the display content of the variation effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 is demonstrated. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the variation effect screen of the third symbol display device 281 and is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the variation effect is horizontally scrolled.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 310 is a big hit, a variation effect in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variation effect is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the “probable big hit”, a variation effect in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers are arranged is performed. On the other hand, in the case of transitioning to “short time bonus”, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers are aligned.

  The variation effect is performed so that the main symbol and the sub symbol are scrolled (rightwardly scrolled) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity for each symbol row. As shown in FIG. 32, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 32, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Accordingly, the third symbol display device 281 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines. In each game, when a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on one of the active lines when the fluctuating scroll that scrolls horizontally is stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot. Is displayed. In the case of horizontal scrolling, the variation effect stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2.

  The third symbol area 435d is a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 281; that is, ten main symbols consisting of ten character symbols corresponding to numbers “0” to “9”; The image data corresponding to one type of sub-design formed smaller than the main design is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the third symbol display device 281, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 264 occurs, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 281 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 237. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The character symbol area 435e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as in the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 200, characters of “girl” and “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 435e, so that the display control device When the character design is changed based on the content of the command received from the main control device 313, 314 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, but is previously resident in the character design area 435e of the resident video RAM 435. The image controller 437 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 187, the character design can be changed immediately.

  Similar to the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment, the error message image area 435f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 200. In the pachinko machine 200, when the sound lamp control device 313 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 428 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the sound lamp control device 313 displays the occurrence of the vibration error by an error command. 314 is notified. Also, when the sound lamp control device 313 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the occurrence of the error together with the content of the error by an error command. . The display control device 314 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 281 when an error command is received.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 200, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 435f in advance, so that the display control device 314 receives the error message of the resident video RAM 435 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 435f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 437. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error messages from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 434, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed.

  Similar to the normal video RAM 190 of the first embodiment, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and the image controller 437 uses image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435. When drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the image data read from the character ROM 434 is temporarily stored. Here, the MPU 431 decomposes the moving image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 into several components, reads desired image data from the character ROM 434 in units of the components, and stores them in the normal video RAM 436. In this manner, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437. For example, in the change effect, the change start display part, the notice effect display part, the normal reach display part, the super reach display part, and the hit effect display part are disassembled into components such that the necessary image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. To the image controller 437.

  Then, the normal video RAM 436 has, as areas for storing image data of each component, a first priority image A area 436a, a first priority image B area 436b, a second priority image C area 436c, and a second priority image D area. 436d, a back image E area 436e, a normal image F area 436f, and a normal image G area 436g.

  The first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b store image data corresponding to images that are used relatively frequently among images in which image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 435 is not resident. Area, for example, two types of aspects of the super reach variation effect (hereinafter referred to as “super reach A” and “super reach B”) and two types of effect of the notice effect (Hereinafter referred to as “notice effect A” and “notice effect B”) is stored in one of the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b. . Hereinafter, these four types of images are referred to as first priority images. The image data corresponding to the first priority image is referred to as first priority image data.

  When the first priority image data is not stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b when the first priority image data is necessary for image drawing. , The MPU 431 newly reads the first priority image data of the first from the character ROM 434 and transfers it to the image controller 437 so as to store it in either the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. Send. At this time, the MPU 431 determines the transfer destination area so that images are alternately stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b. Once stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b, the stored first priority image data is held until the first priority image data to be stored next appears. The

  In addition, when one first priority image data is necessary for drawing an image and the image data is already stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, the MPU 431 Does not newly read the first priority image data from the character ROM 434, but uses the first priority image data already stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. Then, the image controller 437 is controlled so as to draw the image.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed. However, frequently used image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436 without being overwritten as much as possible. As described above, the MPU 431 performs control.

  Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the first priority image data that is relatively used from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. In particular, the first priority image data stored in the two storage areas of the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b are “super reach A”, “super reach B”, and “notice effect”. Since there are only four types of “A” and “notice effect B”, rewriting of each area does not occur much. Therefore, an increase in the load on the MPU 431 can be suppressed, and the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state can be reduced.

  The second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d are images that are used relatively frequently following the first priority image among images in which image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 435 is not resident. This is an area for storing corresponding image data. For example, three types of aspects other than the first priority image (hereinafter referred to as “super reach C” to “super reach E”) among the aspects of the super reach variation effect. ) And three types of aspects other than the first priority image (hereinafter referred to as “notice effect C” to “notice effect E”), and the effect modes of the continuous notice effect. The image data corresponding to “step-up type continuous notice effect” and “same effect type continuous notice effect” are stored in second priority image C area 436c and second priority image D area 436d, respectively. Stored shift or one. In the following, these eight types of images are referred to as second priority images. The image data corresponding to the second priority image is referred to as second priority image data.

  When the second priority image data is not stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d when the second priority image data is necessary for drawing the image. , The MPU 431 newly reads the second priority image data of the one from the character ROM 434 and transfers it to the image controller 437 so as to store it in either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. Send. At this time, in principle, the MPU 431 determines a transfer destination area so that image data is alternately stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d. Once stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d, the stored second priority image data is held until the second priority image data to be stored next appears. The

  However, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is always retained even when the second priority image data to be stored next appears until the image data corresponding to the number of continuous notices set by the sound lamp control device 313 is displayed. Is done. It should be noted that the two types of continuous notice effects are not displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the same time, so the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d can be simultaneously displayed. Image data to be stored is not stored. Therefore, even if image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is held in one of the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d, the other second priority image data can be rewritten in the other area. Is possible. That is, while one second priority image area holds image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect, image data to be stored next is continuously overwritten on the other second priority image area. Become.

  Further, when one second priority image data is necessary for drawing an image and is already stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the character ROM 434 is used. The first second priority image data is not newly read out from the first priority image data, and the first second priority image data already stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d is used. , Draw the image.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 436 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed. However, the second priority image data that is relatively used according to the first priority image data can be used as much as possible. The MPU 431 performs control so that it is held in the normal video RAM 436 without being overwritten.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second priority image data that is relatively used subsequent to the first priority image data from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, an increase in the load on the MPU 431 can be suppressed, and the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state can be reduced.

  The rear image E area 436e is a scroll range (from the position b ′ shown in FIG. 31) that is not resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 when the stage is set to “underwater stage” or “empty stage”. This is an area for storing image data at position d). When the MPU 431 receives the rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 extracts the rear image type included in the command. If the type is the back B corresponding to the underwater stage or the back C corresponding to the empty stage, the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is used as shown in FIG. While the rear image is being displayed while scrolling between the position a and the position b shown, image data corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position d shown in FIG. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to transfer to the rear image E area 436e.

  Once the transfer is completed, the image data stored in the back image E area 436e is held until the next back image change command is received. Thereby, the back surface corresponding to the underwater stage or the empty stage is stored in the back image area 435e of the back video area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the back image area 435e of the normal video RAM 436 until the stage is changed. Using the processed image data, the corresponding back image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while smoothly scrolling. Further, the back image E area 436e is a dedicated area for storing only the image data of the back image, and is not overwritten by other image data. Therefore, once image data of a predetermined back image is stored in the back image E area 436e, the image data of the back image data is continuously held until the back image is changed. Transfer can be minimized. Therefore, an increase in processing load in the display control device 314 can be suppressed.

  The normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g are images other than the first priority image, the second priority image, and the back image among the images in which the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 435 is not resident, that is, the normal image This is an area for storing image data corresponding to an image. When normal image data, which is data corresponding to a normal image, is necessary for drawing an image, the MPU 431 reads out the normal image data from the character ROM 434, and either the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g is read out. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to store the data. At this time, the MPU 431 determines the transfer destination area so that writing to the normal image F area 436f and writing to the normal image G area 436g are alternately performed. As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 434 is written to the other normal image area while the image data is being read for image drawing from the one normal image area for which the image data has been written. Therefore, the next image data can be reliably transferred to the normal image area by the time when the next image data is required in the drawing process.

  The drawing image data drawn by the image controller 437 is stored in a drawing image area (not shown) of the normal video RAM 436 as in the first embodiment, and the image controller 437 is stored in the third symbol display device 281. By sending the drawing image data stored in the drawing image area of the normal video RAM 436 to the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the display timing, an image corresponding to the drawing image data is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Is done.

  The ROM 432 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 431 and fixed value data, and has at least an effect execution time table storage area 432a.

  The effect execution time table storage area 432a is an area in which an effect execution time table that describes display contents to be displayed with time for one effect is stored. This effect execution time table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect. For example, if there are 32 variable effect patterns set by the display variation pattern command, the effect execution time table for the variable effect is provided. One table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the effect execution time table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect execution time table. In the effect execution time table, the content (display content) of the image to be displayed at that time is defined in correspondence with the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. For example, in the example of the performance execution time table shown in FIG. 33, it is defined that the “change start” image is displayed at the time “0000H”, that is, when the performance execution by this time table is started. It is predetermined that the “notice effect A” image is displayed after the time “0080H” (about 2.5 seconds) after the start of execution, and after time “0100H” (about 5 Seconds)), the “Normal Reach” image is set to be displayed, and the “Super Reach B” image is set to be displayed after the time “0200H” (about 10 seconds) after the performance execution is started. The “winning effect” image is set to be displayed after the time “0600H” (about 30 seconds later) after the execution of the effect is started.

  When the MPU 431 receives a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 selects an effect execution time table to be used, reads it from the effect execution time table storage area 432a, and stores it in the work RAM 433 ( (See S2403 in FIG. 51). Then, according to the time indicated by the display pointer, the display content corresponding to the time is specified from the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 (see S2515 in FIG. 52), and the display image corresponding to the display content is displayed as the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 281, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image (see S 2516 in FIG. 52). Here, the display pointer is reset simultaneously with the start of the production in the image drawing process executed every 20 milliseconds, and is incremented by 1 each time the image drawing process is executed. By specifying display contents from the effect execution time table according to the pointer, an image as defined in the effect execution time table is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In addition, the effect execution time table includes information related to an image transfer command to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in advance. For example, in the effect execution time table shown in FIG. 33, when the time “0000H”, that is, when the effect execution by this time table is started, a transfer instruction of image data related to the “notice effect A” image is defined. After a time “0100H” from the start of execution, an image data transfer command related to the “Super Reach B” image is defined, and after a time “0200” from the start of the effect execution, A transfer command is defined, and after a time “0600H” from the start of effect execution, an image data transfer command related to a “round effect” image is defined.

  When the MPU 431 specifies the display content corresponding to the time indicated by the display pointer from the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 during the image drawing process executed every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 431 is combined with the display content. If the transfer command is specified, the transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so that the image data of the image to be transferred by the transfer command is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 (FIG. 52 S2518 and FIGS. 54 to 57).

  Specifically, the MPU 431 specifies the type of image (“notification effect A”, “super reach B”, “winning effect”, “round effect”, etc.) that has been transferred by the transfer command. Judge from. The head address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to each type and the data size of the image data are stored in the program ROM corresponding to each image type, and stored in the program ROM. Based on the information, the MPU 431 determines the head address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the image type to be transferred and the data size of the image data. The MPU 431 also sets the normal video RAM 436 as the transfer destination video RAM, and further transfers the transfer destination according to the image type to be transferred and the storage status of the data in each area provided in the normal video RAM 436. Set the area. Then, the MPU 431 stores the determined start address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data to be transferred, the data size of the image data, the set transfer destination information (here, the normal video RAM 436) and the transfer. The start address of the previous area is included in the transfer command, and the transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437. Based on this transfer command, the image controller 437 reads the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 and stores the image data in the area specified by the transfer command.

  In the example of the effect execution time table shown in FIG. 33, the image data related to the “notice effect A” image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 456 by the transfer command specified for the time “0000H”, and then the time The “notice effect A” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the rule “0080H”. Similarly, the image data related to the “Super Reach B” image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 456 by the transfer command specified for the time “0100H”, and then the “Super 200 B” is specified according to the specification of the time “0200H”. The “reach B” image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In this way, in the effect execution time table, since the transfer instruction is described so that a necessary image is transferred in advance before being displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the NAND flash memory 434 a having a low reading speed is described. Even if the character ROM 434 is configured, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 434 and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Therefore, it is possible to execute each effect while smoothly shifting each image specified in the effect execution time table.

  Further, the “change start” image and the “normal reach” image can be drawn using image data corresponding to the third symbol resident in the third symbol area 435d of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, since a transfer command for these images is unnecessary, the transfer command is not described in the effect execution time table. As described above, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 depending on whether or not the effect execution time table is described.

  Also, in the effect execution time table, a series of images displayed in one variation effect is divided into elements for each image type, and an image data transfer command from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is defined for each element. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each elementized image type, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Furthermore, the image type is obtained by subdividing a series of images displayed in one variation effect and elementizing a group of images such as “super reach A” and “notice effect B”. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each element, the transfer of the image data can be controlled finely while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  In the second embodiment, the transfer process to the resident video RAM 435 is also controlled for each elementized image type such as “Back A” or “3rd design”. Finely control the transfer of image data. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The work RAM 433 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 431 executes various programs. The power-on image display flag 433a, the continuous notice count counter 433b, the continuous notice holding flag 433c, It has at least a first priority image storage flag 433d, a second priority image storage flag 433e, and a normal image storage flag 433f.

  The power-on image display flag 433a displays whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 30A to 30C on the third symbol display device 281. It is a flag indicating that. This power-on image display flag 433a displays the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 281 during the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 after the power is turned on. Therefore, the image controller 437 is turned on in accordance with an instruction to draw the main image when the power is turned on (see S2305 in FIG. 50). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 435 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281, It is set to off (see S2705 in FIG. 54B).

  The power-on image display flag 433a is referred to in the image drawing process executed every 20 milliseconds in the main process (see S2501 in FIG. 52), and the power-on image display flag 433a is on. In this case, the power-on image drawing process is executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (see S2502 in FIG. 52), and the power-on image display flag 433a is off. In response to the command received from the sound lamp control device 313, various image drawing processes are executed so that various images are displayed.

  The power-on image display flag 433a is referred to in the image transfer process that is repeatedly executed in the main process (see S2601 in FIG. 54A), and the power-on image display flag 433a is on. In this case, since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 435, a resident image transfer process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is executed, and the image display flag when the power is turned on. When 433a is off, normal image transfer processing is executed in which image data necessary for the drawing processing is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The continuous notice number counter 433b is a counter for counting the number of executions of the continuous notice effect set for the variable effect, and the initial value is set to zero. When the continuous notice setting command is received from the sound lamp control device 313, the number of continuous notices included in the continuous notice setting command (that is, the value of the continuous notice number register 423c of the sound lamp control device 313) is temporarily stored in the work RAM 433. (Refer to S2414 in FIG. 51.) The continuous notice count stored in the work RAM 433 is set to the continuous notice count 433b in accordance with the transfer setting of the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 used in the continuous notice effect. (See S2914 in FIG. 56). Further, when the variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is set is completed by the image drawing process (see FIG. 52), an update process for subtracting 1 from the value of the continuous notice number counter 433b is performed (S2522 in FIG. 52). Thereby, the number of continuous notices is counted until the continuous notice number counter 433b becomes 0 again. The continuous notice number counter 433b is referred to when a continuous notice holding flag 433c described below is set.

  The continuous notice holding flag 433c is used while the continuous notice effect is continuously executed when image data used in the continuous notice effect is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. This is a flag for performing control to limit overwriting to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d holding the image data used in the continuous notice effect. This flag is turned on when the image data used for the continuous notice effect is set to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the continuous notice image transfer setting process (see S2904 in FIG. 56). When the value of the continuous notice counter 433b, which is updated each time the fluctuating effect for which the notice effect is set, is executed, it is turned off (see S2524 in FIG. 52).

  While the continuous notice holding flag 433c is on, another image data is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d in which image data used for the continuous notice effect is stored. Control is performed so that it is not overwritten (see S3011 in FIG. 57).

  Whether the first priority image storage flag 433d is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b when the first priority image is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the normal video RAM 436. Is a flag used to determine That is, when the first priority image storage flag 433d is 0, it is determined to store the first priority image in the first priority image A area 436a. When the first priority image storage flag 433d is 1, the first priority image is stored in the first priority image B area 436b. Decide to store. Then, after the determination, the first priority image storage flag 433d is updated. That is, when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b are alternately selected as storage destinations of the first priority image data.

  Whether the second priority image storage flag 433e is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d when the second priority image is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the normal video RAM 436. Is a flag used to determine That is, if the second priority image storage flag 433e is 0, it is determined to store the second priority image in the second priority image C area 436c. If it is 1, the second priority image is stored in the second priority image D area 436d. Decide to store. After the determination, the second priority image storage flag 433e is updated. That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d are alternately selected as the storage destination of the second priority image data.

  However, when the continuous notice holding flag 433c is 1, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is held in the second priority image area different from the area indicated by the second priority image update counter 433e before the update. Since the overwriting of the area is restricted, the update process of the second priority image storage flag 433e is not executed. This prevents new image data from being overwritten in the second priority image area in which image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is held while the image data used in the continuous notice effect is held. On the other hand, the image data is repeatedly overwritten on the second priority image area that does not hold the continuous preview image.

  The normal image storage flag 433f is used for determining whether to store in the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g when a normal image is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the normal video RAM 436. . That is, when the normal image storage flag 433f is 0, it is determined to store a normal image in the normal image F area 436f, and when it is 1, it is determined to store a normal image in the normal image G area 436g. Then, after the determination, the normal image storage flag 433f is updated. That is, when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 1, the value is reset to 0. As a result, the normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g are alternately selected as the storage destination of the normal image data.

  In addition, the work RAM 433 has various flags as flags (not shown). For example, the fluctuation start flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation display should be started is received from the voice lamp control apparatus 313 as a display fluctuation pattern command instructing a variation effect set by the voice lamp control apparatus 313 or a mode of continuous notice effect. Is turned on (see S2402 in FIG. 51), and is turned off when control for starting variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 281 (see S2510 in FIG. 52).

  Further, the continuous notice execution flag indicating whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be performed in the change display to be started is included when the continuous notice effect is instructed by the display change pattern command (that is, included in the display change pattern command). (When the continuous notice execution setting is “1”) (see S2405 in FIG. 51), and when it is instructed not to execute the continuous notice effect by the display variation pattern command (that is, to the display variation pattern command). When the continuous notice execution setting included is “0”) (see S2406 in FIG. 51).

  The back image transfer start flag indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the back image should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 is instructed by the audio lamp control device 313 to change the back image. When the back image change command to be received is received from the sound lamp control device 313 and the changed back image type is other than “in the city”, that is, “underwater” or “sky” (see S2412 in FIG. 51). ), Turned off when the image data transfer process corresponding to the back image is started by the back image transfer setting process (see S3101 in FIG. 58).

  The continuous notice image transfer start flag indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is a continuous notice instructing the audio lamp control device 313 to set the continuous notice effect. It is turned on when a setting command is received from the audio lamp control device 313 (see S2416 in FIG. 51), and is turned off when image data transfer processing corresponding to continuous notice effect is started by the continuous notice image transfer setting process. (See S2901 in FIG. 56).

  Further, the image transfer start flag indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table (see FIG. 33) should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is an effect execution time table. When the drawing process is performed in accordance with (see FIG. 33), it is turned on if the image data transfer command is included in the information acquired from the effect execution time table (see S2518 in FIG. 52), and transferred by the image transfer setting process. This is turned off when image data transfer processing corresponding to the transfer target image designated by the command is started (see S3001 in FIG. 57).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 40. The process of the MPU 401 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process The main process will be described.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 310 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 899, 9, 99, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 237 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance port A start winning process associated with winning the H.264 is executed (S1105). Details of the variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 and 37, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 251a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251 and the stop switch 251b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main control device 310 instructs the launch control device 312 to launch a ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 237.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the first symbol display device 237 at the time of jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is not changing. (S1202: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter 403a (the number N of the variable display held in the main controller 310) is greater than 0 (S1203). If the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is 0 (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is. If the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is not 0 (S1203: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is decremented by 1 (S1204), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area Is shifted (S1205). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 237 is executed (S1206). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S1207). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 237 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time has elapsed. If not (S1207: No), the display of the first symbol display device 237 is updated (S1208).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 237a of the first symbol display device 237, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 237 has passed (S1207: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 237 is set (S1209). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a change start process (S1206) described later with reference to FIG. That is, in step S1205, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Depending on the value of C2, the symbol will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or the 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a promising big jackpot to be transferred, or a symbol that will be a short and big jackpot (a big jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a maximum of 15 rounds of big hit).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change big hit is reached after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the time short hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the processing of S1209, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 281 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 237. A command is set (S1210). When the sound lamp control device 313 receives this stop command, it instructs the display control device 314 to stop. The third symbol display device 281 stops the fluctuation when the fluctuation time elapses, and ends the fluctuation display of 1 on the third symbol display device 281 by receiving the stop command.

  Next, the variation start process (S1206) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1206). This variation start process (S1206) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. A lottery (win / no-go decision) for “big hit” or “off” is performed, and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of a change effect performed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win / no-go determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 200 is a normal low probability, “7,307,582” among the values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 becomes a win value, and the pachinko machine 200 When the state (mode) that can be taken is high, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596 , 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are hit values. In the processing of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these winning values, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. .

  If it is determined as a big win as a result of the processing in S1301 (S1301: Yes), the display of the big win is displayed based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. A mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2, ie, the 15R probability variable jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the maximum round number of 15 rounds or the maximum number of rounds is high after the jackpot of 2 rounds. The display mode of the first symbol display device 237 (the lighting state of the LED 237a) is set based on whether the 2R probability change jackpot that shifts to the state or the maximum hit count of 15 rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds and the transition to the low probability state Is done. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is set. Of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of “0, 1, 2, 3”, after that, the state shifts to a low probability state (hits in time and college), and in the case of “4, 5”. Thereafter, the state shifts to a high probability state (2R probability variation jackpot). In the case of “6, 7, 8, 9”, the state transitions to a high probability state (15R probability variation jackpot).

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S1303). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol in the third symbol display device 281 is determined. The At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the game is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is set to a display mode corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, An effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is set as to whether the reach is a back-and-forth outreach, a reach other than a back-and-forth out, or a complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S1305), the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 281 stops at the detachment symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S1303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing in S1303 or S1305 is completed, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in S1303 or S1305 (S1306), and is set in S1302 or S1304. A stop symbol command is set according to the stopped symbol (S1307). These variation pattern commands and stop symbol commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 403, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp controller 313 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 41). The Then, when the processing of S1307 ends, the process returns to the fluctuation processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 34), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 264. From the value hold processing indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the various random number counters held, the permission determination processing for starting the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first winning slot 264 (S1401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 264 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 264 (S1401: Yes), the value of the holding number counter 403a (the holding number N of the variable effects held in the main controller 310) is the upper limit value. It is determined whether it is less than (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 264 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 264, if the number of reserved balls N <4 is not satisfied (S1402: No) Return to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 264 (S1401: Yes) and the holding number N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the holding number counter 403a (holding number N) is incremented by one. (S1403) Further, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the step S1103 are set to the first free reserved area in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403. Store in the area (S1404).

  Then, in the processes of S1405 to S1410, permission determination for starting the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 is performed based on the values of various random number counters stored in the process of S1404. First, in the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the process of S1404 (S1405).

  Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the value of the jackpot random number (winning value) indicated by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402. Is done. Here, as described above, when the jackpot random number table is prepared, the low probability jackpot random number table and the high probability jackpot random number table are prepared, and the effect is changed by the holding ball held by the start winning this time. Which jackpot random number table is to be used is determined based on the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 200 can take.

  That is, when the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 200 is normal low probability, the low probability jackpot random number table is used, and among the values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1, “7, 307, 582” is used. "Is set as the winning value. Further, when the probability is high, the jackpot random number table for high probability is used, and “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486” 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are set as hit values. In the process of S1405, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the process of S1404 is compared with these win values, and when they match, it is determined that the hit is a big hit.

  As a result of the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1405: Yes), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S1404 is confirmed and set as a display mode for the big jackpot Three types: “15R probability variation jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds, “2R probability variation jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after jackpot of two rounds, maximum rounds The number shifts to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and it is determined whether the display mode at the jackpot is “15R probability variable jackpot” among the “short-time jackpot” that is in the short-time state for 100 fluctuations. (S1406). Here, as described above, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “6, 7, 8, 9” among the numerical values 0 to 9, it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit.

  Then, if it is determined that the 15R probability variation big hit (S1406: Yes), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “73H” (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the upper byte of the pending number command shown in FIG. 27, in which the seventh to fourth bits are configured with a fixed value “0111”, is generated. Further, in this pending number command, the continuous notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to “1”, and the game state flag after the continuous notice of the 0th bit is set to “1”.

  In this way, in the case of a big win (15R probability variation big hit), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1”, so the continuous notice effect is displayed in the third symbol display. If displayed on the device 281, a high expectation can be given to the player. In addition, since the game state flag after the continuous notice is set to “1”, the sound lamp control device 313 sets a continuous notice determination probability for determining that the third symbol display device 281 starts the continuous notice effect. As the table, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 422a1 can be selected. Further, the post-continuous notice game state flag can cause the sound lamp control device 313 to make a determination to start the continuous notice effect in consideration of the game state after the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the processing of S1405 is not a big hit (S1405: No), then, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S1404, the display mode at the time of disconnection is third. It is determined whether or not the effect displayed on the symbol display device 281 is a front / rear reach (S1408). As described above, when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is “98, 99” among the numerical values 0 to 99, it is determined that the reach is out of front and back. If it is determined that the reach is out of order (S1408: Yes), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “72H” (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the upper byte of the pending number command shown in FIG. 27, in which the seventh to fourth bits are configured with a fixed value “0111”, is generated. Further, in this pending number command, the continuous notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to “1”, and the game state flag after the continuous notice of the 0th bit is set to “0”.

  Thus, even if the result of the lottery is out, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set when the display mode is a reach that impresses the player that it is one step ahead of the jackpot (a back and forth reach). Since it is set to “1”, if the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is possible to give the player a high expectation until the fluctuation display of the back and forth reach is finished. In addition, since the game state flag after the continuous notice is set to “0”, the voice lamp control device 313 sets a continuous notice determination probability for determining that the third symbol display device 281 starts the continuous notice effect. As the table, it is possible to select the off-time continuous notice determination table 422a1.

  As a result of the process of S1406, when it is determined that the display mode at the time of the big hit is not 15R probability variation big hit (S1406: No), and as a result of the process of S1408, the display mode at the time of the off is not a front / rear reach When it is determined (S1408: No), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “70H” (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. As a result, the upper byte of the pending number command shown in FIG. 27, in which the seventh to fourth bits are configured with a fixed value “0111”, is generated. Also, in this pending number command, the continuous notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to “0”, and the game state flag after the continuous notice of the 0th bit is set to “0”. Thereby, in such a case, since the continuous notice effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 281, when the continuous notice effect is displayed, the display displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a result thereof. The aspect can always be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a back and forth reach. Therefore, the expectation given to the player when the continuous notice effect is displayed can be made higher.

  Next, in the process of S1411, the value of the hold count counter 403a (hold count N) is set as the lower byte of the hold count command, the start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the number-of-holds command shown in FIG. 27 is generated in which the seventh to fourth bits of the upper byte are configured with a fixed value of “0111” and the lower byte is configured with the number of times N is held. Note that the pending number command set by the processes of S1407 to S1411 is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 403, and is sent to the voice lamp controller 313 in the main process of the main controller 310. It is transmitted (see S1701 in FIG. 40).

  As described above, the start winning process is executed by the MPU 401 of the main control device 310, so that, in the main control device 310, as a result of the lottery for the starting winning ball, the jackpot (which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player) 15R probability variation jackpot), or in the case of a reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot (front-rear reach), a continuous notice effect is given to the audio lamp control device 313. A continuous notice permission flag permitting the continuous notice effect is included in the hold count command and transmitted. As a result, the audio lamp control device 313 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even in the case of forward / rearward reach and the like, and can execute the continuous notice effect under various conditions. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 401 in the main controller 310. Then, the MPU 401 interrupts the current control and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 403 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout / release control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 413 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 in the payout control device 311 and the MPU 411 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 401 in the main control device 310 when the main control device 310 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 313 and the payout control device 311) to be operable, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 403 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) provided in the power supply device 315 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1611 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 403, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 403 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 311 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When the payout control device 311 receives this payout initialization command, the payout control device 311 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 413, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 310 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of RAM 403.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 322. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 322 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 403 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 403 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 403 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 403, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 403 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 311 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 311 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 413.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the main process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 234 is sent to each sub-control device (peripheral control device). ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 34) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 311 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the suspension number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 37) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 312.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403.

  When updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read (S1703). Mouth) A large opening / closing process for opening or closing the 265a is executed (S1704). In other words, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 265a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 265a. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 265a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 265a is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 283 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 283 is obtained. The variation display of the second symbol is performed at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 264 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 403, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 452 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 38 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 311 and the voice lamp control device 313). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 403 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 403.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 310, the occurrence information of the power supply is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 401 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 310 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main controller 310 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 421 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1916 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 42). ) Is determined during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the sound lamp control device 313 receives a power-off command from the main control device 310 (see S1913 in FIG. 42), it executes the power-off process in S1916. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1916 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1916 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 310). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 423 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 423 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data corruption in the RAM 423. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data corruption in the RAM 423 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 423 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 423 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 423 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 423 (the memory in the RAM 423 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1916, or reset only to the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 423, and therefore the data in the RAM 423 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1916, the sound lamp control device 313. The MPU 421 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 423 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804, and initialization of the RAM 423 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the entire storage area of the RAM 423 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 423 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 423 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 423. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 423 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified by the display lamp 234. The sound output device 426 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 423, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 281. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1916 is executed (see S1915 in FIG. 42). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1916 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process of S1808. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1916 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 313 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 423 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 310.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the process has been reached, or the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 310) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 423, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 423 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1809 is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is reached via the process of S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 423 have already been cleared by the process of S1804. When only the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 423 is stored without being cleared, thereby the sound lamp control device 313. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started (S1901). If 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902 to S1910. The process proceeds to S1911 without performing the process. Whether or not 1 msec has passed in the process of S1901 is a process related to display (production) in S1902 to S1910, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec), whereas in S1911 This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation display process and the command determination process of S1912 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1912 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 310 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1911 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 234 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1908 described later are set. (S1902) After that, a power-on notification process is executed (S1903). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 314 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1904 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1904, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when the time when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 281 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. To 314. In the hold number display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 285 is performed according to the value of the hold number counter 423a.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1906). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 222 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 222 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when the frame button 222 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during a high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command is transmitted to the display control device 314. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 314 converts the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 into an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 222, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 222 during the reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the effect which can be held, or selecting one reach effect among the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 222 is not provided, the process of S1906 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing ends, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1907). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 200 by monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 428.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 428 is read from the vibration sensor 428 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 42).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 200, and a setting is made so that an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 426 (S1953). An error command for notifying the occurrence of an error is transmitted to the display control device 314 (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 42). Thereby, in the display control apparatus 31, the process which displays the error message image which alert | reports a vibration error on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1907) is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1908), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1909). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 229 to 233 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 281. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 426 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 281, and sound is output from the sound output device 426 according to the setting. Also, when an alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 43) (see S1953), an alarm sound output pattern is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 426.

  After the process of S1909, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S1908 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1909 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281.

  The process of S1911 is a process of setting a variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 281 and an effect mode of continuous notice effect, and transmitting a command instructing the set mode to the display control device 314. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 310 (S1912). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1912 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 433 (S1913). The information on occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 310. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the process of S1913 (S1913: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1915), and the power-off process is executed (S1916). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1917), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1913 (S1913: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 423 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 423 (S1914), and the RAM 423 is destroyed. If not (S1914: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1914: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 281 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 200 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 423 is destroyed, the sound output device 426 or the lamp display device 427 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the command determination process (S1912) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1912). This command determination processing (S1912) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313, and determines the command received from the main control device 310 as described above. . In addition, this process also determines the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 281 when a suspension number command is received from the main control device 310.

  In the command determination process, first, the continuous notice determination counter 423b and the continuous notice mode counter 423e used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect are updated (S2001). Specifically, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is read from the RAM 423, and 1 is added to it, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is stored in the continuous notice determination counter 423b. Further, the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is read from the RAM 423, 1 is added to it, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (15 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is stored in the continuous notice mode counter 423e.

  In the process of S2002 following the process of S2001, the first command received from the main control device 310 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 423, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 310 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S2002). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2002: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is turned on (S2003), and the variation time is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2004). Return to the main process. The variation time extracted here is stored in the RAM 423, and is used when a variation effect mode is set in a variation display process (see FIG. 47) described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S2002: No), it is then determined whether a stop symbol command has been received from the main controller 310 (S2005). If it is determined that a stop symbol command has been received (S2005: Yes), any of the stop symbol commands from the stop symbol (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, time shortage hit, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach completely off) ), And based on the extracted stop symbol and the value of each counter, a stop symbol to be actually displayed after the change effect in the third symbol display device 281 is set, and information on the set stop symbol is obtained. After the display stop symbol command is generated, the display stop symbol command is transmitted to the display control device 314 (SS2006).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop symbol command has not been received (S2005: No), it is then determined whether or not a hold count command (see FIG. 27) has been received from the main control device 310 (S2007). In the discrimination processing in S2007, if the seventh bit to the fourth bit of the upper byte of the command received from the main control device 310 are “0111” (binary number), the pending number command is received from the main control device 310. Judge. If it is determined that a hold count command has been received (S2007: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main controller 310 stored in the lower byte of the hold count command (that is, held by the main controller 310). The number of times of variation effect hold) is extracted and stored in the hold number counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 (S2008).

  Here, since the number-of-holds command is transmitted from the main control device 310 when the ball wins the first entrance 264 (start winning), every time there is a starting win, The value of the hold count counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 can be matched with the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310. Therefore, even if the value of the number-of-holds counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 deviates from the value of the number-of-holds counter 403a of the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of times the sound lamp control device 313 is held when a start prize is detected. The value of the counter 423a can be corrected to match the value of the hold count counter 403a of the main controller 310.

  After the process of S2008, a continuous notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. In the continuous notice determination process, when the main control device 310 is notified of permission of the continuous notice effect by the hold count command, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is actually started. Details of the continuous notice determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S2007 that the pending number command has not been received (S2007: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. In step S2010, the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 313, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 423, and if the command is used in the display control device 314, the command is displayed. To device 314.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the continuous notice determination process (S2009) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice determination processing (S2009). This continuous notice determination processing (S2009) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313, and as described above, the main control device 310 uses the hold count command. When the permission of the continuous notice effect is notified from, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is actually started.

  In the continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0 (S2101). Since execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set, the subsequent processes are omitted and the continuous notice determination process is terminated. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is set to be executed for at least part of the variable effects that are held, the value of the continuous notice permission flag included in the received hold number command is “1”. ", It is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being newly set as the variable effect, and it is possible to easily suppress the continuous notice effect from being set as the variable effect. In addition, after one continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to suppress another consecutive notice effect from being performed, so it is possible to suppress the appearance frequency of the continuous notice effect, It is possible to keep a high expectation for the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d is 0 as a result of the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), then, the first bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (see FIG. 27), that is, It is determined whether or not the continuous notice permission flag is 1 (S2102). If it is determined that the continuous notice permission flag is not 1 (that is, 0) (S2101: No), the main controller 310 performs a continuous notice effect. Since it is determined that there is not, the subsequent processing is omitted and the continuous notice determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous notice permission flag is 1 (S2102: Yes), since the main control device 310 determines that the continuous notice effect is permitted, the subsequent processes in and after S2103 continue. Decide whether to start the notice effect.

  First, in the processing of S2103 to S2105, the continuous notice determination used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect from the two consecutive notice determination tables 422a (the big hit time continuous notice determination table 422a1 or the out-of-run continuous notice determination table 422a2). Select the table (see FIG. 28).

  In the processing of S2103, it is determined whether or not the 0th bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (see FIG. 27), that is, whether or not the game state flag after continuous notice is 1, is 1 (S2103: Yes), Since the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect is a big hit, the big hit time continuous notice determination table 422a1 is selected as the continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect (S2104). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state flag after the continuous notice is not 1 (that is, 0) (S2103: No), the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is out, so that the continuous notice determination table to be used is used. Then, the disconnection continuous notice determination table 422a2 is selected (S2105).

  When the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S2103 to S2105, the value of the hold count counter 423a ( That is, the continuous notice determination range associated with the number of variable effects held in the main controller 310 is specified, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice determination counter 423b (S2106). Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is started by determining whether or not the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is included in the continuous notice determination range (S2107).

  As a result, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S2107: No), the process after S2108 is skipped, and the continuous notice determination process is performed. finish. That is, since the setting of the continuous notice number counter 423d is held at 0 as it is, the continuous notice effect can be set to non-execution in the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later (see S2252 in FIG. 48).

  On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice determination counter 423b is included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined to start the continuous notice effect (S2107: Yes), the value of the hold number counter 423a is set in the continuous notice number register 423c ( In addition, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is set to “1” (S2109). By setting the value of the holding number counter 423a in the continuous notice number register 423c in the process of S2108, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the changing effects held at the time of determination of the continuous notice effect. The number of executions of the continuous notice effect can be defined.

  Further, when the value of the continuous notice counter 423d is set to “1” in the process of S2109, the third symbol display device 281 displays while the value of the continuous notice counter 423d shows a value other than 0. It is possible to determine the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later so that the continuous notice effect is performed.

  The value of the continuous notice effect counter 423d is the number of executions of the continuous notice effect specified by the continuous notice number register 423c every time the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined for one variation effect. It is incremented by 1 until it becomes equal, and is reset to 0 when it is equal to the value of the continuous notice count register 423c. Therefore, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is started, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect specified by the continuous notice number register 423c, that is, all the variable effects held at the time of determination of the continuous notice effect are continuously provided. The effect mode of the continuous notice effect is determined so that the notice effect is executed.

  In the processing from S2110 to S2112 following the processing of S2109, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect determined to be started by the branch of S2107: Yes is determined. First, in the process of S2110, the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the value is in the range of 3 to 7 (S2110). When it is determined that the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is in the range of 3 to 7 (S2110: Yes), the continuous notice mode flag 423f is set to “1” (S2111). As a result, the same effect type continuous notice effect is set as the effect form of the continuous notice effect, and “bubble” after the stop of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is set in the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later. Is set to be displayed.

  If it is determined that the value of the continuous notice mode counter 423e is not in the range of 3 to 7 as a result of the process of S2110 (S2110: No), the continuous notice mode flag 423f is set to “0” (S2113). As a result, a step-up type continuous notice effect is set as the effect form of the continuous notice effect, and each time a fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is set is performed in the continuous notice setting process (see FIG. 48) described later, One of the images “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” is set to be displayed in a predetermined order.

  When the continuous notice mode flag 423f is set by the process of S2111 or S2112, a continuous notice setting command is then transmitted to the display control device 314 (S2113), and the continuous notice determination process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the continuous notice setting command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the bit configuration of the continuous notice setting command.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte are composed of a fixed value “0001” (binary number), and this command is used for the continuous notice setting command. Indicates that The display control device 314 checks the value of the seventh to fourth bits of the upper byte in the command received from the sound lamp control device 313, and receives it when the value is “0001” (binary number). It is recognized that the received command is a continuous notice setting command (see S2413 in FIG. 51).

  In the continuous notice setting command, the lower byte is composed of the number of continuous notices. When the sound lamp control device 313 transmits the continuous notice setting command to the display control device 314, the value of the continuous notice number register set by the processing of S2108 (see FIG. 45), that is, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is displayed. This applies to the 2nd to 0th bits of the lower byte of the continuous notice setting command. In addition, 0 is set in all the 7th to 3rd bits of the lower byte of the continuous notice setting command. As a result, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect (the number of continuous notices) can be represented by the entire lower byte of the continuous notice setting command. When the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 313, the display control device 314 is displayed. Can be notified of the number of consecutive notices.

  Further, in the continuous notice setting command, the 0th bit of the upper byte is composed of a continuous notice type. When the sound lamp control device 313 transmits the continuous notice setting command to the display control device 314, the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f set by the processing of S2111 or S2112 (see FIG. 45) is used as the continuous notice setting command. To the 0th bit of the upper byte of. Thereby, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the continuous notice setting command, that is, the value of the continuous notice type is “0”, the effect form of the continuous notice effect determined by the sound lamp control device 313 is a step-up type. If the value of the continuous notice type is “1”, the display control apparatus 314 can be notified that the effect form of the continuous notice effect determined by the sound lamp control device 313 is the same effect type.

  Therefore, when the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice setting command from the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 314 grasps the number of continuous notices to be executed from now on and the mode of the continuous notice effect from the continuous notice setting command. Can do. Then, image data necessary for drawing the continuous notice effect can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in advance according to the grasped continuous notice effect mode. The normal video RAM 436 performs control to hold the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect transferred to the video RAM 436 until the continuous notice effect is executed for the number of times indicated by the number of continuous notices. Can do.

  Note that the third to first bits of the upper byte of the continuous notice setting command are unused bits. In this embodiment, these bits are set to arbitrary values, and the continuous notice setting command is generated. Is done. However, each of these bits may be fixed to 0 or may be fixed to 1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the fluctuation display process (S1911) executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variation display processing (S1911). This change display process (S1911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313, and receives the change pattern command from the main control device 310 as described above. In this case, the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281 is set, and a command for instructing the set mode is transmitted to the display control device 314.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is on (S2201). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 310. End and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2202), and then a continuous notice setting process is executed (S2203).

  Now, with reference to FIG. 48, the continuous notice setting process (S2203) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice setting process (S2203) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313. This continuous notice setting process is performed when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 310 and the fluctuation effect is started, and if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is set to a value other than 0, On the other hand, this is a process of setting the effect mode of the continuous notice effect so that the continuous notice effect is performed.

  In this continuous notice setting processing, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0 (S2251). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0 (S2251: Yes), the continuous notice is set. The effect is set to unexecuted (S2252), and the process proceeds to S2263. As a result, the continuous notice effect is set to non-executed for the change effect set corresponding to the change pattern command received from main controller 310. Thereafter, the updating process of the continuous notice number counter 423d is executed (S2263), and the process returns to the fluctuation display process. Since the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is held at 0 in the update process of the continuous notice number counter 423d by the process of S2263.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is other than 0 as a result of the process of S2251 (S2251: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f is 1 (S2253). If the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f is 1 (S2253: Yes), the same notice type continuous notice effect is set as the effect form of the continuous notice effect by the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 45). . Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2254). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c ( S2254: No), “bubble” is set as the mode of continuous notice effect (continuous notice mode) (S2255), and the process proceeds to S2263. Thereby, with respect to the variation effect set corresponding to the variation pattern command received from main controller 310, “bubbles” are set to be displayed as the continuous notice effect after the variation effect is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c as a result of the processing of S2254 (S2254: Yes), the continuous notice effect is set to not executed (S2252), and S2263. Move on to processing.

  Here, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, the setting process of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is performed for the last variable effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Means that is done. The continuous notice effect is an effect of notifying the lottery result in the last variable effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In addition, the same effect type continuous notice effect is “bubble” after the change effect is stopped. Since it is the effect mode to be displayed, it is meaningless to display “bubble” after the change effect is stopped for the last change effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the present embodiment, when the continuous notice mode flag is “1”, that is, when the effect type of the continuous notice effect is set to the same effect type (S2253: Yes), the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is the continuous notice number register. If it is equal to the value of 423c (S2254: Yes), the continuous notice effect is set to not executed (S2252). It is possible to prevent “bubbles” from being displayed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice mode flag 423f is not 1 as a result of the process of S2253, that is, if it is 0 (S2253: No), the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 45) is used as the effect form of the continuous notice effect. Up-type continuous notice effect is set. Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to or not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (S2256). (S2256: Yes), “chicken group” is set as the effect mode (continuous notice mode) of the continuous notice effect (S2257), and the process proceeds to S2263.

  As described above, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect is the last variation effect for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Since the setting process is performed, the “chicken group” is set to be displayed as the continuous notice effect during the change effect for the change effect. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect is performed during the fluctuating effect and “chicken group” is displayed in the continuous notice effect, the player has a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after the fluctuating change in which the “chicken group” is displayed. Can have.

  Accordingly, even when the value of the continuous notice number register 423c is 3 or less, that is, when the number of variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set is 3 or less, the setting of the continuous notice effect is set regardless of the number of continuous notice executions. The “chicken group” can be displayed in the last variation effect. Therefore, when the number of variation effects set for the continuous notice effect is 3 or less, the symbols on the way are skipped and the chicken group is displayed suddenly, so that the player sees the suddenly displayed chicken group. In addition, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c as a result of the processing of S2256 (S2256: No), then whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 1 is determined. It is determined (S2258). If the value of the continuous notice count 423d is 1 (S2258: Yes), “egg” is set as the effect form (continuous notice form) of the continuous notice effect (S2259), and the process proceeds to S2263. Thereby, when the step-up type continuous notice effect is set with respect to the change effect set corresponding to the change pattern command received from the main control device 310, if it is the first continuous notice effect, It is set so that “egg” is displayed as a continuous notice effect while the variable effect is stopped.

  If the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not 1 (S2258: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 2 (S2260). If the value of the continuous notice count 423d is 2 (S2260: Yes), “chick” is set as the effect form (continuous notice form) of the continuous notice effect (S2261), and the process proceeds to S2263. Thereby, when the step-up type continuous notice effect is set for the change effect set corresponding to the change pattern command received from the main control device 310, if it is the second continuous notice effect, It is set so that “chick” is displayed as a continuous notice effect while the variable effect is stopped.

  Further, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not 2 (S2260: No), it can be determined that the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 3. This is because the maximum number of executions for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set is 4, which is the maximum number of times of variable effect that can be held by the main control device 310, and therefore the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 4. This is because it is always determined in the processing of S2256 that the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d is equal to the value of the continuous notice count register 423c. Therefore, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c and is neither 1 nor 2 (S2256: No, S2258: No, S2260: No), It can be determined that the value is 3. Accordingly, in this case, “chicken” is set as the effect mode (continuous notice mode) of the continuous notice effect (S2262), and the process proceeds to S2263. Thereby, when the step-up type continuous notice effect is set for the change effect set corresponding to the change pattern command received from the main control device 310, if it is the third continuous notice effect, It is set so that “chicken” is displayed as a continuous notice effect while the variable effect is stopped.

  In the process of S2263, the value of the continuous notice counter 423d is updated (S2263). In this update process, if the value of the continuous notice counter 423d before update is 0, 0 is held as it is. If the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d before the update is not 0 and not equal to the value of the continuous notice count register 423c, the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d is incremented by 1, and the value of the continuous notice count counter 423d before the update is increased. Is equal to a value other than 0 and equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is reset to zero. Thus, the mode of the continuous notice effect is set so that the continuous notice effect is executed by the number of executions defined by the continuous notice number register 423c.

  Here, as described above, the value of the continuous notice number register 423c is the value of the hold number counter 423a at the time when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, that is, held by the main controller 110 at that time. This is the number of suspensions of the variable production. Therefore, by performing the update process of the continuous notice number counter 423d as described above, the continuous notice effect is displayed for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110 when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined. A mode is set, and the continuous notice effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281. And since the determination of the continuous notice effect is made based on the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the end of the continuous notice effect. it can.

  When the update process of the continuous notice number counter 423d in S2263 is completed, the continuous notice setting process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation display process.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description of the variable display process is continued. When the continuous notice setting process by the process of S2203 is completed, the variation time in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 44) is acquired from the RAM 423 (S2204). Then, among the various effect presentation modes (variation effect modes) prepared, one variation effect mode is set from among the variation effect modes that can correspond to the variation time acquired by the process of S2204 (S2205). ).

  Thereafter, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the setting of the continuous notice effect performed by the process of S2203 and the setting of the variation effect mode performed by the process of S2205, and the generated display variation pattern command is display-controlled. The data is transmitted to the device 314 (S2206).

  Here, the details of the display variation pattern command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the bit configuration of the display variation pattern command.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the change pattern command for display is composed of the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte with a fixed value “0011” (binary number). Indicates a pattern command. The display control device 314 checks the value of the seventh to fourth bits of the upper byte in the command received from the sound lamp control device 313, and receives it when the value is “0011” (binary number). It is recognized that the received command is a display variation pattern command (see S2401 in FIG. 51).

  In the display variation pattern command, the lower byte represents “variation pattern setting”. The sound lamp control device 313 uses the lower byte of the display variation pattern command, that is, “variation pattern setting” to uniquely indicate the variation effect mode set by the processing of S2205 in the variation display processing (see FIG. 47). Insert into.

  The third bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command represents “continuous notice execution setting”. If the value is “0”, the continuous notice is provided in the variation effect set by this display variation pattern command. This indicates that the effect is not executed, and if the value is “1”, it indicates that the continuous notice effect is executed in the change effect set by the display change pattern command.

  Further, the 2nd to 0th bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command represent “continuous notice mode”. If the value is “0”, the variation effect set by this display variation pattern command is set. If the effect mode of the continuous notice effect executed at is “bubble” and the value is “1”, the effect of the continuous notice effect executed in the change effect set by this display change pattern command is shown. If the production mode is “egg” and the value is “2”, the production mode of the continuous notice production performed in the variation production set by this display variation pattern command is “chick”. If the value is “3”, it means that the effect mode of the continuous notice effect executed in the change effect set by the display change pattern command is “chicken”. And, if the value is "4", indicating that the effect is produced in the continuous announcement attraction executed in fluctuation effect set by the display variation pattern command is "chicken" group.

  The audio lamp control device 313 sets “continuous notice execution setting” to “0” when the continuous notice effect is set to non-executed by the continuous notice display process (see FIG. 48) in S2203. In this case, the “continuous notice mode” is set to an arbitrary value. In this case, the setting of “continuous notice mode” may be fixed to “0”, or may be set to another value.

  Further, when the continuous notice effect mode is set to “bubble” by the continuous notice display process of S2203 (see FIG. 48), “continuous notice execution setting” is set to “1” and “continuous notice mode” is set to “bubble”. When “0” is set and the continuous notice effect mode is set to “egg”, “continuous notice execution setting” is set to “1” and “continuous notice form” is set to “1”. When the notice effect mode is set to “chick”, “continuous notice execution setting” is set to “1”, “continuous notice effect” is set to “2”, and the continuous notice effect mode is set to “chicken”. When set, “Continuous notice execution setting” is set to “1”, “Continuous notice mode” is set to “3”, and when Continuous notice effect mode is set to “Chicken group”, Set “Notice execution setting” to “1” and “Continuous notice” Setting the like "to" 4 ".

  When receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 314 performs processing so that the third symbol display device 218 performs the variation effect, and also displays “continuous advance notice execution setting” (higher order) of the display variation pattern command. If the value of the third bit of the byte is “1”, processing is performed so that the continuous notice effect is performed in the variation effect (see S2402 to S2406 in FIG. 51). In addition, the display control device 313 displays a variation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 based on “continuous notice execution setting”, “continuous notice mode” and “variation pattern setting” indicated by the display variation pattern command. The effect execution time table corresponding to the change effect pattern is selected from the effect execution time table storage area 432a, and the selected effect execution time table is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2403 in FIG. 51). reference). Thereby, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 218, a variation effect is performed according to the variation effect pattern shown by the display variation pattern command.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description of the variable display process is continued. After the display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 314 by the processing of S2206, the value of the number-of-holds counter 423a is decremented by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (completion of setting of the variable display corresponding to the holding ball) (S2207), the fluctuation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 58. The processing of the MPU 431 is roughly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on and external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 313. In the external interrupt process, received commands are sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 433. The command buffer area is composed of a FIFO type ring buffer, and the command stored in the command buffer area by the external interrupt process is a command determination process executed in the main process (see S2408 in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51). Are read in the order in which they are stored, and processing according to each command is executed. On the other hand, the main processing executes initialization processing at power-on and main processing of the display control device 314.

  Here, the main process executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main process. This main process is started by the MPU 431 when the power is turned on, and first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2301). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 431 and clearing the memory of the work RAM 433, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 is performed.

  Next, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435 (S2302). In this transfer command, the head address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435), , The leading address of the power-on main image area 435a that is the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 434 in the resident video RAM 435 in accordance with this transfer command. The image is transferred to the main image area 435a when the power is turned on.

  When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer command is completed, the image controller 437 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 431. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 431 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer command has ended. When the image controller 437 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer command, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 437. You may make it write. Then, the MPU 431 reads information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the completion of the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer command by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 437. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 435a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a is completed based on the transfer command transmitted to the image controller 437 in the process of S2302, then the power-on variation image A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435 (S2303). In this transfer command, the head address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435), , And the start address of the power-on variation image area 435b that is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer command, the image controller stores image data corresponding to the power-on variation image area from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 435b is completed based on the transfer command transmitted to the image controller 437 in the process of S2303, the image controller 434 is then powered on. An instruction to draw the main image at the time of input is given (S2304). Specifically, the address of the main image area 435a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 435 in which the main image at the time of power-on is stored is designated, and drawing is executed using the image data stored at that address. The image controller 434 is instructed. In accordance with the drawing instruction from the MPU 431, the image controller 434 draws an image using the image data stored at the address specified by the drawing instruction. The drawing image data obtained by drawing is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 436, and the drawing image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is transmitted to the third symbol display device 281 at a predetermined timing. Accordingly, the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the processing of S2304. At this time, since the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is already stored in the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435, the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed. Even in such a case, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 immediately.

  Next, the power-on image display flag 433a is turned on (S2305). As a result, in the image transfer command processing (see S2309) described later, the transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 434 so that all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Image transfer command processing is executed (see S2602 in FIG. 54). Further, the power-on image display flag 433a is based on the transfer command to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer command process, and all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. It remains on until the transfer ends. Thereby, in the image drawing process (see S2307) to be described later, drawing is performed on the image controller 434 so as to draw the image at the time of image insertion (main image at the time of image insertion and image variation at the time of image insertion) shown in FIG. Instruction is given.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND flash memory 434a is used for the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is stored due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 281, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 314 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 314. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 281, the player enters the first entrance 264 (start winning), and the start instruction of the variation effect is controlled by the main controller 310 through the sound lamp control. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 313, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281 but the character ROM 434 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, in the present pachinko machine 200, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on. Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2305, the process of S2305 or the process of S2307 is started to execute the image drawing process (see S2307), which is a drawing process of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 every 20 milliseconds. Whether or not 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed since the first time (S2306). If 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed (S2306: Yes), the image drawing process is executed (S2307), and then the process proceeds to S2408. To do. The details of the image drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. If 20 seconds or more have not elapsed as a result of the process of S2306 (S2306: Yes), the image drawing process of S2307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2308.

  In the processing of S2308, the contents of the commands received from the voice lamp control device 313 and stored in the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 by the external interrupt processing are received in the order stored from the command buffer area (received by the voice lamp control device 313). The command determination process is executed to execute the process according to the command. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, image transfer command processing for transmitting a transfer command to the image controller 434 is executed so that the image data stored in the character ROM 434 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 (S2309). The image controller 437 reads out desired image data from the character ROM 434 and transfers it to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 according to the transfer command transmitted by the image transfer command processing. Details of the image transfer command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2309 is completed, the process returns to the process of S2306. The processes from S2306 to S22309 are repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  In step S2306, whether or not 20 milliseconds have elapsed is determined in S2307 in relation to the drawing of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and needs to be performed in a short cycle (within 20 milliseconds). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S2308 and the image transfer command process in S2309 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2308 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 313. By executing the processing of S2309 in a short cycle, the command is received by the command determination processing. Based on the command, it is possible to transfer image data from the character ROM 434 to the video RAMs 435 and 436 without delay.

  Next, a command determination process (S2308) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2308). This command determination process (S2308) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and stores the command stored in the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 by the external interrupt process. Are read in the order in which they are executed, and processing according to each command is executed.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area of the work RAM 433, the command stored first is read from the command buffer area, and the read command is the display variation pattern command. It is determined whether or not (see FIG. 49) (S2401). Here, when the value of the seventh bit to the fourth bit of the upper byte of the command read from the command buffer area is “0011”, it is determined that the command is a display variation pattern command.

  If it is a display variation pattern command (S2401: Yes), first, the variation start flag for permitting the start of the variation effect is turned on in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the command buffer area 433 of the work RAM 433. (S2402). Thereby, the MPU 431 controls the image drawing process so that the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 281 in the image drawing process (S2308) described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, based on the contents of the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49), the effect execution time table used for the current variation effect is selected from the plurality of effect execution time tables stored in the effect execution time table storage area 432a. Is selected and stored in the work RAM (S2403). Here, the information of “variation pattern setting” indicated by the lower byte of the display variation pattern command and the “continuous notice execution setting” indicated by the third bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command are used. Is executed, based on the “continuous notice mode” information indicated by the 2nd to 0th bits of the upper byte of the command, the effect pattern of the change effect to be executed based on the display change pattern command is selected. to decide. In the effect execution time table storage area 432a, an effect execution time table is prepared for each effect pattern of each variable effect, and therefore an effect execution time table corresponding to the effect pattern of the changed effect determined here is displayed. Select and store in work RAM.

  Then, the MPU 431 performs, every time a predetermined time (20 milliseconds) according to the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM, when performing the effect rendering process in the image rendering process described later with reference to FIG. Then, a drawing process of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is executed. As described above with reference to FIG. 33, the effect execution time table includes a transfer command of image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, and the MPU 431 sends an image controller to the image controller according to the transfer command. An image data transfer command is transmitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution setting indicated by the third bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is 1 (S2404), and if 1 (S2404: Yes), based on the display variation pattern command. Since the continuous notice effect is set to be executed in the variable effect to be performed, the continuous notice execution flag provided in the work RAM 433 is turned on (S2405), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. If the continuous notice execution setting is not 1, that is, 0 (S2404: No), the continuous notice effect is set not to be executed in the change effect performed based on the display variation pattern command. The continuous notice execution flag provided in the RAM 433 is turned off (S2406), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Thus, by setting the continuous notice execution flag, the MPU 431 counts the number of executions every time the continuous notice effect is executed. Then, the MPU 431 performs normal use from the character ROM 434 in advance based on reception of the continuous notice setting command while the continuous notice effect is executed for the number of continuous notices indicated by the continuous notice setting command received in advance from the audio lamp control device 313. Control is performed so that the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect transferred to the video RAM 436 is not overwritten.

  If the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not a display variation pattern command as a result of the processing in S2401, then it is determined whether the command is a display stop symbol command (S2407). . If it is a display stop symbol command (S2407: Yes), the variable execution stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is selected in the effect execution time table selected by the processing of S2403 and stored in the work RAM. Addition is made (S2408), the command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the MPU 431 draws the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol command for display as the stop symbol of the variable effect by performing the image drawing process according to the effect execution time table in which the stop symbol is added, and displays the stop symbol. It can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  If the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not a display symbol command for display as a result of the processing of S2407 (S2407: No), it is then determined whether or not the command is a rear image change command (S2409). If it is a back image change command (S2409: Yes), first, the back image type included in the back image change command is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2410). As a result, the MPU 431 changes the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Here, when the rear image type is “town” (rear A), the image data corresponding to the rear A is stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 over the entire range to be scrolled. Even if the character ROM 434 is composed of a NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed, when the back image type is changed to “city” (back A) by the back image change command, the back A is immediately set to the third pattern. The display device 281 can be scroll-displayed. Further, the image data of the back B and the back C corresponding to the back image types “underwater” and “sky” are also displayed from the initial position (position a in FIGS. 31B and 31C) displayed after the back image change. Since image data in a predetermined range including (a ′) (positions a to b in FIGS. 31B and 31C) is stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the character ROM 434 is read out. Even when the NAND flash memory 434a is slow, when the rear image type is changed to “underwater” (back B) or “sky” (back C) by the rear image change command, the rear B or The initial position of the back surface C can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and scrolled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the back image type indicated in the back image change command is “in town” (back A) (S2411). If it is “in town” (back A) (S2411: Yes), command determination processing is performed. To return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is not “in town” (back A), that is, “under the sea” (back B) or “sky” (back C) (S2411: No), the back image transfer start flag is turned on (S2412). ), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the MPU 431 uses the rear image transfer setting process described later with reference to FIG. 58, and among the image data corresponding to “underwater” (back B) or “sky” (back C), the back of the resident video RAM 435. Image data including a scroll range not stored in the image area 435c (from position b ′ to position d in FIGS. 31B and 31C) is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436. The image controller 437 is controlled as described above.

  Here, while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b in FIGS. 31B and 31C from the left to the right, the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d is represented by the character. Since the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the transfer from the ROM 434 to the back image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436 can be completed, the position from the position a to the position b is displayed while scrolling. The image data at the position d from b ′ can be transferred to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the back surface stored in the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the image, the range from the position b ′ to the position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  If the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not the rear image change command as a result of the processing of S2409 (S2409: No), it is then determined whether or not the command is a continuous notice setting command (see FIG. 46). (S2413). Here, when the value of the seventh bit to the fourth bit of the upper byte of the command read from the command buffer area is “0001”, it is determined that the command is a continuous notice setting command.

  If it is a continuous notice setting command (S2413: Yes), first, the “continuous notice number” indicated by the lower byte of the continuous notice setting command is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2414), and then the upper order of the continuous notice setting command. The “continuous notice type” (“0 (step-up type)” or “1 (same effect type)”) indicated by the 0th bit of the byte is stored in the work RAM 433 (S2415). Then, the continuous notice image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433 is set to ON (S2416), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, if the “continuous notice type” stored in the work RAM 433 is “0 (step-up type)” by the continuous notice image transfer setting process described later with reference to FIG. Necessary image data is determined from “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” according to the “number of consecutive notices” stored in the work RAM 433, and the image data is read from the character ROM 434 for the normal video RAM 436. The image controller 437 is controlled to transfer to If the “continuous notice type” is “1 (same effect type)”, the image controller 437 is controlled to transfer the image data corresponding to “bubble” from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  The continuous notice setting command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 314 when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 313, and instructs the start of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. This is transmitted before the display variation pattern command to be performed. The display control device 314 controls the image controller 437 so that the image data necessary for the continuous notice effect is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 when the continuous notice setting command is received. In the stage of performing the continuous notice effect in the variable effect, image data necessary for the continuous notice effect is stored in the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, the continuous notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 without delay.

  If the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not a continuous notice setting command as a result of the processing in S2413 (S2413: No), it is then determined whether or not the command is an error command (S2417). If the command is an error command (S2417: Yes), the error type included in the error command is stored in the work RAM 433, the error flag is turned on (S2418), the command determination process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the main process. Return.

  As a result, the MPU 431 performs an image drawing process so that an error message image corresponding to the error type stored in the work RAM 433 is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Here, the error message image is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of player fraud prevention and protection of the player against the error, but the image data corresponding to the error message image is resident. Since it is stored in the error message image area 435f of the video RAM 435, the MPU 431 reads out the image data previously resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 based on the received error command. Each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 437. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error messages from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 434, each error message is immediately received after receiving the error command. Can be displayed.

  If the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 433 is not an error command as a result of the processing in S2417 (S2417: No), then processing according to other commands is executed (S2419), and the command determination processing is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process. For example, if the read command is a stop command, the stop flag for instructing the stop of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is turned on. Thereby, MPU431 performs the process which stops the fluctuation | variation display currently performed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281. FIG.

  Next, the image drawing process (S2307) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the image drawing process (S2307). This image drawing process (S2307) is executed every 20 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is displayed. Drawing is instructed to the image controller 437.

  In this image drawing process, first, it is determined whether or not the power-on image display flag 433a is on (S2501). Since the transfer has not ended, the image drawing process at power-on is executed (S2502), the image drawing process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 53, the power-on image drawing process (S2502) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing power-on image drawing processing (S2502) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control apparatus 314. This power-on image drawing process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 281 to display a power-on main image and a power-on variation image as the power-on image.

  In the power-on image drawing process, first, it is determined whether or not the display executed on the third symbol display device 281 is changing (S2551). If not changing (S2551: No), then, In the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag for permitting the start of the variation effect is on (S2552). As a result, if the change start flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2553), the main image at power-on is drawn using the image data resident in the main image area 435a at power-on of the resident video RAM 435. The image controller is instructed (S2555), and the power-on image drawing process is terminated. Thereby, the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag is on as a result of the processing of S2552 (S2552: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2554), and the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on variation image of the resident video RAM 435 are turned on. Using the image data resident in the area 435b, the image controller is instructed to draw the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (S2555), and the power-on image drawing process is terminated.

  If the result of the processing in S2551 is changing (S2551: Yes), is the stop flag for instructing stoppage of the changing effect in the 3rd symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 turned on? It is determined whether or not (S2556). If the stop flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2556: No), the process proceeds to S2555, where the resident video RAM 435 is resident in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on variable image area 435b. Using the image data, the image controller is instructed to draw the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (S2555), and the power-on image drawing process is terminated.

  Here, the symbol of the power-on variation image to be drawn is set alternately with the “◯” symbol shown in FIG. 30B and the “X” symbol shown in FIG. The image controller is instructed to draw a power-on variation image corresponding to the set symbol. As a result, during the change, the third symbol display device 281 alternately displays the power-on change image shown in FIG. 30 (b) and the power-on change image shown in FIG. 30 (c). After the variation time specified by the display variation pattern command has elapsed, if the stop symbol is a win based on the stop symbol defined by the display stop symbol command, the “○” symbol shown in FIG. If the drawing of the fluctuation image at power-on is instructed and the stop symbol is off, the drawing of the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol shown in FIG. 30B is instructed. As a result, after the lapse of the fluctuation time, the lottery result (whether or not a big hit) performed in the main control device 310 is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the symbol “◯” and “x”.

  On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S2556 is that the stop flag is on (S2556: Yes), the stop flag is first turned off (S2557), and then the resident video RAM 435 is resident in the main image area 435a when the power is turned on. Using the image data, the image controller is instructed to draw the main image when the power is turned on (S2558), and the image drawing process when the power is turned on is terminated. Thereby, after the change effect is stopped, the power-on main image shown in FIG. 30A is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Thus, by executing the image drawing process at power-on, until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is completed, the third pattern is displayed. A power-on image is displayed on the display device 281. Thereby, while the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the hall related person can check the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The display control device 314 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 314 when the power is turned on. Can do. Also, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the third symbol display device 281 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed for the character ROM 434 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, an instruction to start the variation effect is sent from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313. In such a case, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been reliably performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after the recovery from the power failure, even when the main image is displayed for a while when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description of the image drawing process is continued. If the power-on image display flag is off by the processing of S2501 (S2501: No), it indicates that all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Next, it is determined whether or not the error flag provided in the work RAM 433 is ON (S2503). If the error flag is off (S2503: No), the process proceeds to S2506. If the error flag is on (S2503: Yes), it means that an error command has been received from the audio lamp control device 313. Therefore, first, the error type stored in the work RAM 433 is read and the error type is set. The drawing of the corresponding error message image is set (S2504), then the error flag is turned off (S2505), and the process proceeds to S2506.

  As a result, the image controller 437 is instructed to render an error message image corresponding to the error type by using the image data resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 by the processing of S2527 described later. The

  As described above, the error message image is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. When the image data is received, the error message image drawing process corresponding to the error type is executed using the image data previously resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435. The error message image can be displayed without delay from the occurrence of the error.

  In the processing of S2506, it is determined whether or not the display executed on the third symbol display device 281 is a big hit (S2506). The process proceeds to S2506.

  Thus, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw a jackpot effect image by the processing of S2527 described later. Here, the image data used for the jackpot effect is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in advance by a “hit effect transfer command” (see FIG. 33) described in the effect execution time table used for the change effect. It has come to be. Therefore, in the processing of S 2527, by instructing the image controller 437 to draw a big hit effect using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 by this “hit effect transfer command”, the character ROM 434 has a reading speed. Even if the slow NAND flash memory 434a is used, the jackpot effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2506 that the game is not a big hit (S2506: No), it is then determined whether or not the display executed on the third symbol display device 281 is changing (S2508). . If not changing (S2508: No), it is further determined whether or not the change start flag for permitting the start of the change effect is on in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433. (S2509). As a result, if the change start flag is on (S2509: Yes), the change start flag is turned off (S2510), and the display pointer provided in the work RAM 433 is reset to 0 (S2511). Thereby, the display of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 is started in accordance with the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

  Further, the value of the continuous notice execution flag set by the process of the command determination process S2405 or S2406 is stored in the continuous notice flag of the work RAM 433 (S2512), and the process proceeds to S2514. Thus, whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed in the changing effect started based on the change start flag being turned on is indicated by this continuous notice flag.

  On the other hand, if the display executed on the third symbol display device 281 is changing as a result of the processing of S2508 (S2508: Yes), the display pointer provided in the work RAM 433 is updated (S2513). The process proceeds to S2514. Thereby, according to the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51), the display of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 can be advanced.

  In the process of S2514, it is determined whether or not the stop flag for instructing the stop of the changing effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is on (S2514). If the stop flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2514: No), it is reset by the process of S2152 or updated by the process of S2513 from the effect execution time table (see FIG. 33) stored in the work RAM 433. The information described at the display pointer position is acquired (S2515). Then, from the acquired information, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is specified at the time specified by the display pointer, and drawing of the image is set (S2516). As a result, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw an image described at the display pointer position of the effect execution time table by the processing of S2527 described later, and therefore the display of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 281 is performed. The progress is made according to the production execution time table.

  Also, it is determined whether or not there is an image data transfer command in the information acquired by the processing of S2515 (S2517). If there is an image data transfer command (S2517: Yes), the image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433 is turned on, and the transfer target image type specified by the transfer command is stored in the work RAM 433. (S2518), the process proceeds to S2526. Thereby, the MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the transfer target image from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by an image transfer setting process described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the effect execution time table, a transfer instruction is described so that a necessary image is transferred in advance before being displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, it is possible to execute each effect while smoothly shifting each image specified in the effect execution time table.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2517, if there is no image data transfer command in the information acquired by the processing of S2515 (S2517: No), the processing of S2518 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2526.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2514, if the stop flag for instructing the stop of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433 is on (S2514: Yes), first, the display stop The drawing of the stop symbol set by the symbol command is set (S2519). Thereby, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the stop symbol set by the display stop symbol command by the process of S2527 described later. Since the third symbol used in the stop symbol is resident in the third symbol area 435d of the resident video RAM 435 in advance, even if the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed is used in the character ROM 434, the stop flag is set. After being turned on, the stop symbol can be drawn immediately, and the stop symbol can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the pachinko machine 200, when the display stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol is added to the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM 433 by the command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 51). If the image drawing process is performed according to the performance execution time table, the added stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 after the fluctuation time has elapsed. However, the stop symbol may not be displayed. Here, the pachinko machine 200 is set so that when the stop flag is turned on by the processing of S2519, the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is drawn, the third symbol display The stop symbol can be displayed on the device 281 without fail.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag provided in the work RAM 433 is ON (S2520). If the continuous advance notice flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2520: No), the continuous advance notice effect has been executed in the change effect that has been displayed based on the change start flag being turned on. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2526. On the other hand, if the continuous advance notice flag is on (S2520), it means that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in the change effect that starts displaying based on the change start flag being turned on. After turning off the middle flag (S2521), the value of the continuous notice counter 433b for counting the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is subtracted by 1 and updated (S2522).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated continuous notice counter 433b is 0 (S2523). Here, in the continuous notice number counter 433b, the number of continuous notices included in the continuous notice setting command received from the sound lamp control device 313 (that is, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect) is set in advance. Therefore, if the value of the updated continuous notice number counter 433b becomes 0, it means that the continuous notice effect is executed for the number of continuous notices designated by the continuous notice setting command. Therefore, if the value of the updated continuous notice counter 433b is 0 as a result of the process of S2523 (S2523: Yes), the continuous notice holding flag 433c is set to OFF (S2524), and the process proceeds to S2526. As a result, overwriting restrictions on other image data provided for the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d of the normal video RAM 436 storing the image data used for the continuous notice effect are canceled. Is done.

  On the other hand, if the value of the updated continuous notice counter 433b is not 0 as a result of the processing of S2523 (S2523: No), the processing of S2524 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2526.

  As a result of the processing in S2509, if the variation start flag for permitting the start of the variation effect is not on in the third symbol display device 281 provided in the work RAM 433, that is, if it is off (S2509: No). A predetermined image according to the situation of the pachinko machine 200, for example, a drawing of a customer waiting effect that is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by the player, for example, and proceeds to the processing of S2526 Transition.

  In the process of S2526, the drawing of the rear image is set (S2526), and the process proceeds to S2527. Here, according to the back image type stored in the work RAM 433, the back images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are “town” (back A), “underwater” (back B), “sky” ( Select from back C). Then, a predetermined display area is determined from the scroll range prepared for the selected back image so that the back image is scrolled from right to left. Then, the setting is performed so that the determined display area is drawn with respect to the selected back image.

  Further, the processing of S2409 and S2410 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 51) determines the back image command received from the sound lamp control device 313 and stores the new back image type in the work RAM 433 for the first time in S2526. When the above process is executed, the newly set initial position of the rear image (from position a to position a ′ in FIG. 31) is determined as the display area.

  Thereby, the image controller 437 is instructed by the process of S2527 described later so that the display area determined by the process of S2526 is drawn from the back image set by the back image change command. Here, when the rear image type is “town” (rear A), the image data corresponding to the rear A is stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 over the entire range to be scrolled. Even if the character ROM 434 is composed of a NAND flash memory 434a with a slow reading speed, when the back image type is changed to “city” (back A) by the back image change command, the back A is immediately set to the third pattern. The display device 281 can be scroll-displayed.

  Further, the image data of the back B and the back C corresponding to the back image types “underwater” and “sky” are also displayed from the initial position (position a in FIGS. 31B and 31C) displayed after the back image change. Image data of a predetermined range including (a ′) (positions a to b in FIGS. 31B and 31C) is stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 222 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 222 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal that the image data of the entire scrolled range (image corresponding to the position a to the position d) is resident in the resident video RAM 435 for all the back images. However, if this is done, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 435, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is determined. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow reading speed, it can be read at an arbitrary timing. When the back image type is changed to “under the sea” (back B) or “sky” (back C) by the back image change command generated in response to the player's operation of the frame button 222, the position is at least from the position a. The image in the range b is instantly obtained by using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. In the initial position of the back B and back C is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, also can be scrolled. Further, since only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed. it can.

  Further, while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b in FIGS. 31B and 31C from the left to the right, the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d is stored in the character ROM 434. Since the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the transfer to the rear image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436 can be completed, the position from the position b ′ is displayed while the range from the position a to the position b is scroll-displayed. The image data of d can be transferred to the rear image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the back surface stored in the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the image, the range from the position b ′ to the position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the process of S2527, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw each image for which the drawing has been set by the processes of S2503 to S2526 (S2527), the image drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Specifically, the address of the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in which the image data corresponding to each image for which rendering is set is stored is specified, and information on the storage destination video RAM (the resident video RAM 435). Or the normal video RAM 436) and the storage destination address thereof are instructed to the image controller 437. The image controller 437 reads out image data from a predetermined address of each video RAM according to the drawing instruction, draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the image data, and draws the drawn image. Generate data. Then, by outputting the generated drawing image data to the third symbol display device 281, the image drawn on the third symbol display device 281 is displayed.

  Next, the image transfer command process (S2309) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the image transfer command process (S2309). This image transfer command processing (S2309) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and the image data stored in the character ROM 434 is converted into the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 435. The video RAM 436 is transferred.

  In this image transfer command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the power-on image display flag 433a is on (S2601). If the power-on image display flag 433a is on (S2601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. The transfer command process is executed (S2602), the image transfer command process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, the transfer processing of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 is executed. Details of the resident image transfer command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the power-on image display flag 433a is not on as a result of the processing of S2601, that is, if it is off (S2601: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 435 is resident from the character ROM 434. The video RAM 435 is transferred. Therefore, in this case, the normal image transfer command process is executed (S2603), the image transfer command process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436. Details of the image transfer command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer command process (S2602) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer command process (S2602). This resident image transfer command process (S2602) is executed in the image transfer command process (see FIG. 54A) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435. Is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435.

  In this resident image transfer command process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer command for untransferred image data has been transmitted to the image controller 437 (S2701). If a transfer command has been transmitted (S2701: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 437 is completed based on the transfer command (S2702). In the process of S2702, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437 after transmitting an image data transfer command to the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S2702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S2702: No), the image controller continues the image transfer process, so the resident image transfer command process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S2702: Yes), the process proceeds to S2703. Also, as a result of the process of S2701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 437 (S2701: No), the process proceeds to S2703.

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred (S2703). A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to transfer the resident object image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 (S2704), and the resident image transfer command process is terminated. Here, the head address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data to be resident, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 189), and the transfer destination (the resident transferred here) A transfer command including the head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 189 in which the target image data is to be stored is transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437. The image controller 437 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer command, reads image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. The details of the image transfer process executed by the image controller 437 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S2703 (S2703: Yes), the power-on image display flag 433a is set to OFF (S2705), and the resident image transfer command processing is terminated. To do. As a result, in the image drawing process (see FIG. 52), the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the normal image instead of the power-on image. While the image is displayed, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436 by the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55) (S2601: No in FIG. 54A). And S2603).

  By executing this resident image transfer instruction process, the MPU 431 performs all the resident functions to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 except the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Then, the MPU 431 controls to keep the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 435 without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to 435 by the resident video RAM 435 is resident in the resident video RAM 435 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the display controller 314 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435 while using the image controller. At 437, image drawing processing can be performed. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 435 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main controller 310, an audio lamp controller 313, and a display controller 314. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a, various operations performed by the player at an arbitrary timing The responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be kept high.

  Next, normal image transfer command processing (S2603) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer command process (S2603). This normal image transfer command processing (S2603) is executed in the image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54A) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, and image data to be stored in the normal video RAM 436. Is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436.

  In this normal image transfer command processing, first, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer command has been transmitted to the image controller 437 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S2801), and the transfer command is transmitted. If it is determined (S2801: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 437 is completed based on the transfer command (S2802). In the process of S2802, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437 after transmitting an image data transfer command to the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S2802 that the transfer process has not ended (S2802: No), the image controller continues the image transfer process, and the normal image transfer command process ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S2802: Yes), the process proceeds to S2803. Also, as a result of the process of S2801, when the image data transfer command is not transmitted to the image controller 437 after the previous transfer process is completed (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

  In the process of S2803, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433 indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect should be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is determined. (S2803) If the continuous notice image transfer start flag is on (S2803: Yes), the continuous notice image transfer setting process is executed (S2804), and the image data used for the continuous notice effect is set as the transfer target image. Further, one area provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area, and the process proceeds to S2809. Details of the continuous notice image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S2803, if the continuous notice image transfer start flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2803: No), then the image instructed by the transfer command in the effect execution time table (see FIG. 33). It is determined whether or not an image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 433 indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to is to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is ON (S2805). If the image transfer start flag is on (S2805: Yes), the image transfer setting process is executed (S2806), and the image instructed by the transfer instruction in the effect execution time table is set as the transfer target image. In addition, one area provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area, and the process proceeds to S2809. Details of the image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the image transfer start flag is not on as a result of the processing of S2805, that is, if it is off (S2805: No), then the image data corresponding to the back image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E of the normal video RAM 436. It is determined whether or not a rear image transfer start flag indicating whether or not to transfer to the area 436e is on (S2807). If the back image transfer start flag is on (S2807: Yes), back image transfer setting processing is executed (S2808), and the back image corresponding to the back image type stored in the work RAM 433 is used as the transfer target image. Then, the rear image E area 436e is set as the designated storage area, and the process proceeds to S2809. Details of the rear image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the processing in S2807, if the back image transfer start flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2807: No), there is no image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 436, and the normal image transfer command processing is terminated. To do.

  In the process of S2809, based on the transfer target image set by each process of S2804, S2806, and S2808 and the specified storage area, the transfer target image data is transferred to the specified storage area of the normal video RAM 436. A transfer command is transmitted to the controller 437 (S2809). Specifically, the head address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the transfer target image set in each process, the data size of the image data, and transfer destination information (here, the normal video RAM 436). ) And the address of the designated storage area as the transfer destination address is generated and transferred to the image controller 437. Then, after transferring the transfer command, the normal image transfer command processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804). This continuous preview image transfer setting process (S2804) is determined in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 that the continuous preview image transfer start flag is on. The image data used for the continuous notice effect is set as the transfer target image, and one area provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area.

  In this continuous preview image transfer setting process, first, the continuous preview image transfer start flag is turned off (S2901), and then an area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e is specified and stored. The area is set (S2902). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e is 0, the second priority image C area 436c is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the second priority image D area 436d is designated as the designated storage area. Set. As a result, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is transferred to either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d specified here.

  Next, the second priority image storage flag 433e is updated (S2903). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. Thereby, if the designated storage area of the image data used in the continuous notice effect by the processing of S2902 is set in the second priority image C area 436c, the second priority image data (second priority image C area 436c or When the data stored in the second priority image D area 436d is transferred, the designated storage area is set to the second priority image D area 436d. Further, if the designated storage area for image data used in the continuous notice effect is set in the second priority image D area 436d by the processing of S2902, the designated storage area is set when the second priority image data is transferred next time. The second priority image C area 436c is set.

  Further, the continuous notice holding flag 433c is set to ON (S2904). The continuous notice holding flag 433c is kept on until the continuous notice effect is executed for the number of continuous notices designated by the continuous notice setting command (see FIG. 46), and the continuous notice effect for the number of continuous notices is executed. Then, it is set to off (see S2523 and S2524 in FIG. 52).

  While the continuous notice holding flag 433c is set to ON, the second priority image data other than the image used for the continuous notice effect is transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. In this case, the second priority image storage flag 433e is not updated. Thus, when the image data used in the continuous notice effect is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the continuous notice effect is continuously executed while the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Overwriting the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d in which the image data used for the effect is held is restricted.

  Here, by the continuous notice image transfer setting process, all images used in the continuous notice effect displayed over a plurality of variation effects are preliminarily set in the second priority image C area 436c or before the start of the actual continuous notice effect. It is transferred to the second priority image D area 436d. Then, while the continuous notice effect is continuously executed, the image data for the continuous notice effect transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d is retained without being overwritten. The display control device 314 immediately uses the image data for the continuous notice effect previously transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d before the start of the continuous notice effect. An image can be drawn. Further, since it is not necessary to transfer the image data for continuous notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d for each change display, the character ROM 434 and the bus line 440 are not required. Can be prevented from becoming busy.

  After the process of S2904, the continuous notice type stored in the work RAM 433 is confirmed by the process of S2415 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51), and it is determined whether or not it is a step-up type (S2905). If it is not the step-up type (S2905: No), since the continuous notice type is the same effect type, “bubble” is set as the transfer target image (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2914. Accordingly, the image data corresponding to the “bubble” image is transferred to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). The image data corresponding to the “bubble” image continues to be held in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d as the storage destination until the continuous notice effect is displayed for the number of times of the continuous notice. . Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately draw the “bubble” image at the time of execution of the continuous notice effect, and at the same time display the change, the “bubble” image is sent from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area. It is not necessary to transfer the data to the 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, and the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like can be prevented from being busy.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S2905 is that the continuous notice type is a step-up type (S2905: Yes), then the number of continuous notices stored in the work RAM 433 is confirmed by the process of S2414 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51). Then, it is determined whether or not the value is 4 (S2907). If the continuous notice count is 4 (S2907: Yes), “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” are set as transfer target images (S2908), and the process proceeds to S2914. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” is converted into the second priority image C area by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. The image data corresponding to these images continues to be held in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d as the storage destination until the continuous notice effect is displayed for the number of times of the continuous notice. Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately draw an image of the continuous notice effect mode indicated by the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) at the time of execution of the continuous notice effect. It is not necessary to transfer each image from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, and the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like can be prevented from being busy.

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous notices is not 4 as a result of the process of S2907 (S2907: No), then the number of continuous notices stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2414 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51) is 3. It is determined whether or not (S2909). If the number of continuous notices is 3 (S2909: Yes), “egg”, “chick”, and “chicken group” are set as images to be transferred (S2910), and the process proceeds to S2914.

  If the number of continuous notices is not 3 as a result of the process of S2909 (S2909: No), then the number of continuous notices stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2414 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51) is 2. Whether or not (S2911). If the number of continuous notices is 2 (S2911: Yes), “egg” and “chicken group” are set as transfer target images (S2912), and the process proceeds to S2914. On the other hand, if the number of continuous notices is not 2 (S2911: No), it can be determined that the number of continuous notices stored in the work RAM 433 is 1 by the process of S2414 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51). "Chicken group" is set (S2913), and the process proceeds to S2914.

  Thereby, the image data corresponding to each image used in the step-up type continuous notice effect is converted to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). Transferred to area 436d. The image data corresponding to these images continues to be held in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d as the storage destination until the continuous notice effect is displayed for the number of times of the continuous notice.

  Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately draw an image of the continuous notice effect mode indicated by the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) at the time of execution of the continuous notice effect. It is not necessary to transfer each image from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, and the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like can be prevented from being busy. In addition, when the continuous notice type is the step-up type, the images used for the continuous notice effect are limited by the number of continuous notices. In this continuous notice image transfer setting process, images required according to the number of continuous notices are displayed. Since only the image to be transferred is set, the access time of the character ROM 434 and the time that the bus line 440 is used can be shortened, and the processing load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2914, the value of the continuous notice number stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2414 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51) is set in the continuous notice number counter 433b (S2914), and the continuous notice image transfer setting process ends. To do. Thus, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is counted each time the change effect for which the display of the continuous notice effect is set is executed based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (see S2522 in FIG. 52).

  Next, the image transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the image transfer setting process (S2806). This image transfer setting process (S2806) is executed when it is determined that the image transfer start flag is on in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. Then, the image instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table (see FIG. 33) is set as the transfer target image, and one area provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area.

  In this image transfer setting process, first, the image transfer start flag is turned off (S3001), and then the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433, that is, the effect by the process of S2517 of the image drawing process (see FIG. 52). The transfer target image type designated by the transfer command of the execution time table is read from the work RAM 433, and the target image is stored in the first priority image, that is, the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. It is determined whether the image is a power image (S3002). Here, when the transfer target image type is any one of “super reach A”, “super reach B”, “notice effect A”, and “notice effect B”, the target image is the first priority image. to decide.

  If the target image is the first priority image (S3002: Yes), then whether or not the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. Is discriminated (S3003). In the present embodiment, when the designated storage area that is the storage destination of the transfer target image is set to one of the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b by the process of S3004 described later, the setting is performed. In addition, the transfer target image type stored in the designated storage area is stored in the work RAM 433 in association with the designated designated storage area. Therefore, in the process of S3003, the image types stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b are read from the work RAM 433 and compared with the transfer target image type read by the process of S3002. Thus, it is determined whether the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b.

  As a result of the processing in S3003, if the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b (S3003: Yes), the processing returns to the normal image transfer command processing and remains as it is. The normal image transfer command is terminated (see FIG. 55). Thereby, the transfer processing of the image data of the target image from the character ROM 434 to the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b is not performed. That is, when the image data of the target image is stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, the image data of the target image is duplicated from the character ROM 434 to the first priority image A area. 436a or the first priority image B area 436b can be prevented, so that it is possible to prevent the first priority image data that is relatively used from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Can do.

  In particular, the first priority image data stored in the two storage areas of the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b are “super reach A”, “super reach B”, and “notice effect”. Since there are only four types of “A” and “notice effect B”, rewriting of each area does not occur much. Therefore, an increase in the load on the MPU 431 can be suppressed, and the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state can be reduced.

  In this case, even if the image data of the target image is not transferred from the character ROM 434 to the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, the image data of the target image is already stored in the first priority image A area. 436a or the first priority image B area 436b, the display control device 314 displays the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority when the rendering of the target image is set by the effect execution time table. An image can be immediately drawn using the image data of the target image stored in the image B area 436b, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  On the other hand, if the image data of the target image is not stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b as a result of the processing in S3003 (S3003: No), then the first priority image storage flag 433d. An area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to this value is set as a designated storage area (S3004). That is, when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d is 0, the first priority image A area 436a is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the first priority image B area 436b is designated as the designated storage area. Set. Thus, the image data of the target image is transferred to either the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b specified here.

  Then, the first priority image storage flag 433d is updated (S3005). That is, when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the first priority image storage flag 433d before the update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, if the designated storage area is set to the first priority image A area 436a by the processing of S3004, the next designated storage area when the first priority image data (image data of the first priority image) is transferred next time. Is set in the first priority image B area 436b. If the designated storage area is set to the first priority image B area 436b by the processing of S3004, when the first priority image data is transferred next, the designated storage area is set to the first priority image A area 436a. Is done. Therefore, the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b can be alternately selected as the storage destination of the first priority image data.

  After the process of S3005, the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433 by the process of S2517 of the image drawing process (see FIG. 52), that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table is The image is set as a transfer target image (S3006), and the image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, the image data of the target image instructed by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is changed to the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area by the process of S2809 of the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55). 436b. Once stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b, the stored first priority image data is held until the first priority image data to be stored next appears. The Therefore, when the rendering of the target image is set by the effect execution time table, the display control device 314 displays the image of the target image stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b. An image can be immediately drawn using the data, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3002, the target image is the first priority image, that is, the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433, that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table. If the image is not to be stored in the first priority image A area 436a or the first priority image B area 436b (S3002: No), the target image is then the second priority image, that is, the second priority image C area 436c. Alternatively, it is determined whether the image should be stored in the second priority image D area 436d (S3007). Here, when the transfer target image type is any one of “Super Reach C” to “Super Reach E” and “Notice Effect C” to “Notice Effect E”, the target image is the second priority image. to decide.

  If the target image is the second priority image (S3007: Yes), then whether or not the image data of the target image is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436c. Is discriminated (S3008). In the present embodiment, similarly to the process of S3004, the designated storage area that is the storage destination of the transfer target image is set to one of the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d by the process of S3009 described later. When setting, in association with the setting, the transfer target image type stored in the designated storage area is stored in the work RAM 433 in association with the set designated storage area. Therefore, in the process of S3008, the image types stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d are read from the work RAM 433 and compared with the transfer target image type read by the process of S3002. Thus, it is determined whether the image data of the target image is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d.

  As a result of the processing in S3008, if the image data of the target image is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d (S3008: Yes), the processing returns to the normal image transfer command processing and remains as it is. The normal image transfer command is terminated (see FIG. 55). As a result, as in the case where the target image is the first priority image, the transfer processing of the image data of the target image from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d is not performed. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second priority image data that is relatively used subsequent to the first priority image data from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, an increase in the load on the MPU 431 can be suppressed, and the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state can be reduced.

  Further, even if the image data of the target image is not transferred from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the image data of the target image is already stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image C area 436c. Since it is stored in the second priority image D area 436d, when the rendering of the target image is set by the effect execution time table, the display control device 314 displays the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area. An image can be immediately drawn using the image data of the target image stored in 436d, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3008, if the image data of the target image is not stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d (S3008: No), then the second priority image storage flag 433e. An area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to this value is set as the designated storage area (S3009). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e is 0, the second priority image C area 436c is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the second priority image D area 436d is designated as the designated storage area. Set. As a result, the image data of the target image is transferred to either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d specified here.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice holding flag 433c is on (S3010). If it is not on but off (S3010: Yes), the second priority image storage flag 433e is updated (S3011). That is, when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the second priority image storage flag 433e before update is 1, the value is set to 0. Reset to. As a result, if the designated storage area is set to the second priority image C area 436c by the processing of S3009, when the second priority image data (image data of the second priority image) is transferred next, the designated storage area is transferred. Is set in the second priority image D area 436d. If the designated storage area is set to the second priority image D area 436d by the processing of S3009, when the second priority image data is transferred next, the designated storage area is set to the second priority image C area 436c. Is done. Therefore, when the second priority image data is not stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the second priority image data is stored as the second priority image data. The A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b can be selected alternately.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3010, if the continuous notice holding flag 433c is on (S3010: Yes), the processing of S3011 is skipped. Accordingly, the second priority image storage flag 433e is not updated. Therefore, when the image data used for the continuous notice effect being executed is stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the second priority image storage flag 433e is continuously updated. Until the image data corresponding to the notice effect is displayed for the number of consecutive notices set by the sound lamp control device 313, the second priority on the side where the image data used in the notice effect is not stored. The image data to be stored next is continuously overwritten on the image area. Therefore, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is always held in the second priority image area while the continuous notice effect is being executed.

  Here, as described above, all the images used in the continuous notice effect displayed over the plurality of variable effects by the continuous notice image transfer setting process are preliminarily set to the second priority image before the start of the actual continuous notice effect. Since the data is transferred to the C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is continuously held in the second priority image area while the continuous notice effect is executed. Thus, it is not necessary to transfer the image data for continuous notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d for each variation display. Therefore, since the number of times of transferring the image data for the continuous notice effect can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like from being busy.

  If it is determined by the process of S3010 that the continuous notice holding flag 432c is on (S3010: Yes), or after the process of S3011, the process proceeds to S3006 and is stored in the work RAM 433 as described above. The transfer target image type, that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table is set as the transfer target image (S3006), and the image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, the image data of the target image instructed by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is changed to the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area by the process of S2809 of the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55). 436d. Once stored in the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d, the stored second priority image data is held until the second priority image data to be stored next appears. The Therefore, when the rendering of the target image is set by the effect execution time table, the display control device 314 displays the image of the target image stored in the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d. An image can be immediately drawn using the data, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  If the target image is not the second priority image as a result of the processing in S3007 (S3007: No), then the area provided in the normal video RAM 436 corresponding to the value of the normal image storage flag 433f is set as the designated storage area. It sets (S3012). That is, when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f is 0, the normal image F area 436f is set as the designated storage area, and when the value is 1, the normal image G area 436g is set as the designated storage area. As a result, the image data of the target image is transferred to either the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g specified here.

  Then, the normal image storage flag 433f is updated (S3013). That is, when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 0, the value is updated to 1, and when the value of the normal image storage flag 433f before the update is 1, the value is reset to 0. As a result, if the designated storage area is set to the normal image F area 436f by the processing of S3012, the designated storage area will be the normal image G area 436g when normal image data (normal image image data) is transferred next time. Set to If the designated storage area is set to the normal image G area 436g by the processing of S3012, the designated storage area is set to the normal image F area 436f when the normal image data is transferred next time.

  Therefore, the normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g can be alternately selected as the storage destination of the normal image data. As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 434 is written to the other normal image area while the image data is being read for image drawing from the one normal image area for which the image data has been written. Therefore, the next image data can be reliably transferred to the normal image area by the time when the next image data is required in the drawing process.

  After the process of S3013, the process proceeds to the process of S3006, and as described above, the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433, that is, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table is transferred. The image is set as an image (S3006), and the image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, the image data of the target image instructed by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is transferred to the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g by the process of S2809 of the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55). The Therefore, when the rendering of the target image is set by the effect execution time table, the display control device 314 immediately uses the image data of the target image stored in the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g. An image can be drawn on the screen, and the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  Next, the back image transfer setting process (S2808) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the rear image transfer setting process (S2808). This rear image transfer setting process (S2808) is performed when it is determined in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 that the rear image transfer start flag is on. The back image corresponding to the back image type to be transferred is set as the transfer target image, and the back image E area 436e is set as the designated storage area.

  When the rear image type specified in the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 313 is “underwater” (back B) or “sky” (back C), this rear image transfer setting process is performed. Executed. On the other hand, when the rear image type specified in the rear image change command is “town” (rear A), the image data corresponding to the entire scroll range of the rear image is resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, the rear image transfer start flag is not turned on (see S2411 in FIG. 51), and therefore this rear image transfer setting process is not executed.

  In this rear image transfer setting process, first, the rear image transfer start flag is turned off (S3101), and then the rear image E area 436e provided in the normal video RAM 436 is set as the designated storage area (S3102). Then, the back image type included in the back image change command stored in the work RAM by the process of S2410 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51) is read, and the back image indicated by the back image type is “underwater”. Is determined (S3103). As a result, if the back image is “underwater” (S3103: Yes), “underwater” is set as the transfer target image (S3104), the back image transfer setting process is terminated, and the back image indicated by the back image type is displayed. Is not “under the sea” (S3103: No), the back image is “sky”, so “sky” is set as the transfer target image (S3105), and the back image transfer setting process is terminated.

  Accordingly, the back image “underwater” (back B) or the back image “sky” (back C) set as the transfer target image by the processing of S3104 or S3105 by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). ), The image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d shown in FIG. 31B or 31C is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436. Then, when the rear image transfer command is received and the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is used, the range from the position a to the position b shown in FIG. 31 (b) or (c). Since the range from the position a to the position c is set so that the image data from the position b ′ to the position d is transferred to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 while scrolling is performed. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the RAM 435, the back image transferred to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 436 during the scroll is displayed. Using the corresponding image data, the range from position b ′ to position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Can.

  Next, the image transfer process executed by the image controller 437 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this image transfer processing. This image transfer process is repeatedly executed in the main process executed by the image controller 437. When an image data transfer command is received by the MPU 431, the resident video RAM 435 or the resident video RAM 435 or the character ROM 434 according to the received transfer command This is a process of transferring image data to the normal video RAM 436.

  In this image transfer process, first, it is determined whether or not the transfer process of image data from the character ROM 434 to the buffer RAM 437a provided in the image controller 437, which is started by the process of S3206 described later, is being executed (S3201). If the transfer process is not being executed (S3201: No), it is then determined whether an image data transfer command has been received from the MPU 431 (S3202).

  If an image data transfer command has not been received (S3202: No), the image transfer process ends. On the other hand, if an image data transfer command has been received (S3202: Yes), then the leading address of the transfer source character ROM 434 storing the image data to be transferred is extracted from the received transfer command, and the image controller The data is stored in the transfer source pointer provided in the RAM in 437 (S3203). Further, information on the transfer destination (whether it is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436) is extracted from the received transfer command, and the extracted information is transferred to the RAM provided in the RAM in the image controller 437. Store in the destination flag (S3204). Further, the address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) is extracted from the received transfer command, and stored in the transfer destination pointer provided in the RAM in the image controller 437 (S3205).

  Then, from the address indicated by the transfer source pointer, one block of data in the NAND flash memory 434a is read from the character ROM 434 and transferred to the buffer RAM 437a. The (Direct Memory Access) circuit is instructed (S3206), and the image transfer process is terminated. As a result, the transfer processing of the image data from the character ROM 434 to the buffer RAM 437a is performed by the DMA circuit. Therefore, while the transfer processing is being executed, the image controller 437 executes another processing such as the image drawing processing. Can do.

  On the other hand, if image data transfer processing from the character ROM 434 to the buffer RAM 437a is being executed as a result of the processing in S3201 (S3201: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the transfer processing to the buffer RAM 437a has been completed. (S3207). If the transfer process to the buffer RAM 437a is not completed (S3207: No), the image transfer process is terminated, and another process is executed until the transfer process to the buffer RAM 437a is completed. On the other hand, if the transfer process is completed (S3207: Yes), then the video RAM (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) indicated by the transfer destination flag stored by the process of S3204 is stored in the image controller 437. It is determined whether or not the image is being used by image drawing processing or drawing image data transfer processing to the third symbol display device 281 (S3208).

  If the video RAM indicated by the transfer destination flag is in use (S3208: Yes), the image transfer process is terminated, and another process is executed until the video RAM becomes unused. If the video RAM indicated by the transfer destination flag is not in use (S3208: No), the image data transferred to the buffer RAM 437a is stored in the video RAM indicated by the transfer destination flag stored in S3204 in S3205. Stored in order from the address indicated by the transfer destination pointer stored by the processing (S3209).

  When the processing of S3209 is completed, the amount of image data transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 via the buffer RAM 437a and the transfer command are included in the transfer command. The data size of the transfer target image data is compared, and it is determined whether or not all the transfer target data has been transferred (S3210).

  If all the transfer target image data has not been transferred, that is, if there is untransferred image data (S3210: No), an update process is performed to advance the transfer source pointer by one block (S3211). An update process for advancing the transfer destination pointer by one block is performed (S3212), and the process proceeds to S3206. In the process of S3206, as described above, the data for one block of the NAND flash memory 434a is read from the character ROM 434 from the address indicated by the updated transfer source pointer and transferred to the buffer RAM 437a. Then, the start of the transfer is instructed to the DMA circuit provided in the image controller 437, and this image transfer process is ended.

  Thereafter, in the image transfer process executed again in the main process, when the completion of the transfer process of the image data to the buffer RAM 437a started in the process of S3206 is detected (S3207: Yes), the transfer destination flag indicates When the video RAM is not used, the image data transferred to the buffer RAM 437a is sequentially stored from the address indicated by the updated transfer destination pointer of the video RAM.

  On the other hand, if all the transfer target data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S3210 (S3210: Yes), a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431 (S3213), and the image transfer processing is ended. The MPU 431 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer command has ended in the image controller 437 by receiving this transfer end signal. Therefore, the MPU 431 can notify the image controller 437 of another image data transfer command.

  As described above, image data transfer in the image controller 437 is performed by reading out image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 block by block and sequentially writing it to the transfer destination video RAM. This is done by repeatedly executing until completion.

  Here, the image data read from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a. Thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in a short time. can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being in time.

  The image controller 437 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. A period that is not used for the display process on the device 281 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 of the second embodiment, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. After the processing is completed, the image controller 437 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device can be displayed. In particular, the image data of the image to be displayed frequently or the image data of the image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 310, the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 314, etc. Since it is resident in the RAM 435, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed by the player at an arbitrary timing until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200, since the NAND flash memory 434a is used for the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 due to the slow reading speed. Although it takes a lot of time to be transferred to the resident video RAM 435, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the main image at the time of power-on. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player or the hall related person is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The main image can be confirmed when the power is turned on.

  Therefore, the display control device 310 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 over time while displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 281. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 435. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third display device 218, so that the operation of the pachinko machine 200 is started without any problem by power-on. You can check immediately. Therefore, the use of the NAND flash memory 434a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 434 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  Next, a pachinko machine 200 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment described above, in the display control device 314, the image controller 437 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435. In addition, as an area for temporarily storing the image data read from the character ROM 434, the normal video RAM 436 has a first priority image A area 436a, a first priority image B area 436b, a second priority image C area 436c, At least a second priority image D area 436d, a normal image F area 436f, and a normal image G area 436g are provided. Under the control of the MPU 431, the first priority image data corresponding to the first priority image used relatively frequently is given the first priority. Image A area 436a and first priority image B area 436 Any of the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image D area 436d is stored as any one of the second priority image data corresponding to the second priority image that is used relatively frequently following the first priority image. A case has been described in which image data corresponding to other images is stored in either the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g (see FIG. 29).

  In contrast, the pachinko machine 200 according to the third embodiment is provided with a normal video RAM 536 in the display control device 314 instead of the normal video RAM 436 according to the second embodiment, and the normal video RAM 536 includes image A areas 536a to 536a. When at least an image D area 536d is provided and the image controller 437 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435, the image A area 536a to the image D area In 536d, the image data is stored in one area predetermined according to the image type of the image (see FIG. 60).

  In the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment described above, the case where the image data used for the continuous notice effect is stored in either the second priority image C area 436c or the second priority image D area 436d has been described. In the pachinko machine 200 according to the third embodiment, a dedicated continuous notice image F area 536f for storing only image data used for the continuous notice effect is provided in the normal video RAM 536, and the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In this case, the image data used for the effect notice effect is stored in this dedicated continuous notice image F area 536f (see FIG. 60).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200 in the second embodiment described above, the image type of the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is stored in the work RAM 433, and the MPU 431 is resident in the resident video RAM 435 with respect to the image controller 437. In the case of transferring non-contained image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, it is determined whether the image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 436 based on the image type stored in the work RAM 433. explained.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 200 according to the third embodiment is provided with a work RAM 533 instead of the work RAM 433, and for all image types that are not resident in the resident video RAM 435 excluding the back image in the work RAM 533. An image storage discrimination table 533d is provided for each image type indicating whether or not image data corresponding to the image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536, and the MPU 431 provides the image controller 437 with the resident video RAM 435. When the image data not resident in the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 433 based on the storage state corresponding to each image type indicated by the image storage determination table 533d. Stored To determine whether the dolphin not.

  The structure and electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 according to the third embodiment are the same as those of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment except for the electrical configuration of the display control device 341 (FIGS. 20 to 26, FIG. 28, see FIGS. 30 to 33). In addition, various processes executed by each MPU in the main control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the sound lamp control device 313 and commands transmitted and received between the devices 310 to 314 are also used in the pachinko machine 200 in the second embodiment. (See FIGS. 27 and 34 to 49). Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko machine 200 in the third embodiment, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 60 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200 according to the third embodiment. The display control device 314 in the third embodiment is different from the display control device 314 in the second embodiment in that a normal video RAM 536 is provided instead of the normal video RAM 436 and a work RAM 433 is used instead. A RAM 533 is provided. Further, among the processes executed by the MPU 431 by various programs stored in the ROM 432, the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804) and the image transfer setting process (S2806) are different from the second embodiment.

  On the other hand, the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 in the third embodiment, the effect execution timetable storage area 432a provided in the ROM 432, the character ROM 434 (NAND flash memory 434a, arbitration circuit 434b), and the resident video RAM 435 (main at power-on) Image area 435a, power-on variation image area 435b, back image area 435c, third symbol area 435d, character symbol area 435e, error message image area 435f), image controller 437 and buffer RAM 437a provided in the image controller 437, Both the input port 438 and the output port 439 are the same as those in the second embodiment (see FIG. 29), and the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 and the command determination are performed. Processing (see FIG. 51), image drawing processing (see FIG. 52), power-on image drawing processing (see FIG. 53), image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54A), resident image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54). b)), normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55), back image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 58), and image transfer processing (see FIG. 59) executed by the image controller 437 are all second. It is the same as that of the embodiment.

  Similar to the normal video RAM 190 of the first embodiment and the normal video RAM 436 of the second embodiment, the normal video RAM 536 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and the image controller 437 is used as a resident video RAM 435. When drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using image data not resident in the image data, the image data read from the character ROM 434 in advance is temporarily stored before the image data is used. The memory is configured by a 1-port DRAM.

  Similar to the second embodiment, the MPU 431 displays a moving image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with several constituent elements (in a variation effect, a change start display part, a notice effect display part, a normal reach display part, and a super reach display). And the transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 437 so that desired image data is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the normal video RAM 536 for each component. To do. As a result, the image data of the component specified by the transfer command is read from the character ROM 434 by the image controller 537, temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, and then transferred from the buffer RAM 473a to a predetermined area of the normal video RAM 536. And stored.

  Then, the MPU 431 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 434 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 536 to draw an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 to the image controller 437. When instructed, the image controller 437 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 from the image data resident in the resident video RAM 434 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 536. The drawing image data obtained by drawing this image is stored in a drawing image area (not shown) of the normal video RAM 536 as in the first embodiment, and the image controller 437 displays on the third symbol display device 281. By sending the drawing image data stored in the drawing image area of the normal video RAM 436 to the third symbol display device 281 in accordance with the timing, an image corresponding to the drawing image data is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The

  The normal video RAM 536 is different from the normal video RAM 436 in the second embodiment in that the image A area 536a, the image B area 536b, the image C area 536c, and the image D are stored as image data of each component. An area 536d, a back image E area 536e, and a continuous notice image F area 536f are a first priority image A area 436a, a first priority image B area 436b, a second priority image C area 436c, a second priority image D area 436d, and a rear surface. The image E area 436e, the normal image F area 436f, and the normal image G area 436g are provided at least in place.

  The image A area 536a to the image D area 536d are areas for storing image data corresponding to images excluding the back image and the continuous notice effect image among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435. The image types of the image data stored in the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d are determined in advance for each of the areas 536a to 536d. For example, in the image A area 536a, an effect mode (“ Image data corresponding to “Super Reach A”, “Super Reach B”,..., “Super Reach E”) and other specific image type image data are stored in the image B area 536c. Image data corresponding to the effect modes (“notice effect A”, “notice effect B”,..., “Notice effect E”) and image data of other specific image types are stored, and the image C area 536c. , Image data corresponding to image data of a specific image type, such as a hit effect or a miss effect, is stored, and the image D area 536d corresponds to a round effect. Image data and other image data of a specific image type is stored.

  When image data corresponding to one image type is necessary for drawing an image, the image data is not image data resident in the resident video RAM 435, but even image data corresponding to the back image is continuously noticed. If the image data corresponding to the first image type is not stored in the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d, the MPU 431 reads the first image type from the character ROM 434. The image data corresponding to the image type is newly read out, and the image data corresponding to the one image type is stored in any one of the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d determined in advance according to the one image type. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to be stored.

  For example, if the one image type is an effect mode of the super reach variation effect, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to store the image data corresponding to the image A area 536a, and the one image type is the notice effect. If it is an effect mode, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to store image data corresponding to the image B area 536b, and if one image type is a win effect or an off-effect, it corresponds to the image C area 536c. If the transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to store the image data to be stored and one image type is a round effect, the transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 437 so as to store the image data corresponding to the image A area 536a. Send.

  As described above, by setting a predetermined area as an area in which the corresponding image data is to be stored according to the image type, the setting process for the area can be easily performed. In addition, when drawing processing is performed using image data of one image type, it is only necessary to read image data from an area predetermined for the one image type. It is not necessary to memorize in which area the image data corresponding to is stored. Therefore, an increase in data to be temporarily stored in the work RAM 536 can be suppressed, and the data reading process can be reduced, so that an increase in the processing load of the MPU 431 can be further suppressed.

  Once the image data is stored in a predetermined area of the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d, the image data stored in that area until another image data to be stored next appears in the predetermined area. Is retained. Therefore, when the image data to be stored in the image A areas 536a to 536d is necessary for drawing the image, the MPU 431 has already stored the image data in the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d. The MPU 431 can control the image controller 437 to draw an image using the image data already stored in the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 436 is used in such a manner that data is overwritten and updated as needed. However, the normal video RAM 436 is used when image drawing is performed using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435. However, if the image data is already stored in the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d of the normal video RAM 536, the image data is prevented from being duplicated and transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. can do. Therefore, an increase in the load on the MPU 431 can be suppressed, and the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state can be reduced.

  The back image E area 536e is the same as the back image E area 436e in the second embodiment described above, and is image data for a back image that is not resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, that is, a stage. Is set to “Underwater Stage” or “Sky Stage”, among the image data of “Back B” or “Back C” corresponding to the stage, the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 This is an area dedicated to image data of the back image for storing image data in a scroll range (position b ′ to position d shown in FIG. 31) that is not resident in the area.

  The MPU 431 uses the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data stored in the back image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 to scroll the back image and display the third pattern. The image controller 437 is controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 281.

  As described above, the image data of the back image corresponding to the underwater stage or the sky stage is kept in the back image E area 536e at least until the stage is changed, so that the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is retained. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while smoothly scrolling the corresponding back image using the image data resident in the image data and the image data stored in the back image area 435e of the normal video RAM 436.

  The continuous notice image F area 536f is dedicated to image data of a continuous notice effect that stores image data corresponding to each aspect of the continuous notice effect (“step-up type continuous notice effect” and “same effect type continuous notice effect”). It is an area. When the MPU 431 receives the continuous notice setting command (see FIG. 46) transmitted when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 313, it is indicated by the 0th bit of the upper byte of the continuous notice setting command. If the image data corresponding to the continuous notice type (“step-up type continuous notice effect” or “same effect type continuous notice effect”) is not stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, the continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice type is displayed. A transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437 so that the image data of all images for the notice effect is read from the character ROM 434 and stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f of the normal video RAM 536.

  Once the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect to be stored next appears, that is, a new continuous notice setting command. Until the stored image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is retained. By controlling the image controller 437, the MPU 431 uses the image data stored in the continuous preview image F area 536f to generate one continuous preview effect design for the third design in accordance with one variation display. While displaying on the display device 281, the continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the number of continuous notices set by the continuous notice setting command.

  Here, since the continuous notice image F area 536f is a dedicated area for storing only image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is not overwritten by other image data. Thus, when the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice setting command, the mode indicated by the continuous notice setting command (either “step-up type continuous notice effect” or “same effect type continuous notice effect”). There is a high possibility that image data corresponding to is continuously held in the continuous notice image F area 536f. Therefore, if image data corresponding to the mode indicated in the continuous notice setting command is stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data is not re-transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. Since the image of the continuous notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is normally used from the character ROM 434. The number of transfers to the video RAM 536 can be suppressed, and an increase in processing load on the display control device 314 can be suppressed.

  Similar to the work RAM 433 of the second embodiment, the work RAM 533 is a memory that is connected to the bus line 440 and temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 431. The work RAM 533 includes at least a power-on image display flag 533a, a continuous notice count counter 533b, a continuous notice holding flag 533c, and an image storage determination table 533d.

  Among these, the power-on image display flag 533a and the continuous notice number counter 533b are the same as the power-on image display flag 433a and the continuous notice number counter 433b in the second embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  The continuous notice holding flag 533c is used when the image data used in the continuous notice effect is stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f while the continuous notice effect is continuously executed in accordance with the variable display. This is a flag for performing control to limit overwriting to the continuous notice image F area 536f in which image data used for production is held. This flag is turned on when the transfer setting from the character ROM 434 of the image data used for the continuous notice effect to the continuous notice image F area 536f of the normal video RAM 536 is performed by the continuous notice image transfer setting process (FIG. 62). Thereafter, the value is turned off when the value of the continuous notice counter 433b, which is updated every time the fluctuating effect for which the continuous notice effect is set, is 0 (see S2524 in FIG. 52).

  That is, the continuous notice holding flag 533c indicates that the display of the continuous notice effect is not completed for the number of continuous notices indicated by the continuous notice setting command received from the sound lamp control device 313 while it is on. . Therefore, even if the MPU 431 receives a new continuous notice setting command while the continuous notice holding flag 533c is on, the MPU 431 displays an image of the continuous notice type indicated in the new continuous notice setting command in the continuous notice image F area 536f. By controlling not to transfer the data, the image data stored in the continuous preview image F area 536f is held (see S4001 in FIG. 62).

  Thereby, once the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect used across a plurality of variable displays is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f in accordance with the continuous notice setting command, thereafter, Using the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect transferred to the continuous notice image F area 536f, the third symbol display device 281 can display the display of the continuous notice effect for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, the number of transfers of image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536 can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, and an increase in processing load on the display control device 314 can be further suppressed.

  When a continuous notice setting command is newly received from the sound lamp control device 313 while the continuous notice holding flag 533c is on, the image data transfer process of the continuous notice effect indicated by the newly received continuous notice setting command is performed. Is performed after the continuous notice holding flag 533c is turned off.

  The image storage determination table 533d stores, for all image types that are not resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the back image, whether or not image data corresponding to the image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536. Is a table showing the image type for each image type. Here, the details of the image storage discrimination table 533d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the image storage discrimination table 533d.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the image storage determination table 533d is associated with the image type 533d1 and indicates whether or not the image data of the image type indicated by the image type 533d1 is stored in the normal video RAM 536. 533d2 is set.

  The image type 533d1 indicates all image types that can be stored in the normal video RAM other than the back image. That is, the image type 533d1 includes all the image types “super reach A”, “super reach B”,..., “Super reach E” corresponding to each effect mode prepared as super reach, as a notice effect. All image types corresponding to each of the produced effects “notice effect A”, “notice effect B”,..., “Notice effect E”, and image type “win effect” corresponding to the hit effect, The image type corresponding to the effect “winning effect”, the image type corresponding to the outage effect “outage effect”, the “round effect” corresponding to the round effect, and the image type “step up” corresponding to the step-up type continuous notice effect "Image type" and image type "same effect type" corresponding to the same effect type continuous notice effect, and other image types that can be stored in the normal video RAM are also image type 5 It is shown in 3d1.

  In the storage state 533d2, “1” is set if the corresponding image type is stored in the normal video RAM in a form associated with each image type indicated by the image type 533d1, and the normal video RAM is set. If it is not stored in "0", "0" is set.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61, “1” is set in the storage state 533d2 corresponding to “super reach A”, “notice effect B”, “winning effect”, “round effect”, and “same type” of the image type 533d1. Image data corresponding to Super Reach A, image data corresponding to notice effect B, image data corresponding to winning effect, image data corresponding to round effect, and image data corresponding to the same effect type continuous notice effect. In the normal video RAM 534, it is stored in any one of the image A area 534a to the image D area 534d and the continuous notice image F area 536f.

  On the other hand, “0” is stored in the storage state 533d2 corresponding to “super reach B”, “super reach E”, “notice effect A”, “continuous notice E”, “out effect” and “step-up type” of the image type 533d1. Is set, image data corresponding to super reach B and super reach E, image data corresponding to notice effect B and notice effect E, image data corresponding to off effect, and image corresponding to step-up type continuous notice effect The data indicates that the data is not stored in any of the image A area 534a to the image D area 534d and the continuous notice image F area 536f of the normal video RAM 534.

  The MPU 431 transfers image data to be transmitted to the image controller 437 when the transfer instruction of image data corresponding to a predetermined image type (transfer target image type) is included in the effect execution time table (see FIG. 33). In an image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63) for setting an image to be transferred in order to generate a command (see FIG. 63), the image storage discrimination table 533d is referred to (see S4101 in FIG. 63). Then, the storage state 533d2 corresponding to the transfer target image type (target image) indicated by the transfer instruction in the effect execution time table is read from the image storage determination table 533d, the storage state 533d2 is “0”, and the target image is If not stored in the normal video RAM 536, processing related to image transfer is performed, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437, and the image data of the target image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. If the storage state 533d2 is “1” and the target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the processing related to image transfer is stopped (see S4102 in FIG. 63).

  On the other hand, when the MPU 431 receives a continuous notice setting command (see FIG. 46) from the sound lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 performs transfer to generate an image data transfer command for continuous notice effect to be transmitted to the image controller 437. Also in the continuous notice image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) for setting the continuous notice type indicated in the continuous notice setting command as the target image (see FIG. 62), the image storage discrimination table 533d is also referred to (see S4004 in FIG. 62). Then, the storage state 533d2 corresponding to the continuous notice type (target image) indicated in the continuous notice setting command is read from the image storage determination table 533d, the storage state 533d2 is “0”, and the target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536. If not stored, processing relating to image transfer is performed, a transfer command is transmitted to the image controller 437, and image data of the target image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. Also, if the storage state 533d2 is “1” and the target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the processing related to image transfer is stopped.

  As described above, the MPU 431 can easily determine whether or not the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 536 by reading the storage state of the image data corresponding to the image type from the image storage determination table 533d. it can. Therefore, the processing load related to the determination can be reduced. Further, the MPU 431 determines the storage state of the image data corresponding to the image type from the image storage determination table 533d before causing the image controller 437 to transfer the image data of the desired image type to the normal video RAM 536. Thus, if the image data of the target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 536, it is possible to prevent the image data from being duplicated from the character ROM 434 and transferred to the normal video RAM 536.

  The image storage discrimination table 533d is generated by an initialization process (see S2301 in FIG. 50) executed in the main process when the power is turned on. In the image storage discrimination table 533d generated here, the storage state 533d2 corresponding to each image type indicated by the image type 533d1 is set to “0”. That is, immediately after the power is turned on, this image storage discrimination table 533d indicates that no image data of any image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536.

  The image storage determination table 533d is updated by generating a transfer command to be transmitted to the image controller 437 in the above-described image transfer setting process (see FIG. 63) or continuous notice image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62). Therefore, the MPU 431 sets the image corresponding to the transfer target image type instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the performance execution time table or the continuous notice type indicated by the continuous notice setting command as the transfer target image. Done.

  That is, when an image (target image) corresponding to the transfer target image type indicated by the transfer command of the effect execution time table or the continuous notice type indicated by the continuous notice setting command is set as the transfer target image, the target image Is transferred to and stored in the normal video RAM 536 by the image controller 437, the MPU 431 sets the storage state 533d2 of the image storage determination table 533d corresponding to the target image to “1” (S4104 in FIG. 63). And S4007 and S4009 in FIG. 62).

  Also, the image data stored so far in the areas (image A area 536a to image D area 536d, continuous notice image F area 536f) of the normal video RAM 536 in which the image corresponding to the target image is stored is deleted, and the target Since no image data having the same image type as the storage area is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the MPU 431 determines the image storage corresponding to the image type stored in the same area as the target image. The storage state 533d2 of the table 533d is set to “0” (see S4105 in FIG. 63 and S4007 and S4009 in FIG. 62).

  As described above, the update of the storage state 533d2 stored for each image type corresponding to the image type 533d1 of the image storage determination table 533d is performed in order to generate a transfer command to be transmitted to the image controller 437. This is performed in accordance with the setting of the image corresponding to the transfer image type indicated by the transfer instruction of the time table or the continuous notice type indicated by the continuous notice setting command as the transfer target image. In setting the transfer command to be transmitted to the image controller 437, it is easily determined which image type of image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 536 and which image type of image data is erased from the normal video RAM 536. be able to. Therefore, if the image storage determination table 533d is updated in accordance with the setting of the transfer command, the update can be easily performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804). This continuous preview image transfer setting process is the same as the continuous preview image transfer setting process in the second embodiment in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. This process is executed when it is determined that the continuous notice image transfer start flag is turned on by receiving the notice setting command. In the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice type indicated by the continuous advance notice setting command is set as the transfer target image, and the continuous advance notice image F area is designated as the designated storage area. Set. Hereinafter, the continuous notice image transfer setting process in the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the continuous notice image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment.

  In the continuous notice image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice holding flag 533c is on (S4001) before the continuous notice image transfer start flag is turned off by the process of S2901. If the continuous notice holding flag 533c is on (S4001: Yes), the process returns to the normal image transfer command process, and the normal image transfer command is terminated as it is (see FIG. 55). Thereby, the transfer processing of the image data for continuous notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f is not performed.

  In other words, when the continuous notice holding flag 533c is on, the image data stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f at that time is the continuous notice indicated by the continuous notice setting command received from the audio lamp control device 313. This means that the display has not been performed for the number of times yet. In such a case, the process returns to the normal image transfer command processing, and the normal image transfer command is terminated as it is, so that the audio lamp control device 313 newly gives a continuous notice. Even when the setting command is received, the image data stored in the continuous preview image F area 536f is retained.

  Thereby, once the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect used over a plurality of variable effects is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f in accordance with the continuous notice setting command, thereafter, the continuous data is continuously displayed. Using the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect transferred to the notice image F area 536f, the third symbol display device 281 can display a predetermined number of continuous notice effects. Therefore, the number of times image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536 can be reduced, and an increase in processing load on the display control device 314 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4001, if it is determined that the continuous notice holding flag is not on but off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S2901, and the continuous notice image transfer start flag is turned off. As described above, since the process of S4001 is performed before the continuous notice image transfer start flag is turned off by the process of S2901, the continuous notice holding flag 533c is determined to be on by the process of S4001, and the image data for the continuous notice effect is provided. When the transfer process from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f is not performed, the continuous notice image transfer start flag that is turned on when the continuous notice setting command is received is kept on.

  As long as the continuous notice image transfer start flag is on, the continuous notice image transfer setting process continues to be executed in the repeated normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55). Even if a new continuous notice setting command is received from the sound lamp control device 313 while the flag 533c is on, the image data transfer process of the continuous notice effect indicated by the newly received continuous notice setting command is continuously performed. After the notice holding flag 533c is turned off, that is, when a new continuous notice setting command is received, image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f is displayed for the number of continuous notices. Can be done reliably after being done.

  After the processing of S2901, the continuous notice holding flag 533c is set to ON (S4002). The continuous notice holding flag 533c is kept on until the continuous notice effect is executed for the number of continuous notices designated by the continuous notice setting command (see FIG. 46), and the continuous notice effect for the number of continuous notices is executed. Then, it is set to off (see S2523 and S2524 in FIG. 52). While the continuous notice holding flag 533c is set to ON by the process of S4001 described above, the continuous notice effect for the continuous notice effect stored and transferred to the continuous notice image F area 536f by the continuous notice image transfer setting process is stored. Since the image data or the image data for the continuous notice effect already stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f is held without being overwritten, the display control device 314 has the continuous notice image in advance before the start of the continuous notice effect. Using the image data for continuous notice effect stored in the F area 536f, an image for continuous notice effect can be immediately drawn. Further, since it is not necessary to transfer the image data for the continuous notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f for each variation display, the character ROM 434, the bus line 440 and the like are prevented from being busy. can do.

  Next, the value of the continuous notice number stored in the work RAM 533 by the process of S2414 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51) is set in the continuous notice number counter 533b (S4003). As a result, the number of continuous notices indicated by the continuous notice setting command received from the sound lamp control device 313 is set in the continuous notice number counter 533b, so that the continuous notice effect is executed based on the reception of the display variation pattern command. Every time the set change display is executed, the value of the continuous notice number counter 544b is decremented by 1, until the continuous notice effect is performed for the number of continuous notices indicated in the continuous notice setting command. The number of continuous notices is counted (see S2522 in FIG. 52).

  Next, the continuous notice type stored in the work RAM 433 is confirmed by the process of S2415 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51), and the storage state 533d2 of the image type of the target image indicated by the continuous notice type from the image storage discrimination table 533d. Is read (S4004). Specifically, if the continuous notice type stored in the work RAM 433 is “step-up type continuous notice effect”, the storage state d2 corresponding to the “step-up type” of the image type 533d1 is read from the image storage determination table 533d. If the continuous notice type stored in the work RAM 433 is “same effect type continuous notice effect”, the storage state 533d2 corresponding to the “same effect type” of the image type 533d1 is read from the image storage determination table 533d.

  Then, it is determined from the storage state 533d2 read out in S4004 whether image data corresponding to the continuous notice type (target image) to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 536 (S4005). As a result, when it is determined that the storage state 533d2 is “0” and the image data corresponding to the continuous notice type to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 536 (S4005: Yes), then, The preview image F area 536f is set as the designated storage area (S4006). Thus, the transfer destination of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice type indicated by the continuous notice setting command in the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 by the process of S2809 of the normal image transfer instruction process (see FIG. 55). The continuous notice image F area 536f is designated as

  Here, as described above, since the continuous notice image F area 536f is a dedicated area for storing only image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is overwritten by other image data. There is nothing to do. Thus, when the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice setting command, the mode indicated by the continuous notice setting command (either “step-up type continuous notice effect” or “same effect type continuous notice effect”). There is a high possibility that image data corresponding to is continuously held in the continuous notice image F area 536f. Therefore, if image data corresponding to the mode indicated in the continuous notice setting command is stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data is not re-transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. Since the image of the continuous notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is normally used from the character ROM 434. The number of transfers to the video RAM 536 can be suppressed, and an increase in processing load on the display control device 314 can be suppressed.

  After the process of S4006, next, the continuous notice type stored in the work RAM 433 is confirmed by the process of S2415 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51) as in the process of S2905 (see FIG. 56) of the second embodiment. It is determined whether or not it is a step-up type, and if it is not a step-up type (S2905: No), since the continuous notice type is the same effect type, the processing of S2906 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 56). Similarly, “bubble” is set as the transfer target image (S2906).

  As a result, the “bubble” image is designated as the transfer target image in the transfer command transmitted by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). The corresponding image data can be transferred in advance to the continuous notice image F area 536f before displaying the same notice type continuous notice effect. Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately draw the “bubble” image when executing the continuous notice effect. In addition, as described above, the image data transferred to the continuous notice image F area 536f is held until it is displayed for the number of continuous notices set by the continuous notice setting command, so that each change display is performed once. It is not necessary to transfer the “bubble” image from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f, and the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like can be prevented from being busy.

  After the process of S2906, in the continuous notice image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, the storage state 533d2 corresponding to “same effect type” in the image storage determination table 533d is updated to “1” and “step up” is performed. The storage state 533d2 corresponding to “type” is updated to “0” (S4007), and the continuous notice image transfer setting process is terminated. By the processing of S2906, the image data of the “bubble” image used for the same effect type continuous notice effect is stored in the continuous notice F area 536f of the normal video RAM 536, while the continuous notice F area 536f is stepped up to that point. When an image used for the up-type continuous notice effect is stored, the image used for the step-up type continuous notice effect is deleted by overwriting. Therefore, by updating the image confirmation determination table 533d as in the process of S4007, the image storage determination table 533d stores image data used for the same effect type continuous notice effect in the normal video RAM 536, and It can be shown that the image data used for the step-up type continuous notice effect is not stored.

  On the other hand, if the result of the processing in S2905 is that the continuous notice type is the step-up type (S2905: Yes), “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” are set as transfer target images (S4008). . As a result, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” images are designated as transfer target images in the transfer command transmitted by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the image controller 437 stores the image data corresponding to the “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” images in advance in the continuous notice image F area before displaying the step-up type continuous notice effect. 536f can be transferred.

  Therefore, the display control device 314 displays any one of the “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” images from the sound lamp control device 313 during execution of the continuous notice effect. In accordance with the “continuous notice mode” shown in FIG. 49, it is possible to immediately draw in accordance with the change display for the display change pattern command. In addition, as described above, the image data transferred to the continuous notice image F area 536f is held until it is displayed for the number of continuous notices set by the continuous notice setting command, so that each change display is performed once. Therefore, it is not necessary to transfer the “continuous notice mode” image shown in the display variation pattern command from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f, and the character ROM 434, the bus line 440, and the like are prevented from being frequently busy. can do.

  In the process of S4008 of the continuous preview image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, unlike the continuous preview image transfer setting process of the second embodiment (see S2907 to S2913 in FIG. 56), a continuous preview setting command (FIG. 46), the “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” images are always designated as the transfer target images.

  Thereby, all the image data for the step-up type continuous notice effect including the image data that is not used depending on the number of continuous notices in the subsequent step-up type continuous notice effect is transferred to the continuous notice image F area 536f. However, by doing so, even if a step-up type continuous notice effect with a different number of continuous notices is specified in the next received continuous notice setting command, it is used in the step-up type continuous notice effect. Since all the image data is stored in the continuous preview image F area 536f, it is stored in the continuous preview image F area 536f without transferring image data from the character ROM 434 to the continuous preview image F area 536f. Step-up type continuous notice effect using image data It can be displayed on the 81. Therefore, when the step-up type continuous notice effect is performed, the number of times that the image data used for the step-up type is transferred from the character ROM 437 to the continuous notice image F area 536f can be reduced.

  After the process of S4008, in the continuous notice image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, the storage state 533d2 corresponding to the “step-up type” in the image storage determination table 533d is updated to “1” and “same effect” The storage state 533d2 corresponding to “type” is updated to “0” (S4009), and this continuous preview image transfer setting process is terminated. By the processing of S4008, the image data of the image used for the step-up type continuous notice effect is stored in the continuous notice F area 536f of the normal video RAM 536, while the same effect type continuous is used in the continuous notice F area 536f. When the image used for the notice effect is stored, the image used for the same effect type continuous notice effect is deleted by overwriting. Therefore, by updating the image confirmation determination table 533d as in the process of S4009, the image storage determination table 533d is stored in the normal video RAM 536 with image data used for the step-up type continuous notice effect, and It can be shown that the image data used for the same effect type continuous notice effect is not stored.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S4005, the storage state 533d2 read out in S4004 is “1”, and the image data corresponding to the continuous notice type (target image) to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 536. If it is determined (S4005: Yes), the process returns to the normal image transfer command process, and the normal image transfer command is terminated as it is (see FIG. 55).

  Thereby, when image data corresponding to the continuous notice type to be transferred is stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f of the normal video RAM 536, the transfer process from the character ROM 434 to the continuous notice image F area 536f is performed. Since it is not performed, it is possible to prevent the image data corresponding to the continuous notice type to be transferred repeatedly from being transferred to the continuous notice image F area 536f. As described above, since it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer processing, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the MPU 431 and to reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 536 are in a busy state. it can.

  In this case, even if the image data corresponding to the continuous notice type indicated by the continuous notice setting command is not transferred to the continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data is already stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f. Therefore, the display control device 314 can immediately display the continuous notice effect on the third symbol display device using the image data stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f.

  Also, in the process of S4005, before setting the image data transfer command of the continuous notice type (target image) to be transferred to the image controller 437, the storage state of the image data corresponding to the image type is set. The determination can be made easily by reading from the image storage determination table 533d and determining whether or not it is stored in the normal video RAM 536 based on the storage state. Therefore, the processing load related to the determination can be reduced.

  Next, the image transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control apparatus 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the image transfer setting process (S2806). This image transfer setting process is similar to the image transfer setting process in the second embodiment in the effect execution time table (see FIG. 55) in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. This process is executed when it is determined that the image transfer start flag indicating that an image data transfer command has been issued is on (see FIG. 33). In the image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, the transfer target image type designated by the transfer command of the effect execution time table is set as the transfer target image, and the transfer target image is set as the transfer destination area. One predetermined area from the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d of the normal video RAM 536 is set as the designated storage area.

  In the image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, first, as in the second embodiment, the image transfer start flag is turned off by the process in S3001, and then the process in S2517 of the image drawing process (see FIG. 52). Accordingly, the transfer target image type stored in the work RAM 433, that is, the transfer target image type instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is set as the target image, and the target image is corresponding to the target image from the image storage determination table 533d. The storage state 533d2 is read (S4101). Then, based on the storage state 533d2 of the target image, it is determined whether or not the image data of the target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536 (S4102).

  As a result, if the storage state 533d2 of the target image is “0” and the image data of the target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 536 (S4102: No), then the transfer destination area for the target image is displayed. As a designated storage area, a predetermined area from the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d of the normal video RAM 536 is set (S4103). For example, if the target image corresponds to the super-reach production mode (any one of “super reach A” to “super reach E”), the image A area 536a is set as the designated storage area, and the target image is notified in advance. If it corresponds to the effect mode of the effect (any one of “notice effect A” to “notice effect E”), the image B area 536b is set as the designated storage area, and the target image corresponds to the win effect or the miss effect. If so, the image C area 536c is set as the designated storage area, and if the target image corresponds to the round effect, the image D area 536d is set as the designated storage area.

  As a result of the processing of S4102, in the transfer command transmitted to the image controller 437 by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55), the transfer is instructed by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table. One of the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d determined in advance for the target image is designated as the transfer destination of the image data corresponding to the image. In response to this transfer command, the image controller 437 transfers the image data of the target image to a predetermined area for the target image.

  In this way, since a predetermined area is fixedly designated as an area in which the image data is to be stored according to the target image, the designated storage area setting process can be easily performed, and the MPU 431 This setting process can be executed with a small load. In addition, when drawing processing is performed using image data of a specific image type, it is only necessary to read out the image data from an area predetermined for the image type. It is not necessary to store in which area the corresponding image data is stored. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in data to be temporarily stored in the work RAM 536, and it is possible to reduce the reading process of the data, and thus it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the MPU 431.

  After the processing of S4103, the image storage determination table 533d is updated. That is, in the image storage determination table 533d, the storage state 533d2 corresponding to the target image for which transfer is instructed by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is updated to “1” (S4104), and further, in the same area as the target image. The storage state 532d2 corresponding to the image type to be stored is updated to “0” (S4105).

  For example, when the target image is “super reach B”, the storage state 533 d 2 associated with “super reach B” of the image type 533 d 1 is updated to “1” in the image storage determination table 533 d, and The storage state 533d2 associated with “super reach A” and “super reach C” to “super reach E” of the image type 533d1 to be stored in the same image A area 536a as “super reach B” is updated to “0”. To do. If the target image is “notice effect A”, the storage state 533 d 2 associated with “notice effect A” of the image type 533 d 1 is updated to “1” in the image storage determination table 533 d. The storage state 533d2 associated with “notice effect B” to “notice effect E” of the image type 533d1 to be stored in the same image B area 536b as “notice effect A” is updated to “0”.

  Here, in the image controller 437, the transfer target image set by the process of S3006 described later (the target image for which transfer is instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table) is stored in the designated storage area set by the process of S4103. On the other hand, the image data stored so far in the designated storage area is erased by overwriting. Therefore, by updating the image storage determination table 533d as in the processing of S4104 and S4105, the image type stored in the normal video RAM 536 can be correctly indicated by the image storage determination table 533d.

  Also, by updating the image storage discrimination table 533d during the image transfer setting process, image data of which image type is transferred to the normal video RAM 536, and image data of which image type is deleted from the normal video RAM 536. Therefore, it is possible to easily update the image storage discrimination table 533d.

  After the process of S4105, the process proceeds to the process of S3006, the transfer target image type (target image) instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is set as the transfer target image (S3006), and the image transfer setting process Exit. As a result, the target image for which transfer is instructed by the transfer command of the effect execution time table is specified in the transfer command transmitted by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55).

  Based on this transfer instruction, the image controller 437 converts the image data of the target image instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the performance execution time table into the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d of the normal video RAM 536 by the processing of S4103. The data is transferred to the designated storage area set from among the above. Since the image data stored in the designated storage area is held until the next image data to be stored in that area appears, when the rendering of the target image is set by the effect execution time table, the display control device 314 can immediately draw an image using the image data of the target image stored in the normal video RAM 536 and display the image on the third symbol display device 281.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S4102, if the storage state 533d2 of the target image is “1” and the image data of the target image is stored in the normal video RAM (S4102: Yes), the normal image transfer command processing is performed. Returning, the normal image transfer command is terminated as it is (see FIG. 55).

  Thereby, when the image data of the target image instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is stored in the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d of the normal video RAM 536, the normal video is read from the character ROM 434. Since the transfer process to the RAM 536 is not performed, it is possible to prevent the image data of the target image from being transferred to the normal video RAM 536 redundantly. As described above, since it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer processing, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the MPU 431 and to reduce the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 536 are in a busy state. it can.

  Further, in this case, even if the image data of the target image instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is not transferred to the normal video RAM 536, the image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 536. The display control device 314 can immediately display a predetermined image on the third symbol display device using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 536 in accordance with the effect execution time table.

  Also, in the processing of S4102, before setting the image data transfer command of the target image to the image controller 437, the storage state of the image data corresponding to the image type is read from the image storage determination table 533d, and This determination can be easily made by determining whether or not it is stored in the normal video RAM 536 based on the storage state. Therefore, the processing load related to the determination can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 in the third embodiment, the display controller 314 uses the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 to display an image that the image controller 437 displays on the third symbol display device 281. When drawing, since the image data is transferred to one area of the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d that is determined in advance according to the image type of the image, the setting process of the transfer destination area of the image data is performed. The MPU 431 can execute this setting process with a small load. In addition, when drawing processing is performed using image data of a specific image type, it is only necessary to read out the image data from an area predetermined for the image type. It is not necessary to store in which area the corresponding image data is stored. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in data to be temporarily stored in the work RAM 536, and it is possible to reduce the reading process of the data, and thus it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the MPU 431.

  Further, when the normal video RAM 536 is provided with a dedicated continuous notice image F area 536f for storing only image data used for the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the effect notice effect Since the image data used for is stored in the dedicated continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is not overwritten by other image data. Thus, when the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice setting command, the mode indicated by the continuous notice setting command (either “step-up type continuous notice effect” or “same effect type continuous notice effect”). There is a high possibility that image data corresponding to is continuously held in the continuous notice image F area 536f. Therefore, if image data corresponding to the mode indicated in the continuous notice setting command is stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data is not re-transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. Since the image of the continuous notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the continuous notice image F area 536f, the image data corresponding to the continuous notice effect is normally used from the character ROM 434. The number of transfers to the video RAM 536 can be suppressed, and an increase in processing load on the display control device 314 can be suppressed.

  In addition, for all image types that are not resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the back image, a storage state indicating whether or not image data corresponding to the image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536 is displayed for each image type. The image storage discrimination table 533d is provided, and when the image controller 437 draws an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435, the image storage discrimination table 533d It is possible to easily determine whether or not the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 433 simply by confirming the storage state corresponding to each image type shown. Therefore, the processing load related to the determination can be reduced.

  In addition, the effects obtained by the same configuration as the pachinko machine 200 in the second embodiment can be enjoyed also in the pachinko machine 200 in the third embodiment.

  Next, a pachinko machine 200 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 200 according to the third embodiment described above, in the display control device 314, for all image types that are not resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the back image, the image data corresponding to the image type is the normal video RAM 536. An image storage discrimination table 533d indicating the storage status for each image type is provided in the work RAM 533, and the MPU 431 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 437 to store the image data in the resident video RAM 435. When the image data not resident in the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536, the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 536 based on the storage state corresponding to each image type indicated by the image storage determination table 533d. Whether it is stored The MPU431 it is determined if the image data has been stored in the normal video RAM 536, MPU431 has been described to unexecuted transmission of transfer instructions to the image controller 437.

  In contrast, in the pachinko machine 200 according to the fourth embodiment, in the display control device 314, for all image types that are not resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the back image, image data corresponding to the image type is for normal use. An image storage determination table 601a indicating the storage state for each image type indicating whether or not the image is stored in the video RAM 536 is provided in the work RAM 601 in the image controller 437, and the image controller 437 receives a transfer command from the MPU 431. If the storage state of the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command is determined by the image storage determination table 601a, and the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image controller 437 Is the image data transfer process based on the transfer command And unexecuted.

  The structure and electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 according to the fourth embodiment are the same as those of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second and third embodiments except for the electrical configuration of the display control device 341 (FIG. 20). To FIG. 26, FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 to FIG. 33). The various processes executed by the MPUs in the main control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the sound lamp control device 313 and the commands transmitted and received between the devices 310 to 314 are also described in the second and third embodiments. It is the same as the pachinko machine 200 in the form (see FIGS. 27 and 34 to 49). Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko machine 200 in the fourth embodiment, the same elements as those in the second embodiment and the third embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 64 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200 according to the fourth embodiment. The display control device 314 in the fourth embodiment is different from the display control device 314 in the third embodiment in that a work RAM 633 is provided instead of the work RAM 533 and a work RAM 601 is provided in the image controller 437. It is a point. Further, among the processes executed by the MPU 431 by the various programs stored in the ROM 432, the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804) and the image transfer setting process (S2806) are different from the third embodiment, and further. The image transfer process executed by the image controller 437 is different from the third embodiment (second embodiment).

  On the other hand, the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 in the fourth embodiment, the effect execution time table storage area 432a provided in the ROM 432, the character ROM 434 (NAND flash memory 434a, the arbitration circuit 434b), and the resident video RAM 435 (main at power-on) Image area 435a, power-on variation image area 435b, back image area 435c, third symbol area 435d, character symbol area 435e, error message image area 435f), normal video RAM 536 (image A area 536a to image D area 536d, The back image E area 536e, the continuous notice image F area 536f), the buffer RAM 437a provided in the image controller 437a, the input port 438, and the output port 439 are all the same as those in the third embodiment. (See FIG. 60), and the main processing (see FIG. 50), command determination processing (see FIG. 51), image drawing processing (see FIG. 52), and power-on image drawing processing executed by the MPU 431. (See FIG. 53), image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54A), resident image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54B), normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55), and rear image transfer setting The processing (see FIG. 58) is the same as that of the third embodiment (second embodiment).

  Similar to the work RAM 533 of the third embodiment, the work RAM 633 is a memory that is connected to the bus line 440 and temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 431. The work RAM 633 is different from the work RAM 533 according to the third embodiment in that the work RAM 633 does not include the image storage determination table 533 d provided in the work RAM 533 according to the third embodiment. The work RAM 633 is provided with at least a power-on image display flag 633a, a continuous notice count counter 633b, and a continuous notice holding flag 633c. The power-on image display flag 633a, continuous notice count counter 633b, and continuous notice hold flag 633c are the power-on image display flag 533a, continuous notice count counter 533b, and continuous notice hold flag 533c (see FIG. 60). ), The description is omitted here.

  A work RAM 601 provided in the image controller 437 is a rewritable volatile memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the image controller 437. The work RAM 601 is provided with at least an image storage discrimination table 601a.

  Similar to the image storage determination table 533d in the third embodiment, the image storage determination table 601a has normal image data corresponding to the image type for all image types not resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the back image. 61 is a table showing the storage status for each image type indicating whether or not the video is stored in the video RAM 536, and the contents thereof are the same as those shown in FIG. That is, the image storage determination table 601a is obtained by moving the image determination table 533d provided in the work RAM 533 in the third embodiment to the work RAM 601 in the image controller 437. In the following description, “image type” in the image storage determination table 601a is referred to as an image type 601a1, and “storage state” is referred to as a storage state 601a2.

  Upon receiving an image data transfer command from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 executes a transfer execution determination process (see FIG. 68). If the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command is other than the back image, the image controller 437 The storage discrimination table 601a is referred to (see S5103 in FIG. 68). If the storage state 601a2 corresponding to the transfer target image type instructed to be transferred by the transfer command is “0” and the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type is not stored in the normal video RAM 536, transfer is performed. In accordance with the instruction, the designated image data is transferred from the character ROM to the normal video RAM 536.

  On the other hand, in the image controller 437, the storage state 601a2 corresponding to the transfer target image type instructed to be transferred by the transfer command is “1”, and the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536. If so, transfer processing according to the transfer command is not executed.

  In this way, the image controller 437 easily reads out the storage state of the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer instruction of the image data received from the MPU 431 from the image storage determination table 601a. Can be determined whether or not is stored in the normal video RAM 536. Therefore, the processing load related to the determination can be reduced. Also, the image controller 437, in accordance with the transfer instruction of the image data received from the MPU 431, transfers the transfer target image before transferring the image data of the transfer target image type designated by the transfer instruction from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. By determining the storage state of the image data corresponding to the type from the image storage determination table 533d, if the image data of the target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image data is normally overlapped from the character ROM 434. Transfer to the video RAM 536 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the MPU 431 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 437 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 536, whereas the content of the image storage determination table 601a is transmitted on the image controller 437 side. Based on this, the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 536 is determined, and it is determined whether or not the image data needs to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. Here, the image controller 437 is a DSP specialized for image processing, and generally has a very high processing capability. Therefore, by causing the image controller 437 to determine the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 536, the processing load of the MPU 431 can be reduced, and the display control device 314 as a whole has a processing capability. It can suppress that it falls.

  The image storage discrimination table 601a is generated in the initialization process executed by the image controller 437 when the power is turned on. In the image storage determination table 601a generated here, the storage state 601a2 corresponding to each image type indicated by the image type 601a1 is set to “0”. That is, immediately after the power is turned on, the image storage discrimination table 601a indicates that no image data of any image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536.

  The update of the image storage determination table 601a is instructed by the transfer instruction based on the transfer instruction of the image data received from the MPU 431 in the transfer execution determination process (see FIG. 68) executed by the image controller 437. When the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536 is decided because the image data of the transfer target image type is not stored in the normal video RAM 536, the transfer is performed according to the content of the transfer command. (See S5104 to S5106 in FIG. 68).

  That is, the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer command is transferred to and stored in the normal video RAM 536, so that the image controller 437 stores the image storage determination table 601a corresponding to the transfer target image type. Is set to “1” (see S5105 in FIG. 68). In addition, the normal video RAM 536 area (image A area 536a to image D area 536d, continuous notice image F area 536f) in which the image corresponding to the transfer target image type (transfer target image) is stored has been stored so far. Since the image data is deleted and no image data having the same image type as the transfer target image and the storage destination area is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image controller 437 is placed in the same area as the transfer target image. The storage state 601a2 of the image storage discrimination table 601a corresponding to the stored image type is set to “0” (see S5106 in FIG. 68).

  As described above, the update of the storage state 601a2 stored for each image type corresponding to the image type 601a1 of the image storage determination table 601a is performed based on the transfer instruction of the image data received from the MPU 431 by the image controller 437. When the execution of image data transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536 is determined because the image data of the transfer target image type designated by the transfer command is not stored in the normal video RAM 536, the transfer command It is done according to the contents of The image controller 437 can easily determine which image type of image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 536 and which image type of image data is erased from the normal video RAM 536 by the transfer command. Therefore, if the image storage discrimination table 601a is updated according to the transfer command, the update can be easily performed.

  In addition, when such an update process is performed by the image controller 437 instead of the MPU 431, when a DSP having a very high processing capability is used as the image controller 437, the processing load on the MPU 431 can be reduced and the display can be reduced. As a whole, the control device 314 can suppress a decrease in processing capacity.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a description is given of the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice image transfer setting process (S2804). This continuous preview image transfer setting process is the same as the continuous preview image transfer setting process in the third embodiment in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. This process is executed when it is determined that the continuous notice image transfer start flag is turned on by receiving the notice setting command. In the continuous advance notice image transfer setting process, image data corresponding to the continuous advance notice type indicated by the continuous advance notice setting command is set as the transfer target image, and the continuous advance notice image F area is set as the designated storage area.

  Here, the continuous preview image transfer setting process in the fourth embodiment is different from the continuous preview image transfer setting process (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment. This point is that the processing relating to the image discrimination table 533d is omitted.

  Thereby, in the continuous notice image transfer setting process in the fourth embodiment, the value of the continuous notice number stored in the work RAM 533 in the process of S2414 of the command determination process (see FIG. 51) is obtained by the process of S4003. After setting in the counter 533b, the process proceeds to S4006, and the continuous notice image F area 536f is set in the designated storage area. In addition, after setting “bubble” as the transfer target image by the process of S2906, the continuous notice image transfer setting process is ended, and as the transfer target image by the process of S4008, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, “ Even after the “chicken group” is set, the continuous notice image transfer setting process ends.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the image storage determination table 601a is provided in the work RAM 601 in the image controller 437, and when the image controller 437 receives the transfer command from the MPU 431, the transfer target instructed by the transfer command. If the storage state of the image type is determined by the image storage determination table 601a and the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image controller 437 performs image data transfer processing based on the transfer command. The MPU 431 sets the image corresponding to the continuous notice type indicated by the continuous notice setting command as the transfer target image regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 536. The image data transfer command It is sufficient transmission to controller 437, as shown in FIG. 65, it is possible to simplify the continuous announcement image transfer setting process executed by MPU431. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 431 can be reduced.

  Next, the image transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the image transfer setting process (S2806). This image transfer setting process is similar to the image transfer setting process in the third embodiment, in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 (see FIG. 55). This process is executed when it is determined that the image transfer start flag indicating that an image data transfer command has been issued is on (see FIG. 33). Then, the transfer target image type instructed by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is set as the transfer target image, and the image A area 536a to the image D of the normal video RAM 536 are set as transfer destination areas for the transfer target image. One area determined in advance from the area 536d is set as the designated storage area.

  Here, the difference between the continuous notice image transfer setting process in the fourth embodiment and the continuous notice image transfer setting process in the third embodiment (see FIG. 63) is that S4101, S4102, S4104 and S4105 in the third embodiment. This point is that the process relating to the image discrimination table 533d is omitted.

  As a result, in the image transfer setting process in the fourth embodiment, the image transfer start flag is turned off by the process of S3001, and then the process proceeds to S4103. For the target image type (target image), a predetermined area from the image A area 536a to the image D area 536d of the normal video RAM 536 is set as the designated storage area as the transfer destination area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S3006, the transfer target image type (target image) instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table is set as the transfer target image, and the image transfer setting process is ended.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the image storage determination table 601a is provided in the work RAM 601 in the image controller 437, and when the image controller 437 receives the transfer command from the MPU 431, the transfer target instructed by the transfer command. If the storage state of the image type is determined by the image storage determination table 601a and the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image controller 437 performs image data transfer processing based on the transfer command. The MPU 431 is configured so that the image is not executed, the transfer target image type (target image) instructed to be transferred by the transfer instruction of the effect execution time table regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 536. Is set as the transfer target image, and the image Since may transmit data transfer instruction to the image controller 437, as shown in FIG. 66, it is possible to simplify the image transfer setting process executed by MPU431. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 431 can be reduced.

  Next, image transfer processing executed by the image controller 437 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this image transfer processing. Similar to the image transfer process in the third embodiment (second embodiment), this image transfer process is repeatedly executed in the main process executed by the image controller 437, and an image data transfer command is received by the MPU 431. In this case, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 in accordance with the received transfer command.

  The difference between the image transfer process in the fourth embodiment and the image transfer process in the third embodiment (second embodiment) (see FIG. 59) is that an image data transfer command is received from the MPU 431 by the process of S3202. Is determined (S3202: Yes), the transfer execution determination process (S5001) is executed before the process of S3203. The other processing is the same as the image transfer processing in the third embodiment (second embodiment), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the transfer execution determination process (S5001) executed by the image controller 437 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this transfer execution determination processing (S5001). This transfer execution determination process (S5001) is a process executed when an image data transfer command is received from the MPU 431 in the image transfer process executed by the image controller 437 as described above. If the transfer target image is other than the back image, the transfer based on the transfer command is performed if the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536 with reference to the image storage determination table 601a. Processing is not executed. When the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image storage determination table update process is executed.

  In this transfer execution determination process, first, a transfer target image instructed to be transferred by a transfer command is determined (S5101). Note that the actual transfer command includes the address of the character ROM in which the transfer target image is stored as information indicating the transfer target image. The image controller 437 performs various processes using the address of the character ROM as image identification information handled in the image controller 437.

  Next, it is determined whether the transfer target image is a rear image (S5102). If the image to be transferred is a back image (S5102: Yes), it is necessary to always transfer the image data corresponding to the back image according to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 313. Since there is, the transfer execution determination process ends. As a result, the image controller 437 proceeds to the process of S3203 of the image transfer process, and the normal video RAM 536 (back image A transfer process to the E area 536e) is performed.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not a back image as a result of the processing in S5102, the storage state 601a2 of the transfer target image is read from the image storage determination table 601a (S5103). Then, based on the storage state 601a2 of the transfer target image, it is determined whether or not the image data of the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536 (S5104).

  As a result, if the storage state 601a2 of the transfer target image is “1” and the image data of the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 536 (S5104: Yes), the process of S3213 of the image transfer process (FIG. 67), a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431, and the image transfer process is ended. Thus, if the image data of the transfer target image instructed to be transferred by the transfer command is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536. Processing can be unexecuted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data stored in the normal video RAM 536 from being duplicately transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536, and to suppress an increase in the load on the image controller 437. At the same time, the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 536 are busy can be reduced.

  In addition, since the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431 by the process of S3213, the MPU 431 is based on the transfer command even if the image controller 437 does not actually execute the image data transfer process. Thus, it can be handled that the transfer processing to the normal video RAM 536 has been completed. In this case, even if the image controller 437 does not transfer the image data of the transfer target image to the normal video RAM 536 in accordance with the transfer command, the image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 536. In step 314, a predetermined image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 536 in accordance with the effect execution time table and the display variation pattern command.

  In the processing of S5104, the storage state of the transfer target image designated for transfer by the transfer command is read from the image storage determination table 601a, and it is determined whether or not it is stored in the normal video RAM 536 based on the storage state. Therefore, the determination can be easily performed. Therefore, the processing load related to the determination can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S5104 that the storage state 601a2 of the transfer target image is “0” and the image data of the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 536 (S5104: No), then Then, after updating the image storage discrimination table 601a (S5105, S5106), this transfer execution discrimination processing is terminated. As a result, the image controller 437 proceeds to the process of S3203 of the image transfer process, and the image data transfer process from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536 is performed according to the transfer command by the subsequent processes.

  In the update processing of the image storage determination table 601a, first, the storage state 601a2 corresponding to the transfer target image instructed to be transferred by the transfer command is updated to “1” (S5105), and further The storage state 601a2 corresponding to the image type to be stored in the same area as the transfer target image is updated to “0” (S5106).

  For example, when the transfer target image is “super reach B”, the storage state 601a2 associated with “super reach B” of the image type 601a1 is updated to “1” in the image storage determination table 601a. The storage state 601a2 associated with “super reach A” and “super reach C” to “super reach E” of the image type 601a1 to be stored in the same image A area 536a as “super reach B” is set to “0”. Update. If the transfer target image is “step-up type”, the storage state 601a2 associated with the “step-up type” of the image type 601a1 is updated to “1” in the image storage determination table 601a. The storage state 601a2 associated with the “same effect type” of the image type 601a1 to be stored in the same continuous notice image F area 536f as the “step-up type” is updated to “0”.

  Here, the image controller 437 stores the image data of the transfer target image in the designated storage area designated by the transfer command, while erasing the image data previously stored in the designated storage area by overwriting. . Therefore, by updating the image storage determination table 601a as in the processing of S5105 and S5106, the image type stored in the normal video RAM 536 can be correctly indicated by the image storage determination table 601a.

  In addition, the image storage determination table 601a is updated in the transfer execution determination process executed when the image controller 437 receives the transfer command. Since it is possible to easily determine which image type of image data is transferred from the video RAM 536 and erased from the normal video RAM 536, the image storage determination table 533d can be easily updated.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 in the fourth embodiment, in the display control device 314, for all image types that are not resident in the resident video RAM 435 except for the back image, the image data corresponding to the image type is normally stored. When the image storage determination table 601a indicating the storage state for each image type is stored in the work RAM 601 in the image controller 437 and the image controller 437 receives a transfer command from the MPU 431. If the storage state of the transfer target image type designated by the transfer command is determined by the image storage determination table 601a and the image data corresponding to the transfer target image type is stored in the normal video RAM 536, the image controller Reference numeral 437 denotes image data transfer processing based on the transfer command. It is referred to as unexecuted.

  Thus, the MPU 431 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 437 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal video RAM 536, whereas the image controller 437 side stores the image storage determination table 601a. Based on the contents, the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 536 is determined, and whether or not the image data needs to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 536 is determined. Here, the image controller 437 is a DSP specialized for image processing, and generally has a very high processing capability. Therefore, by causing the image controller 437 to determine the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 536, the processing load of the MPU 431 can be reduced, and the display control device 314 as a whole has a processing capability. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, the effects obtained by the same configuration as the pachinko machine 200 in the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be enjoyed also in the pachinko machine 200 in the fourth embodiment.

  Next, a pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 200 according to the fourth embodiment described above, “in-town stage”, “underwater stage”, and “empty stage” are provided as stages in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are unified. In accordance with the stage selected by the player by the operation of the frame button 222, the image of any one of the back A to the back C to be displayed on the back side (back side) of the variation display of the third symbol is scrolled over time. The case where it is displayed while being explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the “city stage”, the “underwater stage”, and the “empty stage”, the “island stage” and the “urban stage” are prepared as the stage buttons. When “Island Stage” is selected by the player by the operation of 222, the back D of which the color tone of a part of the image changes as time passes is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the back image, and the player When “Urban Stage” is selected, the back E of which the person on the image changes as time passes is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the back image.

  In the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment, when the super reach is displayed in the variation effect on the third symbol display device 281, the player can change the effect of the super reach by operating the frame button 222 by the player. The back image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 is changed according to the super reach production mode selected by the player.

  The structure and electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment are the same as those of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second to fourth embodiments except for the electrical configuration of the display control device 341 (FIG. 20). To FIG. 26, FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 to FIG. 33). In addition, various processes executed by the MPUs in the main control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the sound lamp control device 313 and commands transmitted and received between the devices 310 to 314 are also included in the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313. Is the same as the pachinko machine 200 in the second to fourth embodiments except for the frame button input monitoring effect processing (see S1906 in FIG. 42) executed in the main process (FIGS. 27 and 34). (See FIG. 49). Hereinafter, in the description of the pachinko machine 200 in the fifth embodiment, the same elements as those in the second to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  However, in the fifth embodiment, the frame button 222 (see FIGS. 22 and 25) indicates the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as “stage in town”, “underwater stage”, “empty stage”, “island”. This is used when changing from one of the five stages "stage" and "urban stage" to one stage. This stage change is performed when the frame button 222 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 222 is operated, the “city stage” → “underwater” “Stage” → “Empty Stage” → “Island Stage” → “Urban Stage” → “City Stage” →...

  In the fifth embodiment, when the effect image for super reach is displayed during the variable display of the third symbol, the effect modes used in the super reach are “super reach A” to “super reach E”. The player can select from one aspect, and the frame button 222 is also used when the player selects an effect form used in this super reach. In this case, within a predetermined time immediately after the start of super reach, a selection screen for a super reach effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Then, when the frame button 222 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, five of “Super Reach A” to “Super Reach E” are selected according to the operation. One aspect is selected as a production aspect used in super reach.

  In the sound lamp control device 313, the third symbol display device 281 performs the liquid crystal display effect execution management processing (S1910) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310. A time synchronized with the time required for the variable display is set, and in the 3rd symbol display device 281, whether or not the super reach production mode selection screen is displayed is determined within a predetermined time from the start of the super reach. It can be easily judged by whether or not.

  Therefore, if the player operates the frame button 222 while the super-reach effect mode selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the voice lamp control device 313 performs the main process in one process. A frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 314 by a frame button input monitoring / production process (see S1906 in FIG. 42) for monitoring an input from a certain frame button 222. Based on the reception of the frame button operation command, the display control device 314 selects a super reach effect mode by the super reach change process (see FIG. 75).

  FIG. 69 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment. The display control device 314 in the fifth embodiment is different from the display control device 314 in the fourth embodiment in that a character ROM 734 is provided instead of the character ROM 434, and a program 732 is provided instead of the ROM 432. And a work RAM 744 is provided instead of the work RAM 633. Of the processes executed by the various programs stored in the ROM 732, the command determination process (S2308), the image drawing process (S2307), and the normal image transfer command process (S2603) are different from the fourth embodiment. .

  On the other hand, the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 and the resident video RAM 435 (power-on main image area 435a, power-on variation image area 435b, back image area 435c, third symbol area 435d, character symbol area 435e in the fifth embodiment. , Error message image area 435f), normal video RAM 536 (image A area 536a to image D area 536d, rear image E area 536e, continuous notice image F area 536f), image controller 437 and buffer provided in the image controller 437a The RAM 437a and work RAM 601 (including the image storage discrimination table 601a), the input port 438, and the output port 439 are all the same as those in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 64).

  Also, main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431, power-on image drawing processing (see FIG. 53), image transfer command processing (see FIG. 54A), resident image transfer command processing (FIG. 54B). )), Continuous preview image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 65), image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 66), rear image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 58), and image transfer processing executed by the image controller 437 (FIG. 67) and the transfer execution determination process (see FIG. 68) are the same as those in the fourth embodiment.

  Like the character ROM 434 in the second to fourth embodiments, the character ROM 734 is a memory that stores image data displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The character ROM 734 is a NAND in the second to fourth embodiments. The NAND flash memory 734a has the same capacity of 2 gigabytes as the type flash memory 434a. Therefore, since a large number of images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be stored, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player. It has become.

  Further, the character ROM 734 has the same function as the arbitration circuit 434b in the second to fourth embodiments, which performs data address conversion to read / write data while avoiding defective data blocks in the NAND flash memory 734a. A known arbitration circuit 734b (see, for example, Patent Document 1) is provided.

  This character ROM 734 is different from the character ROM 434 in the second to fourth embodiments in that “in-city stage”, “underwater stage”, “in-air stage” are stored in the NAND flash memory 734a as image data for the back image. In addition to the image data of the back surface A to the back surface C corresponding to the above, image data of the back surface D and the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage” and the “urban stage” are stored. Further, the NAND flash memory 734a stores the image data of the different back images for each of the “super reach A” to “super reach E”, which are five types of effects for super reach. It differs from the character ROM 434 in the second to fourth embodiments in that super reach selection effect image data for allowing the player to select a mode is stored. Note that the display contents of the rear images corresponding to each of the rear D, the rear E, and the super reach effects change with time.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, the back D and the back E, which are back images corresponding to the “island stage” and the “city stage”, will be described. First, FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the contents of the back D displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  The rear images on the rear surface D are displayed on the third display device 281 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Specifically, the back D is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the position where the image is displayed fixed in the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 281. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 222, a rear image shown in FIG. 70A is displayed as an initial rear image of the rear surface D. In the rear image shown in FIG. 70A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the passage of time, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 70B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 70B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 70 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 70 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, the color of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange as time goes on. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 70 (a) is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 70 (a) to (c) are displayed again on the third symbol display device 281.

  Here, the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 70A and 70B including FIG. 70A and excluding FIG. 70B is resident in the start-up process after power-on. It is stored in the rear image area 435c of the video RAM 435 and is resident. As a result, even if the character ROM 734 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 734a having a low reading speed, when the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 222 at an arbitrary timing. By using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the initial back image (the image in FIG. 70A) of the back D is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In addition, at least the images shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while changing the color tone over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to FIGS. 70A and 70B is stored in the resident video RAM 435 on the rear surface D, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and the cost can be increased. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment, while the stage is changed to the “island stage” and the images of FIGS. 70A to 70B are displayed, FIGS. c) and the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 70C to 70A are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 536e of the normal RAM 536.

  Here, while the images of FIGS. 70A and 70B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the back image E of the normal RAM 536 is displayed from the character ROM 434. The ranges shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B are set so that the transfer to the area 536e can be completed. Thereby, while displaying the images of FIGS. 70A to 70B, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 70B to 70C and FIGS. 70C to 70A are converted into the normal video RAM 536. Since the images shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the normal image is used without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the back image E area 536e of the video RAM 536, the images of FIGS. 70 (b) to 70 (c) and 70 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed with time. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the back E, which is a back image corresponding to the “urban stage”, will be described. 71 is a diagram showing the contents of the back E displayed on the third symbol display device 281. As shown in FIG.

  As with the back D, the back image on the back E is also in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. Is displayed. Specifically, the back E is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 with images of urban roads and buildings fixed in a position where the images are displayed. On the other hand, on the back E, the person walking on the road changes with time.

  When the stage is changed to “urban stage” by the player's operation of the frame button 222, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 71A, an image in which “student” appears as a character appears on the right side of the screen is displayed. Then, as time passes, an image of “student” walking from the right side to the left side toward the screen is displayed, and after “student” disappears from the screen after a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. Is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 71 (b), an image in which “housewife” appears on the right side as the character appears on the screen.

  Then, as time passes, an image of “Housewife” walking from the right side to the left side toward the screen is displayed, and when “Housewife” disappears from the screen after a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 71 (c) is now displayed. Is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 71 (c), in the back image shown in FIG. 71 (c), an image in which “Salaryman” appears as a character on the right side as viewed on the screen is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, an image of “Salaryman” walking from the right side to the left side toward the screen is displayed, and when “Salaryman” disappears from the screen after a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. The back images of FIGS. 71A to 71C are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 again.

  Here, the image data of the back E corresponding to the back image between FIG. 71A and FIG. 71B including FIG. 71A and excluding FIG. 71B is turned on similarly to the back D. During the subsequent start-up process, it is stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and is resident. As a result, even if the character ROM 734 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 734a having a low reading speed, the stage is changed to “urban stage” by the player operating the frame button 222 at an arbitrary timing. By using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the initial back image (the image of FIG. 71A) of the back E is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. In addition, at least the images in FIGS. 71A to 71B can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while changing the characters with the passage of time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to FIGS. 71A to 71B is stored in the resident video RAM 435 on the rear surface E, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and the cost can be increased. Can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment, while the images of FIGS. 71A to 71B are being displayed, FIGS. 71B to 71C and FIGS. 71C to 71A are displayed. ) Is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 536e of the normal RAM 536.

  Here, while the images of FIGS. 71A and 71B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the back image E of the normal RAM 536 is displayed from the character ROM 434. 71 (a) to 71 (b) are set so that the transfer to the area 536e can be completed. Thereby, while displaying the images of FIGS. 71A to 71B, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 71B to 71C and FIGS. 71C to 71A is converted into the normal video RAM 536. 71 (a) and (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and then used for normal use without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the back image E area 536e of the video RAM 536, the images in FIGS. 71 (b) to 71 (c) and 71 (c) to (a) are sequentially processed over time. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In addition, in each of the rear images prepared for each of “Super Reach A” to “Super Reach E”, which are five presentation modes for Super Reach, initial back images are set and selected by the player. When displaying the super reach of the aspect on the third display device 281, the display control device 314 displays the corresponding back image on the third display device 281 from the initial back image set as the back image.

  In addition, including the image data of the initial back image of the back image corresponding to each super reach mode, the image data of all images displayed as the back image within a predetermined time after the initial back image is displayed At the time of start-up, it is transferred to the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and made resident. As a result, even if the character ROM 734 is composed of the NAND flash memory 734a having a slow reading speed, the display of the rear image area of the resident video RAM 435 is started when the super-reach display of the mode selected immediately before by the player is started. By using the image data resident in 435c, the initial back image corresponding to the super-reach of the mode selected immediately can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and at least until a predetermined time elapses. Can display the back image on the 3rd symbol display device 281 using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Further, since only the image data of the rear image displayed within a predetermined time is stored in the resident video RAM 435, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 200 according to the fifth embodiment, the image data for the remaining back image is displayed while the back image is displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 536e of the normal RAM 536.

  Here, while the back image is displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the remaining back image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image of the normal RAM 536. The range of image data that is resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is set so that the transfer to the E area 536e can be completed. Thus, after the rear image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, it corresponds to the rear image stored in the rear image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 without delay. Using the image data, the remaining back images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Of the image data of the rear image corresponding to each of the rear B to the rear E and the super reach A to the super reach E, all of the image data not resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 are for normal use. It is stored only in the back image E area 536e of the video RAM 536. Here, in this embodiment, even if the rear image is changed, immediately after the change, the rear surface after the change to the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Since the image is displayed, the back image E of the normal video RAM 536 is displayed while the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. What is necessary is just to replace the image data of the back image after changing the area 536e. Therefore, even when only one area for storing the back image data is provided in the normal video RAM 536, the back image can be changed immediately. Further, this can suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the normal video RAM 536.

  On the other hand, the back image E area 536e is a dedicated area for storing only the image data of the back image and is not overwritten by other image data. Therefore, once image data of a predetermined back image is stored in the back image E area 436e, the image data of the back image data is continuously held until the back image is changed. Transfer can be minimized. Therefore, an increase in processing load in the display control device 314 can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. Similar to the ROM 432 in the fourth embodiment, the ROM 732 is a memory that is connected to the bus line 440 and stores various control programs executed by the MPU 431 and fixed value data. The effect execution time table storage area 732a is stored in the ROM 732. Have at least.

  In the effect execution time table storage area 732a, an effect execution time table describing the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for one effect is stored, similarly to the effect execution time table storage area 432a in the fourth embodiment. Area. This effect execution time table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect. For example, if there are 32 variable effect patterns set by the display variation pattern command, the effect execution time table for the variable effect is provided. One table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  This effect execution time table storage area 732a is a supermarket instead of the effect execution time table shown in FIG. 33 as an effect execution time table selected when a change effect with super reach is instructed by the display change pattern command. An effect execution time table describing the display of the super reach selection effect for selecting the reach effect mode is included.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72, details of the effect execution time table in which the display of the super reach selection effect for selecting the effect mode of super reach will be described. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect execution time table. Similar to the effect execution time table shown in FIG. 33, this effect execution time table defines the content of the image (display content) to be displayed at that time, corresponding to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. ing.

  In the example of the effect execution time table shown in FIG. 72, it is predetermined that the “normal reach” image is displayed after the time “0100H” (approximately 5 seconds) after the effect execution is started. An image data transfer command relating to the “reach selection effect” image is defined. As a result, the image data of the “super reach selection effect” image is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the image controller 437.

  Subsequently, in the effect execution time table, it is defined that the “super reach selection effect” image is displayed after the time “0200H” (about 10 seconds later) after the effect execution is started. The “super reach selection effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data of the “super reach selection effect” image previously transferred to and stored in the normal video RAM 536.

  In this “super reach selection effect”, the five effect modes “super reach A” to “super reach E” prepared for the super reach are explicitly displayed, and one effect mode among them is the subsequent super mode. An image that explicitly indicates that it is a candidate for an effect mode to be used in reach is displayed. It should be noted that at the stage where the “super reach selection effect” image is displayed after the time “0200H” (about 10 seconds later) after the start of the effect execution, an effect mode that “super reach A” uses in the subsequent super reach. It is explicitly shown that it is a candidate. Each time the frame button 222 is operated by the player, the candidates are “super reach A” → “super reach B” → “super reach C” → “super reach D” → “super reach E” → “ It is explicitly shown in the order of “super reach A” →.

  This “super reach selection effect” image is displayed from the start of the effect time until the time “0300H” (after about 15 seconds) according to the effect execution time table. Then, in the effect execution time table, after the time “0300H” from the start of the effect time (about 15 seconds later), the effect mode explicitly indicated by the super reach selection effect at the time “0300H” These candidates are defined so that super reach is displayed as the selected production mode. Thereby, the MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so that the super reach of the effect mode selected by the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  At this time, the back image corresponding to the super reach of the selected production mode is displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, even if the character ROM 734 is composed of the NAND flash memory 734a having a slow reading speed, the back image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode selected by the player can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281. it can.

  Further, in the effect execution time table, after the time “0300H” from the start of the effect time (about 15 seconds later), the super reach display in the selected effect mode and the “super reach back image” are related. An image data transfer command is defined. As a result of this transfer command, image data that is not resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 among the image data of the back image corresponding to the super reach of the selected rendering mode is the back image E of the normal video RAM 536. Transferred to area 536e.

  As described above, while the back image is displayed using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the remaining back image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 536. Since the range of the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is set so that the transfer to the back image E area 536e can be completed, it is stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. After the rear image is displayed using the image data thus obtained, the remaining rear images are sequentially used by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the rear image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 without delay. It can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  In the effect execution time table, the super reach is displayed in the selected effect mode until the “winning effect” image is displayed after the time “0600H” (about 30 seconds) after the effect execution is started. It is prescribed as follows. On the other hand, after a time “0400H” from the start of the effect execution (about 20 seconds later), an image data transfer command related to the “winning effect” image is defined, and a time “0500H” after the effect execution is started. Later (after about 25 seconds), an image data transfer command relating to the “round effect” image is defined. In response to these transfer instructions, the display control device 314 uses the image data transferred from the character ROM 734 to the normal video RAM 536 by the image controller 437 and stores the “winning effect” image and the “round effect” image in the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 281.

  Further, in the effect execution time table, after the time “0600H” from the start of the effect execution (after about 30 seconds), image data related to “normal rear image” is transferred in accordance with the completion of the super reach display. Directives are specified. By this transfer command, the image data of the back image (any one of the back B to the back E) corresponding to the stage set immediately before the super reach selection effect is displayed is transferred from the character ROM 734 to the back image E area 536e. And stored. If the stage set immediately before the super reach selection effect is displayed is “city street stage”, the image data of the back A, which is the corresponding back image, is all stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Since the image data is stored, the image data transfer process based on the image data transfer command related to the “normal rear image” is omitted.

  After the super reach display is completed, the back image corresponding to the stage set immediately before the super reach selection effect is displayed using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Are sequentially displayed from the initial position or the initial rear image, and when the rear image is any one of the rear B to the rear E, the resident video RAM 435 is controlled based on the image data transfer command related to the “normal rear image”. While the back image is displayed by the image data stored in the back image area 435c, the image data not stored in the back image area 435c among the displayed back images is displayed on the back of the normal video RAM 536. By transferring to the image E area 536e, the entire back image can be smoothly transferred without delay. 3 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 281.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The work RAM 733 is a memory that is connected to the bus line 440 and temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the MPU 431, similarly to the work RAM 633 of the fourth embodiment. The work RAM 733 includes at least a power-on image display flag 733a, a continuous notice count counter 733b, a continuous notice holding flag 733c, and a super reach type flag 733d. Among these, the power-on image display flag 733a, the continuous notice count counter 733b, and the continuous notice hold flag 733c are the same as the power-on image display flag 633a, the continuous notice count counter 633b, and the continuous notice hold flag 633c in the fourth embodiment. The description thereof is omitted.

  The super reach type flag 733d is a flag for storing the effect of the super reach selected by the player when the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 during the variation effect. In the super reach type flag 733d, information indicating the super reach production mode selected by the player is displayed as “super reach A”, “super reach B”, “super reach C”, “super reach D”, “ “Super Reach E” is set.

  That is, when “super reach A” is set in the super reach type flag 733d, it indicates that “super reach A” is selected as a super reach effect by the player, and “super reach” is set in the super reach type flag 733d. When “B” is set, it indicates that “super reach B” is selected by the player as an effect of super reach. When “super reach C” is set in the super reach type flag 733d, the player When “Super Reach C” is selected as the super reach performance mode, and “Super Reach D” is set in the super reach type flag 733d, “Super Reach D” is set as the super reach performance mode by the player. Is selected, and the super reach type flag 73 If the "super reach E" is set to d, it indicates that the "super reach E" is selected as the representation embodiment of super reach by the player.

  The super reach type flag 733d is set and updated by the super reach changing process (see FIG. 75) executed in the image drawing process (see FIG. 74). That is, if the super reach selection effect image is included in the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to the effect execution time table, if the display pointer at that time is “0200H”, the effect is displayed. Since the super reach selection effect image has started to be displayed, “super reach A” is set in the super reach type flag 733d (see S6203 in FIG. 75). In the super reach selection effect image, based on the super reach type flag 733d, “super reach A” is explicitly displayed as a candidate of the effect mode used in the super reach.

  If the frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button 222 is operated is turned on when the super reach selection effect image is included in the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, Reach type flag 733d is updated in the order of “super reach A” → “super reach B” → “super reach C” → “super reach D” → “super reach E” → “super reach A” →. (See S6205 in FIG. 75). In the super reach selection effect image, on the basis of the super reach type flag 733d, the effect modes used in the super reach are “super reach A” → “super reach B” → “super reach C” → “super reach D”. ”→“ Super Reach E ”→“ Super Reach A ”→...

  When the display of the super reach in the selected effect mode is defined by the effect execution time table, the effect mode indicated by the super reach type flag 733d, that is, selected by the player when the display is defined. The MPU 431 controls the image controller 437 so that the super reach is displayed in the rendered manner.

  In addition, if the instruction execution time table defines the image data transfer command regarding the “super reach back image” together with the super reach display in the selected effect mode, the MPU 431 transfers the super reach back image transfer. A setting process (see FIG. 79) is executed, and by this process, among the effect data indicated by the super reach type flag 733d, that is, among the image data of the back image of the super reach corresponding to the effect selected by the player, Image data that is not resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is transferred to the back image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536.

  Thus, after the rear image is displayed using the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the rear image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 is displayed. The remaining back images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using. While the back image is displayed using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the remaining back image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E of the normal RAM 536. Since the range of the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is set so that the transfer to the area 536e can be completed, the image data stored in the back image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 is stored. It is possible to display the rear image on the third symbol display device 281 without delay.

  Next, a command determination process (S2308) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2308). This command determination process (S2308) is the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 51) in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment). The commands stored in the command buffer area of the work RAM 733 are read in the order in which they are stored by external interrupt processing, and processing according to each command is executed.

  This command determination process is different from the command determination process (see FIG. 51) in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment) in that a process corresponding to the frame button operation command is added. Note that the other processes, that is, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are all the same as those of the command determination process in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  As described above, the frame button operation command is generated when the player operates the frame button 222 while the super-reach effect mode selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. This command is generated in the frame button input monitoring / production process (see S1906 in FIG. 42) executed by 313 and transmitted from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314.

  In this command determination process, if the command read from the command buffer area of the work RAM 733 is not an error command as a result of the process of S2417 (S2417: No), it is then determined whether or not the command is a frame button operation command ( S6001). If it is a frame button operation command (S6001: Yes), the frame button operation flag is turned on (S6002), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. If the result of the process of S6001 is not a frame button operation command, the process proceeds to S2419.

  The frame button operation flag is a flag that is provided in the work RAM 733 and indicates that the frame button 222 has been operated when the value is ON. This frame button operation flag is initialized to OFF in the initial setting process (see S2301 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 immediately after the power is turned on, and the voice lamp control device 313 receives the same as in the processes of S6001 and S6002. Set to ON when a frame button operation command is received. The frame button operation flag is referred to by a super reach change process which is one of the image drawing processes described later with reference to FIG. 75, and based on the value of the frame button operation flag, that is, the frame button by the player. Based on the presence / absence of the operation 222, the super reach type flag 733d is updated, and the effect mode candidate used in the super reach is changed (see S6205 in FIG. 75). Further, the frame button operation flag is set to OFF in the super reach changing process (see S6206 in FIG. 75).

  Next, an image drawing process (S2307) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the image drawing process (S2307). This image drawing process (S2307) is the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314, similarly to the image drawing process (see FIG. 52) in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment). The image controller 437 is instructed to draw an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and executed every 20 milliseconds.

  This image drawing process is different from the image drawing process in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment) (see FIG. 52) in that the display pointer of the effect execution time table during the change effect including the start of the change effect. The information described in the position is acquired (S2515), the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is specified from the acquired information at the time specified by the display pointer, and the drawing of the image is set (S2516). After that, the super reach change process (S6101) is executed, and the image transfer discrimination process (S6102) is executed instead of the processes of S2517 and S2518 following the super reach change process (S6101). is there. The other processes, that is, the processes in S2501 to S2516 and S2519 to S2527 are the same as the image drawing process in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 75, the super reach change process (S6101) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing this super reach change process (S6101). In the super reach changing process (S6101), as described above, the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 at the time specified by the display pointer is specified based on the effect execution time table in the image drawing process. When the super-reach selection effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the process executed after setting the drawing of the image (S2516), it is based on whether or not the player operates the frame button 222. , The production mode candidates used in super reach are updated.

  In this super reach changing process, first, it is determined whether or not a super reach selection effect image is included in the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 set by the process of S2516 of the image drawing process (see FIG. 52). It is determined (S6201). As a result, when the super reach selection effect image is included (S6201: Yes), it means that the super reach selection effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, the super reach type flag 733d is set and updated by the subsequent processes of S6202 to S6205.

  First, in the process of S6202, it is determined whether or not the display pointer provided in the work RAM 733 indicates “0200H” (S6202). If the display pointer indicates “0200H” (S6202: Yes), since the super reach selection effect image has begun to be displayed in one variation effect, the super reach type flag 733d indicates “super reach A”. Is set (see S6203), and the process proceeds to S6206. By the process of S6203, in the super reach selection effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 281, “super reach A” is explicitly displayed as the initial candidate of the effect mode used in the super reach.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S6202 that the display pointer does not indicate “0200H” (S6202: No), it is then determined whether or not the frame button operation flag provided in the work RAM 733 is ON. (S6204). If the frame button operation flag is on (S6204: Yes), this means that the player has operated the frame button 222, so the super reach type flag 733d is updated (S6205), and the process proceeds to S6206. Transition. In the update of the super reach type flag 733d in S6205, if the current value is “super reach A”, the value is changed to “super reach B”, and if the current value is “super reach B”, The value is changed to “Super Reach C”, and if the current value is “Super Reach C”, the value is changed to “Super Reach D”, and if the current value is “Super Reach D”, This is done by changing the value to “Super Reach A”.

  Thereby, in the super reach selection effect image, every time the player operates the frame button 222, the candidate of the effect mode to be used in the super reach is “super reach A” → “super reach B” → “super reach C”. ”→“ Super Reach D ”→“ Super Reach E ”→“ Super Reach A ”→...

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S6204 that the frame button operation flag is not on but off (S6204: No), this means that the player has not operated the frame button 222. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S6206. If it is determined that the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 does not include the super reach selection effect image by the process of S6201 (S6201: No), the super reach selection is performed on the third symbol display device 281. Since the effect is not displayed, the process proceeds to S6206 without setting and updating the super reach type flag 733d in S6202 to S6205.

  In the process of S6206, the frame button operation flag is set to OFF (S6206). Then, after the process of S6206, this super reach change process is terminated. Here, because of the branch of S6201: No, and subsequent to the process of S6203, the reason for executing the process of S6206 is that the super reach selection effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 due to the influence of noise or the like. If the frame button operation flag is set to ON at the stage where it is not displayed, or when the super reach selection effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 later, the player presses the frame button 222. This is in order to prevent a malfunction such as a renewal of an effect mode candidate used in super reach despite being not operated. Note that when the process of S6206 is executed due to the branch of S6204: No, the frame button operation flag is kept off.

  As described above, when the super-reach changing process is executed, when the player operates the frame button 222 while the super-reach selection effect image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, Thus, the production mode candidate to be used in the super reach is selected. Therefore, the player operates the frame button 222 while the super reach selection effect image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 281 to select the super reach of the desired effect mode, and the selected effect. The super reach can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in this manner.

  Next, the image transfer determination process (S6102) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control apparatus 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the image transfer determination process (S6102). As described above, the image transfer determination process (S6102) is a process executed after the super reach change process (S6101) is performed in the image drawing process. If it is included, the transfer target image instructed by the transfer command is discriminated, and the image transfer setting process to be executed in the normal image transfer command process described later with reference to FIG. 77 is determined.

  In this image transfer determination process, first, whether or not there is an image data transfer command in the information described in the display pointer position of the effect execution time table acquired by the process of S2515 of the image drawing process (see FIG. 74). If there is no image data transfer command (S6301: No), this image transfer determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an image data transfer command (S6301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the transfer command is a super reach back image transfer command used as a back image during super reach (S6302).

  As a result, if it is a super reach back image transfer command (S6302: Yes), the super reach back image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is set to ON (S6303), and the image transfer determination process is terminated. Here, the super reach back image transfer start flag is a flag indicating whether or not the image data corresponding to the super reach back image should be transferred from the character ROM 734 to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 536. In the case of a sound, this indicates that image data corresponding to the super reach back image should be transferred from the character ROM 734 to the back image E area 436e of the normal video RAM 536.

  This flag is initialized to OFF by the initial setting process (see S2301 in FIG. 50) executed in the main process (see FIG. 50) after the power is turned on, and the above-described S6302: Yes branch condition is satisfied. , S6303 is set to ON. Thereby, in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 77) described later, the super reach back image transfer setting process (see FIG. 79) is executed, and the effect mode indicated by the super reach type flag 733d is given to the image controller 437. Of the image data of the back image corresponding to the super reach, the transfer command is set so that the image data not stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is transferred to the back image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536. Is done.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 72, the super-reach back image transfer command is defined in the stage where the super-reach selection effect display on the third symbol display device 281 is completed in the effect execution time table. Therefore, the super reach presentation mode indicated by the super reach type flag 733d at the time when the super reach back image transfer setting process is executed is the period when the super reach selection effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. It is the production mode selected by the player. Therefore, the image data not stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 among the image data of the back image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode selected by the player is used as the back image E of the normal video RAM 536. It can be transferred to area 536e.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 72, in the effect execution time table, when the display of the super reach selection effect on the third symbol display device 281 is finished, the third super reach of the effect mode selected by the player is immediately after that. Although the display on the symbol display device 281 is instructed, using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, a back image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode selected immediately before by the player is displayed. It can be displayed immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 734 is composed of the NAND flash memory 734a having a slow reading speed, the rear image of the super reach in the effect mode selected immediately before by the player can be displayed immediately.

  Further, while the back image is displayed using the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the remaining back image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E of the normal RAM 536. The range of image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is set so that the transfer to the area 536e can be completed. Thus, after the rear image is displayed using the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, it corresponds to the rear image stored in the rear image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 without delay. Using the image data, the remaining back images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Note that the super reach back image transfer start flag is set to OFF when the super reach back image transfer setting process is executed (see S6601 in FIG. 79).

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing in S6302 that the image data transfer command acquired from the effect execution time table is not a super reach back image transfer command (S6302: No), then the transfer command is normal. It is determined whether or not it is a rear image transfer command (S6304). If it is determined that it is a normal back image transfer command (S6304: Yes), then the back image type stored in the work RAM 733 is read out by the processing of S2410 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 73). Then, it is determined whether or not the currently set rear image is “in town” (rear A) (S6305).

  As a result, if the back image is “in the town” (back A) (S6305: Yes), all image data corresponding to the back A is stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 536 is used. Since it is not necessary to transfer the image data to the rear image E area 536e, the image transfer determination process is terminated.

  In addition, as a result of the processing of S6305, not “in town” (back A), but “under the sea” (back B), “sky” (back C), “island” (back D), and “city” (back E) If it is any (S6305: No), the rear image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is turned on (S6306), and the image transfer determination process is terminated. The back image transfer start flag is the same as the back image transfer start flag provided in the work RAMs 433, 533, and 633 in the second to fourth embodiments.

  By this processing of S6303, the back image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 78) is executed in the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 77) described later, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 73) S2410 is performed on the image controller 437. Among the image data corresponding to the back image type stored in the work RAM 733 by the above processing, image data not stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area of the normal video RAM 436. The transfer command is set so as to transfer to 436e.

  Here, the normal back image transfer command is defined at the stage when the super reach display is completed, as shown in the effect execution time table of FIG. As a result, the third symbol display device 281 uses the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and corresponds to the stage set immediately before the super reach selection effect is displayed. The rear image (that is, the rear image corresponding to the rear image type stored in the work RAM 733 by the process of S2410 in the command determination process (see FIG. 73)) can be sequentially displayed from the initial position or the initial rear image. When the rear image is any one of the rear image B to the rear image E, the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is used to generate the rear image based on the image data transfer command related to the “normal rear image”. Among the displayed rear images, the rear image area 435 is displayed. The image data that is not stored by transferring to the back image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536, can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 smoothly without delay all back images.

  On the other hand, when the image data transfer command acquired from the effect execution time table is not the normal back image transfer command as a result of the processing of S6304 (S6304: No), the transfer command is a transfer of image data other than the back image. Since this is a command, the image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is turned on, the transfer target image type designated by the transfer command is stored in the work RAM 733 (S6307), and the image transfer determination process is terminated. . Note that the image transfer start flag is the same as the image transfer start flag provided in the work RAMs 433, 533, and 633 in the second to fourth embodiments.

  With this processing of S6307, image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 66) is executed in normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 77) described later, and image data corresponding to the transfer target image is sent to the character ROM 734 to the image controller 437. Is set to transfer to the normal video RAM 536.

  Next, normal image transfer command processing (S2603) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer command processing (S2603). This normal image transfer command processing (S2603) is the same as the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55) in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment), and is executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314. This is a process for transferring image data to be stored in the normal video RAM 436 from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, which is executed in the process (see FIG. 54A).

  This normal image transfer command processing is different from the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 55) in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment) in that the back image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is on. The content of the back image transfer setting process (S2808) executed when it is determined (S2807: Yes) is partially different. Further, when it is determined that the back image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is not on but off (S2807: No), the super reach back image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is on. (S6401), if the result is that the super reach back image transfer start flag is on (S6401: Yes), the super reach back image transfer setting process (S6402) is executed and the process proceeds to S2809. If the super reach rear image transfer start flag is not on but off (S6401: No), the normal image transfer command processing is terminated as it is, and the normal image in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment) is terminated. This is different from the transfer command processing (see FIG. 55).

  Now, with reference to FIG. 78, the rear image transfer setting process (S2808) will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the rear image transfer setting process (S2808) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control apparatus 314. In this rear image transfer setting process, as in the rear image transfer setting process (see FIG. 58) in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment), the rear image corresponding to the rear image type to be transferred is set as the transfer target image. In addition, the rear image E area 436e is set as the designated storage area.

  In this rear image transfer setting process, first, the rear image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is set to OFF (S3101), and then the rear image E area 536e provided in the normal video RAM 536 is set as the designated storage area. Setting is performed (S3102). The processing of S3101 and S3102 is the same as the processing of S3101 and S3102 of the back image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 58) in the fourth embodiment (second embodiment).

  After the processing of S3102, the back image type stored in the work RAM 733 is read out by the processing of S2410 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 51), and the back image corresponding to the back image type is set as the transfer target image. (S6501), the rear image transfer setting process is terminated. Accordingly, if the back image indicated by the back image type is “underwater” (back B), “underwater” (back B) is set as the transfer target image, and the back image indicated by the back image type is “sky”. If it is (Back C), “Sky” (Back C) is set as the transfer target image, and if the back image indicated by the back image type is “Island” (Back D), “Island” is used as the transfer target image. When (Back D) is set and the back image indicated by the back image type is “Urban” (Back E), “Urban” (Back E) is set as the transfer target image.

  Therefore, the image data of the back image set as the transfer target image by the processing of S6501 by the processing of S2809 of the normal image transfer command processing (see FIG. 77) is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. No image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the super reach back image transfer setting process (S6402) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this super reach rear image transfer setting process (S6402). As described above, this super reach back image transfer setting process is determined in the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 77) that the super reach back image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is on. In this process, the back image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode selected by the player is set as the transfer target image, and the back image E area 436e is set as the designated storage area.

  In this super reach back image transfer setting process, first, the super reach back image transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 733 is set to OFF (S6601), and then the back image E area 536e provided in the normal video RAM 536 is set. The designated storage area is set (S6602). Then, the super reach back image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode indicated by the super reach type flag 733d is set as the transfer target image (S6603), and the super reach back image transfer setting process is ended.

  Thus, if the super reach type flag 733d is “super reach A”, the back image corresponding to the super reach A is set as the transfer target image, and if the super reach type flag 733d is “super reach B”, If the back image corresponding to reach B is set as the transfer target image and the super reach type flag 733d is “super reach C”, the back image corresponding to super reach C is set as the transfer target image, and the super reach type flag is set. If 733d is “super reach D”, the back image corresponding to super reach D is set as the transfer target image.

  Then, by the process of S2809 of the normal image transfer command process (see FIG. 77), among the image data of the super reach back image set as the transfer target image by the process of S6603, it resides in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. The image data that has not been transferred is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the rear image E area 436e of the normal RAM 436.

  As described above, the super reach presentation mode indicated by the super reach type flag 733d at the time when the super reach back image transfer setting process is executed is a period in which the super reach selection effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. It is an effect mode selected by the player. Therefore, the image data not stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 among the image data of the back image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode selected by the player is used as the back image E of the normal video RAM 536. It can be transferred to area 536e.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 in the fifth embodiment, in addition to the “city stage”, the “underwater stage”, and the “empty stage”, the “island stage” and the “urban stage” are prepared as the stages. When “Island Stage” is selected by the player by operating the button 222, a back side D in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with the passage of time is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as a back side image. When the “urban stage” is selected by the person, the back side E on which the person on the image changes as time passes is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 as the back side image. Here, when the stage is changed to “island stage” or “city stage” by the player operating the frame button 222, the display control device 314 first displays the rear image area of the resident video RAM 435 in advance when the power is turned on. Using the image data resident in 435c, the rear image (rear surface D or E) of the selected stage is converted into an initial rear surface image (FIG. 70 (a) or FIG. 71 (a) preset for the rear image. )). Thus, even when the NAND flash memory 734a having a slow reading speed is used as the character ROM 734, the back image corresponding to the stage after the change is immediately displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 222 by the player. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 281.

  Further, while the back image of the stage selected by the player is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the back image area Image data not resident in 453c is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 536e of the normal RAM 536. Here, while displaying the back image using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the transfer from the character ROM 434 to the back image E area 536e of the normal RAM 536 can be completed. A range of image data resident in the back image area 435c is set. Thus, while the rear image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c, image data not resident in the rear image area 453c is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the rear image E area 536e of the normal RAM 536. Since the rear image is displayed using the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the image data stored in the rear image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 is displayed without delay. The remaining back images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 200 in the fifth embodiment, when super reach is displayed in the changing effect on the third symbol display device 281, the super reach effect modes are five effect modes “super reach A”. The third symbol display device is configured so that the player can select from among “Super Reach E” by operating the frame button 222 by the player, and in accordance with the super-reach production mode selected by the player The rear image displayed on 281 is changed. Here, for each back image corresponding to each super reach mode, image data of all images displayed as back images within a predetermined time after the initial back image set for the back image is displayed. When the power is turned on, it is transferred to the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and is resident. As a result, even if the character ROM 734 is composed of the NAND flash memory 734a having a slow reading speed, when the display of the super reach in the mode selected by the player is started, the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is displayed. By using the resident image data, it is possible to immediately display the initial back image corresponding to the super reach of the aspect selected immediately before by the player on the 3rd symbol display device 281 and at least the predetermined time. Until the time elapses, the back image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Further, since only the image data of the rear image displayed within a predetermined time is stored in the resident video RAM 435, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, while the back image is displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the remaining back image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image E of the normal RAM 536. Transferred to area 536e. Here, while the back image is displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the remaining back image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the back image of the normal RAM 536. The range of image data that is resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is set so that the transfer to the E area 536e can be completed. Thus, after the rear image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, it corresponds to the rear image stored in the rear image E area 536e of the normal video RAM 536 without delay. Using the image data, the remaining back images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187, reads the image data from the character ROM 187, and transfers the image data to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the MPU 181 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 187, and the image controller 181 receives the transfer command and transfers the image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. You may go. In this case, the image data is stored in the address of the character ROM 187 storing the image data to be transferred, the transfer destination video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190), and the transfer destination video RAM. The power address is specified in the transfer command transmitted by the MPU 181, and the image controller 188 reads the image data stored in the address position of the character ROM 187 specified by the transfer command, and specifies the specified transfer destination. The read image data may be stored in a designated address area of the video RAM. In this case, the image controller 188 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 187 in the buffer RAM 188a. When the image controller 188 does not use the transfer destination video RAM, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is stored. May be stored in the video RAM of the transfer destination.

  On the other hand, in the second or third embodiment, the MPU 431 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 437, and the image controller 431 receives the transfer command from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or Although the case where image data is transferred to the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the MPU 431 may directly access the character ROM 434, read image data from the character ROM 434, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, 536. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 431 from the character ROM 434 is temporarily stored in the buffer ROM 437a, and then the MPU 431 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436, 536 is unused. If it is determined that it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer ROM 437a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436, 536.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 and 536 is unused is determined by the image controller 437 accessing the resident video RAM 435 (that is, in use). Resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 437 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 434 and 536. (Not shown) may be provided in the image controller 437 so that the MPU 431 confirms an access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the resident video RAM 435 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 437 and the normal video RAM 436, 536 is monitored by the MPU 431, and the state of the signal is determined. It may be confirmed whether the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 437 starts access to the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 and 536, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 437 notifies the MPU 431 of the information as needed. The MPU 431 may determine whether or not the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 are unused based on the notification.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 437 scans the third symbol display device 281, whether the scanning is during the blank period (see FIG. 11), the MPU 431 confirms the driving state of the image controller 437, or the image Ascertained by a notification from the controller 437, if the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 435, 436, 536 is unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 281 of the image controller 437 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the image controller 437 is not in use. Therefore, the determination can be easily performed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not manage the video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 436 and 536, but instead manage the video RAMs 189 and 389. In the address system used in common with 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436, and 536, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 189 or 435 or normal video RAM 190, 436 or 536) to be accessed from the MPUs 181 and 431 to the image controllers 188 and 437. By simply designating an address, the image controllers 188 and 437 determine whether the area designated by the address is for the resident video RAM 189 and 435 or the normal video RAM 190, 436 and 536. Can do. That is, when the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM are designated from the MPUs 181 and 431 to the image controllers 188 and 437, the address set in the common address system is simply designated. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of an instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the second embodiment, in the transfer instruction of the image data transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437, transfer destination information (transfer to the resident video RAM 189, 435, or the normal video RAM 190, 436, 536). In this case, it is only necessary to specify the transfer destination address using the address set in the common address system without including the transfer address, so that the configuration of the transfer instruction can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 have been described as being directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) to which the MPUs 181 and 431 and the image controller are connected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 may be directly connected to the image controllers 188 and 437. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or image via the bridge circuit. It may be provided connected to the controllers 188 and 437. By providing this bridge circuit, an existing image controller 188, 437 or an internal bus (bus line 440) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as a character ROM can be used as it is, and a NAND flash memory can be used. Character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 constituted by 187a, 434a, and 734a can be connected. Even if the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 are connected via the image controllers 188 and 437 and a bridge circuit, the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 may be directly accessible from the MPUs 181 and 431.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 are configured by the NAND flash memories 187a, 434a, and 734a has been described. You may comprise by memory | storage means, for example, a hard disk. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control devices 81 and 314 have the configuration described in the above embodiments, so that an image can be displayed at a time when it is desired to be displayed. Can be displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described. It may be provided directly connected to an internal bus (bus line 440) to which the controllers 188 and 437 are connected. When the character ROMs 187, 434, 734 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188, 437 via a bridge circuit, the resident video RAMs 189, 435 may be connected to the bridge circuit. Good. If the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the bridge circuit, the existing image controllers 188 and 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) are not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435. However, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 can be easily provided in the display control devices 81 and 314.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 189, 435 and one normal video RAM 190, 436, 536 are provided in the display control devices 81, 314 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is limited to this. However, more video RAMs may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436, and 536 are configured by a single-port DRAM (one input / output port) has been described. However, a multiport RAM may be used instead.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436, and 536 are configured by different memories has been described. The area may be divided into a resident area and a normal area, and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 189 and 435 and the normal video RAM 190 436 and 536 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type is appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281. It may be done. In this case, an image corresponding to an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 101 or the sound lamp control device 313 or other input from the outside. Preferably, the data is resident at least in the resident video RAM 189,435.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 187, 434, 734 is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, 435 and is made resident, but the character ROM 187, 434, 734 All the image data may be transferred to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROMs 187, 434, 734 in the resident video RAMs 189, 435, the normal video RAMs 190, 436 are drawn images obtained by drawing by the image controllers 188, 437. It may be used as a dedicated memory for storing data.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the contents of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are not overwritten while the power is turned on and is retained is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data to be resident in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 is greatly different based on the command received from the control device 313. May be overwritten and updated. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 is changed. The image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 189 and 435 when the power is turned on, and is not updated when the other resident image is updated, but is held in the resident video RAM 189 and 435. You may keep going. While displaying the transition image, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a. Thus, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be transferred while they are not being used (that is, during a period when image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 transmit image data transfer commands to be newly resident to the image controllers 188 and 437, and the image controllers 188 and 437 follow the transfer commands. Image data to be resident is read from the character ROMs 187, 434, 734, and the resident video RAMs 189, 435 are not being used via the buffer RAMs 188a, 437a (that is, a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Middle).

  When the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is previously transferred from the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 to the normal video RAMs 190, 436, and 536, and the normal video RAMs 190, 436 and 436 are transferred. The transition image may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281 using the image data stored in 536. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734, read out the image data to be newly resident, and read the read image data through the buffer RAM 188a. May be transferred. Alternatively, the image controllers 188 and 437 that have received a transfer instruction for image data to be resident from the MPUs 181 and 431 access the character ROMs 187, 434 and 734, read out the image data to be newly resident, and read the read image data. Alternatively, the data may be transferred via the buffer RAM 188a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a are provided in the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 440). When the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188 and 437 via a bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, image data can be transferred from the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the bus (bus line 440).

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a is one block of the NAND flash memories 187a, 434a, and 734a has been described. It may be. For example, among the scanning period of the display screen included in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 281, a period during which a blank area that is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed is scanned (blank period) ), The storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190, 436, and 536. As a result, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 188a, 437a to the resident video RAM 189, 435 or the normal video RAM 190, 436, 536 is not performed in each video RAM 189, 190, 435, 436, 536 that occurs during this blank period. This can be done reliably by using the period of use.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 188a, 437a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one buffer RAM, it is stored in the resident video RAM 189 and 435 or the normal video RAM 190 436 and 536 from another buffer RAM. The image data may be transferred. The image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROMs 187, 434, and 734 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from another area to the resident video RAM 189 435 or the normal video RAM 190 436 536. In any case, the image data read from the character ROMs 187, 434, 734 is written to the buffer RAM, and the resident video RAMs 189, 435 or the normal video RAM 190, the image data written to the buffer RAM are stored. Since the transfer to 436 and 536 can be processed in parallel, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 after power-on has been described. The image data corresponding to the image may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used to display the main image at power-on on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the resident video RAM 189 is resident from the character ROM 187. Image data to be transferred can be transferred. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 189. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the second to fifth embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is supplied from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 and the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on. Although the case of transferring to the time-varying image area 435b has been described, the main image at power-on and the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 434, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, 536 after power-on. Also good. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 436, 536 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281 while the character is displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred from the ROMs 434 and 734 to the resident video RAM 435. During this time, since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 435, image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434, 734 to the resident video RAM 435 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 435. Data transfer can be completed quickly and processing can be simplified.

  In the first embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the main image area 189a at power-on of the resident video RAM 189 via the buffer RAM 188a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image is not resident from the character ROM 187 via the buffer RAM 188a. The video RAM 189 may be directly transferred to the main image area 189a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after power-on, and auxiliary display is performed using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190. The image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 by displaying the main image when the power is turned on in the unit 65. In this case, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character RAM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without going through the buffer RAM 188a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 188a.

  Similarly, in the second to fifth embodiments, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROMs 434 and 734 to the resident video RAM 435 through the buffer RAM 437a. In the above description, the image data is read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred. Since it is not performed, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROMs 434 and 734 to the power-on main image area 435a and power-on variation of the resident video RAM 435 without passing through the buffer RAM 437a. Transfer directly to image area 435b Good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROMs 434 and 734 to the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 after power-on, and the power-on stored in the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 is stored. Image data to be resident from the character ROMs 434 and 734 to the resident video RAM 435 is displayed by displaying the power-on image on the 3rd symbol display device 281 using image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on variation image. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 435 during the transfer, the image data to be resident is directly transferred from the character RAM 434, 734 to the resident video RAM 435 without passing through the buffer RAM 437a. May be. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 437a.

  In the first embodiment, the display control device 81 has been described with respect to changing the rear image displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101. In addition to this, Alternatively, an operation button that can change the back image of the auxiliary display unit 65 by the player is provided in the slot machine 10, and the back image is changed when the operation button is operated by the player. May be. Specifically, when an operation button is operated by the player, an output signal output from the operation button is input to the input / output port 186 of the display control device 81, and the MPU 181 receives an input from the operation button. When the player confirms that the operation button has been operated, the back image is determined to be changed, and image data corresponding to the back image to be displayed after the change stored in the back image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189 is obtained. It may be used to instruct the image controller 188 to draw an image. Accordingly, after the player operates the operation button, the rear image after the change is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data stored in the rear image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189. be able to. Therefore, even when the character ROM 187 is configured using the NAND flash memory 187a having a reading speed, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the changed rear image in response to the player's operation immediately. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second to fifth embodiments, when the frame button 222 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 313, and the display control device 314 displays the back surface change command. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the effect of super reach are changed based on the image change command and the frame button operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 313 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 310, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 314, based on the back image change command or the game state command, the back image or the super reach effect mode can be changed according to the game state. In addition, the display control device 314 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 200 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. If the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c.

  Further, the display control device 314 may not only change the rear image based on the rear image change command but also change the rear image according to the effect execution time table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 in accordance with a transfer command described in the effect execution time table. In this case, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer command described in the effect execution time table, the back image E areas 436e and 536e of the normal video RAM 436 and 536 may be set as the designated storage area. Other areas may be set as the designated storage area. Further, the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 may be provided with a back image H area and set as a designated storage area. If image data of the back image is transferred in accordance with the transfer command described in the effect execution time table, the image stored in the back image E areas 436e and 536e can be set by setting other than the back image E areas 436e and 536e. Since the data is retained, for example, even when the back image is temporarily changed to a special image by the effect execution time table, the back image is changed to a normal back image (back B, C in FIG. 31, FIG. 70). When returning to the back surface D of FIG. 71 or the back surface E) of FIG. 71, it is not necessary to transfer image data corresponding to the normal back image to the back image E areas 436e and 536e. Therefore, an increase in processing load of the display control device 314 can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, when the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the main controller 101 and a sensor error is detected by the main controller 101, the error command Is transmitted to the display control device 81 so that the display control device 81 immediately displays an error message on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 detects a sensor error. When it is configured to detect presence / absence and a sensor error is detected in the display control device 81 You may immediately display the error message to the auxiliary display unit 65 by using the image data that has been resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM189. As a result, transmission / reception of an error command from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 is not necessary, so that an error message can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 earlier.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, when an output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the sound lamp control device 313 and a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 313, an error command is sent to the display control device 314. The case has been described in which the display control device 314 immediately displays an error message on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an error command for inputting the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 to the main control device 310, detecting a vibration error in the main control device 310, and notifying the error from the main control device 310. Is transmitted to either the audio lamp control device 313 or the display control device 314. It may be. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313, the sound lamp control device 313 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 314 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the display control device 314, and the display control device 314 is configured to detect the presence / absence of a vibration error. An error message may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data resident in the error message image area 435f of the video RAM 435. As a result, transmission / reception of an error command from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314 becomes unnecessary, so that an error message can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 earlier.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor 428 or together with the vibration sensor 428, a magnet sensor is used as the game board. It may be attached to the back surface of 213. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 310, the sound lamp control device 313, and the display control device 314. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 310, if the main controller 310 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314 via the sound lamp control device 313 or directly. In addition, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 313, if it is determined that the sound lamp control device 313 applies a magnetic field to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314. Then, in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 310 or the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 313 displays an error message image informing the magnetic field error resident in the error message image area 435f. The error message image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 using the corresponding image data. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the display control device 314 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313. May display the error message image on the third symbol display device 218 using image data corresponding to the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error resident in the error message image area 435f. Accordingly, when the display control device 314 receives the error command from the main control device 310 or the sound lamp control device 313 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 434, Even when the 734 is composed of NAND flash memories 434a and 734a, an error message image that notifies a magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 425. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 281. Can be deterred.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 are driven by the display control device 81 has been described. You may comprise so that it may drive by the audio | voice lamp control apparatus provided separately from the display control apparatus 81 to drive. In this case, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received by the sound lamp control device, and the display control device 81 is based on the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device based on the command from the main control device 101. The auxiliary display unit 64 may be controlled. Further, the command transmitted from the main control device 101 may be received by the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may transmit the command to the sound lamp control device in accordance with the received command. By separately providing a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 and an audio lamp control device for driving the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64, the display control device 81 can concentrate on driving control of the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the auxiliary display unit 65 can execute more diverse and complicated image display, and can increase the interest of the player.

  In the first embodiment described above, the configuration including only one type of BB winning is described as a winning mode in which a privilege to shift to the bonus state when the winning is established, but includes a plurality of types of state shifting winning combinations. It is good also as a structure. Further, the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state may be set to a different value depending on the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved. That is, in the process of S604 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), the value set in the remaining payout counter may be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which a winning is achieved. In addition, in the process of S606 of the bonus state process (see FIG. 17), when the state command meaning that the game is a BB game is set, the type of the state transition winning combination in which the winning is achieved is also set. May be. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 81, the effect performed by the auxiliary display part 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 can be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established.

  In the first embodiment, a case has been described where the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state that is shifted to when the BB winning is established is set to 250 (setting of the remaining payout counter in S604 in FIG. 17). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the value set as the medal payout total number (remaining payout number) may be an arbitrary number within a range determined by law or the like.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the JAC game that is performed when the gaming state is in the bonus state, the case where the winning probability of the watermelon winning and the bell winning as the small role winning is set higher than in the general gaming state will be described. However, the winning probability of either the watermelon winning or the bell winning may be set higher than that in the general gaming state. In addition, each winning probability in the bonus state may be determined so that the degree of increase in the winning probability of the watermelon winning with a large number of medal payouts is larger than that of the bell winning. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game can be increased, so that the player can receive a large number of medals with a small number of medals. Further, since medals can be paid out for the total number of medals paid out in a short time, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased also for the hall side. In addition, a bonus-only winning mode that is established only when the gaming state is in the bonus state is set, and the number of medals to be paid out is set to be larger, and the winning probability of the bonus-only winning mode is set higher than other winning modes in the bonus state. You may comprise. Furthermore, winning establishment of this bonus exclusive winning mode may be performed only in the case of three. Thereby, even if it is a case where a bonus game can be performed by 1 or 2 sheets, it is possible for a player to perform a bonus game by 3 sheets.

  In the first embodiment, only when the game is played with one or two medals, that is, when the game is played with one or two medals, the Cherry Bell prize, which is a special small role prize, is won. Although the case where the lottery table is set so as to be established has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the game is played with three medals inserted, that is, the game is played with three In this case, the lottery table may be set so that a cherry bell winning is established. When a game is played with three cards and a Cherry Bell winning is achieved, the number of medals paid out may be three or any other number. Further, the winning probability of winning the cherry bell when the game is played with three cards may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB winning, watermelon winning, bell winning, and replay winning. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the Cherry Bell winning is a special small role winning because it is difficult to be established when three Cherry Bell winnings are made.

  Similarly, in the first embodiment, the case where the lottery table is set so that the 7-bell winning, which is a special small role winning, is established only when the game is played by one piece is described. The lottery table may be set so that a 7-bell prize is established even when a game is played with two or three cards. When a 7-bel prize is established by playing a game with two or three, the number of medals paid out may be two or any other number. If a 7-bell prize is established when two cards are used, it is more preferable to set the medal payout number to three. This is because the player can play another game using the three medals, so that the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. . Also, the winning probability of winning 7 bells when a game is played with 3 cards may be set by a lottery table so as to be smaller than other BB winnings, watermelon winnings, bell winnings, and replay winnings. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that a 7-bell prize is won when three cards are put on, so that it is a special small role prize. On the other hand, the winning probability of winning 7 bells when playing a game with 2 cards, together with other winnings including the Cherry Bell prize, is such that the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game is less than 2. It is preferable to be set by a lottery table.

  In the first embodiment, when a game is played with one or two cards, when a watermelon prize or bell prize, which is a normal small part prize, is established, three medal payouts are given as the medal payout number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other medal payout numbers may be set. In this case, different medal payout numbers may be set for the watermelon win medal payout number and the bell win medal payout number. Further, as the number of medals to be paid out for a watermelon winning or a bell winning at the time of 1 or 2 sheets, a number larger than the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set. Thereby, when a game is played with one or two cards, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting the formation of a watermelon prize or a bell prize in which many medals are paid out. In addition, a multiple of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set as the number of medals to be paid out for a watermelon win or a bell win at the time of 1 or 2 wins. As a result, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, a medals can be obtained simply by playing a game (three-game game) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be paid out as a result of establishing a BB prize is obtained. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game until the end without leaving extra medals. Also, as the number of medals to be paid out for the watermelon winning or the bell winning at the time of 1 or 2 sheets, 12 and 6 sheets may be set as in the case of 3 sheets. Thereby, since it is not necessary to change the medal payout number according to the number of bets, an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In addition, the watermelon winning medal payout number may be set differently for the case of 1-sheet and 2-sheet, and similarly, the case of 1-sheet and the number of 2-sheets Depending on the case, the number of medals to be paid out for the Bell prize may be set to a different number. Further, the medal payout number of at least one of the watermelon winning and the bell winning at the time of putting one may be set to two. Accordingly, the player can enjoy another game while expecting the completion of the Cherry Bell prize in which the two medals are inserted and another three medals are paid out. The winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game with respect to the number of medals inserted is less than 100% when one or two is multiplied. desirable. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a game is played with one or two cards, and three medals are paid out when a Cherry Bell winning is achieved. In this case, as a medal payout number, a multiple (for example, 6 or 9) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set. . Even after this, if the Cherry Bell prize is established, the player can consume the medals simply by playing a game (three-game game) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected with the establishment of the BB prize is high. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the number of medals to be paid out when a Cherry Bell winning is established at the time of placing one is set to two. As a result, the player can enjoy another game while inserting the two medals and expecting the completion of the Cherry Bell prize in which three more medals are paid out, without leaving any extra medals. You can enjoy the game to the end. In these cases, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number in one game to the medal inserted number is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case is described in which a game is played with one piece and a 7-bell prize is established, so that two medals are paid out, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, as a medal payout number in this case, a multiple (for example, 3, 6, 9, etc.) of the maximum bet number (3 in the first embodiment) may be set. As a result, if a 7-bell prize is established, the medals will be consumed just by playing a game (a game with 3 cards) with the maximum number of bets that can be expected to be paid out for many medals after the BB prize is established. Since it is possible, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. In this case as well, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the first embodiment, when a single-game is played, whether or not to win the Cherry Bell or 7 Bell is selected as a candidate for the winning role. Although a case where two medal payouts are made when a 7-bell prize is made has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. If a 7-bell prize is established, 3 medals may be paid out. As a result, when the Cherry Bell winning is achieved, two medals are paid out, so the player inserts the two medals and expects the Cherry Bell winning that three medals are paid out. However, another game can be enjoyed, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving extra medals. In addition, when the 7-bell prize is established, three medals are paid out, so that the player can play another game while inserting the three medals and expecting the BB prize to be established. Yes, you can enjoy the game to the end without leaving extra medals. On the other hand, when a game is played with one piece, it may be configured to determine whether or not only a cherry bell winning is made. As a result, in any case where the number of bets is 1 to 3, 7-bel prize winning is not included as a winning combination, so the index value IV = 5 can be omitted from the lottery table, and the lottery storing the lottery table The storage capacity of the table storage area 105a can be reduced and the processing load of the lottery process can be reduced. In this case, if the number of medals to be paid out when the cherry bell winning is established is set to three, the three medals to be paid out when the cherry bell winning is established, and the player Furthermore, another game can be performed while expecting the establishment of the BB prize, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without extra medals. Also, if the number of medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established is set to two, the two medals to be paid out when the Cherry Bell winning is established, and the player further adds three medals. While expecting the completion of the Cherry Bell prize where medals are paid out, another game can be enjoyed, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving any extra medals. In these cases, it is desirable that the winning probability of each winning mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number in one game to the medal inserted number is less than 100%. Further, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%. For example, when a special child role prize for one player does not include a 7-bell prize and only a cherry-bell prize is supported, if the number of medals to be paid out in the cherry-bell prize is set to 3, the winning probability is about 3 It may be set to 1/6, and when the number of medals paid out in the Cherry Bell prize is set to 2, the winning probability may be set to about 1/2.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery table, any one of BB winning, watermelon winning, bell winning, cherry bell winning, 7 bell winning and replay winning is assigned as a winning manner corresponding to the index value IV. In the lottery, the case where any one of these winning modes is set as the winning combination has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a plurality of these winning modes can be selected for one index value IV. When the winning mode is assigned and the winning is confirmed at the one index value IV, a plurality of winning modes assigned to the one index value IV may be simultaneously set as the winning combination. For example, by assigning a BB prize and a Bell prize to one index value IV, a BB prize and a Bell prize may be simultaneously set as a winning combination, or a watermelon prize and a replay prize are assigned to one index value IV. May be assigned as a winning combination at the same time. Here, when a BB winning that is carried over to the next game when a winning is not established and another winning mode (for example, a bell winning) that is not carried over to the next game are set as a winning combination at the same time, The sliding table corresponding to another winning mode (bell winning) that cannot be carried over may be preferentially stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. As a result, it is possible to establish a winning establishment in the other winning modes, and it is possible to carry over the BB winning to the next game and establish a winning establishment. In addition, if a watermelon prize and a replay prize are set at the same time as a winning combination, a slide table is prepared so that either the watermelon prize or the replay prize stops on the active line. You may make it store in the storage area 106b. As the sliding table, the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning that is more advantageous to the player than the replay winning can be stopped from the reaching symbol that has reached the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. If the stop mode is defined to stop at the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning, and the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning cannot be stopped, the stop is stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the replay winning. It is good to use what the aspect was prescribed | regulated. As a result, a watermelon winning that is more advantageous to the player than a replay winning is established as much as possible, and if a watermelon winning cannot be achieved, a replay winning can be established. In this case, the player can replay without medal insertion.

  In the first embodiment, when a game is played with one card and a 7-bell prize is established and two medals are paid out, the gaming state of the slot machine 10 remains in the general gaming state. The game state of the slot machine 10 may be shifted to the special game state when two cards are played when a game is played with a stack and a 7-bell prize is established and two medals are paid out. And, when the game state is shifted to the 2-game special game state, the lottery table may be configured so that the winning probability of the cherry bell winning mode at the time of 2-game play is set higher than that in the general game state. Good. As a result, when two medals are paid out by winning a 7-bell prize when one card is put, the player inserts the two medals and is strong in establishing a Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out. You can enjoy another game while expecting it.

  In the first embodiment, when the player is in the general gaming state, the prescribed number of medals bet is set to 1 to 3 and corresponds to either 1 or 2 or 3 The case where the game is configured to start has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The prescribed number of medals bet is set to 1 and 3, and 1 and 3 are multiplied. Only in response to this, the game may be configured to start. As a result, if two medals remain at the player's hand, the player expects that the player will be able to pay out three medals when the Cherry Bell prize is established, and the remaining medals are inserted one by one. And you can entertain a total of at least two games.

  Also, not only in the general gaming state, but also in the bonus state, the prescribed number of medals bet is set to 1 to 3 and can be used for 1-, 2-, 3- The game may be started. Alternatively, even in the bonus state, the prescribed number of medals bet may be set to 1 and 3 and the game may be started in response to 1 and 3 medals. . If a bonus game is played with 1 or 2 cards, the lottery table should be configured so that the winning probability of the Cherry Bell and 7 Bell winnings is set low or the winning probability is zero. Also good. In addition, the lottery table may be configured so that the winning probability of the watermelon winning or the bell winning in the case of 1 and 2 is higher than the winning probability in the general gaming state. In addition, the number of medal payouts for watermelon winning or bell winning for 1 and 2 wins may be set to be larger than the number of medal payouts (3) in the general gaming state. However, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out for each winning mode are set so that the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game in the case of one and two bonuses in the bonus state is smaller than the expected value in the case of three cards. May be set. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the bonus game with three pieces as much as possible. Further, the winning probability and the medal payout number corresponding to each winning mode when the game is played with one or two in the bonus state may be set to be the same as in the general gaming state. In this case, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game to the number of bets is less than 100% for both 1 and 2 medals, so when the game is repeated with 1 or 2 medals, the number of medals However, it decreases. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a bonus game with three cards.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the game is configured not to be limited to the remaining number of medals at hand of the player but to be able to play by one and two in the general gaming state has been described. This is not necessarily limited to this, and only when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is less than three, the winning mode and the winning probability of the first embodiment are multiplied by one and two. Alternatively, the game may be played with the medal payout number. For example, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when determining whether or not the bet number is a specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is confirmed, and the value is 3 If this is the case, by setting the specified number of bets to 3, the game can be played only by multiplying 3 cards. If the value of the credit counter is less than 3, the specified number of bets is set to 1 and By setting the number to two, the game may be performed with the winning mode, the winning probability, and the medal payout number of the first embodiment by multiplying by 1 and by 2. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, the game can always be played with only three medals, so that the medals are consumed quickly and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall can be reliably increased. . On the other hand, if there are fewer than three virtual medals, use one or two medals to win a Cherry Bell prize where three medals are paid out or a 7 bell prize where two medals are paid out. Since the player can aim and play the game, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without leaving an extra.

  In the first embodiment, not only the remaining number of medals at the player's hand, but also in the general gaming state, the winning mode, winning probability and medal payout number of games that are played by 1 and 2 are fixed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when it is determined that there is a start command in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter (that is, the number of virtual medals) immediately before the start command is temporarily held in the RAM 106. In the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when the one-sheet lottery table (see S406) or the two-sheet lottery table (see S405) is set, or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), the payout determination When performing the process (see S513), if the number of virtual medals immediately before the start command stored temporarily is three or more, the medal payout per game with one or two medals The winning mode, winning so that the expected value of the number is smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, winning probability and medal payout number shown in FIG. The rate and medal payout number may also be set. In this case, the expected value may be reduced by setting the winning probability of the Cherry Bell winning or the 7 Bell winning when the game is played with one or two cards. As a result, when there are three or more virtual medals, it is possible to play a game with conditions that are much more advantageous when playing a game with 3 cards than when playing a game with 1 or 2 cards. The player starts playing the game with three cards, and the medals are consumed quickly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably increase the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall. On the other hand, when the number of virtual medals immediately before the start command stored temporarily is less than 3, the winning mode shown in FIG. The winning probability and the medal payout number may be set. As a result, when there are less than three virtual medals, one or two medals are used and a 7-bel prize is awarded in which 3 medals are paid out or 2 medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can give the player the motivation to use up the medals without surplus.

  Further, in addition to the two modified examples described above or separately from the two modified examples, when the number of virtual medals stored and stored by the credit function is two, the above-described FIG. You may comprise so that a game may not be played with the winning aspect shown in 9, the winning probability, and the medal payout number. In this case, it may be configured so that a single-ply game is not performed at all, and the expected value of the number of medals paid out per single-ply game is the winning mode shown in FIGS. The winning mode, the winning probability and the medal payout number may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the win probability and the medal payout number. In the former case, in the process of S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), when it is determined whether or not the bet number is a specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is confirmed. If the number is 2, the set number of bets may be set to 2 so that a game with 1 card cannot be played. In the latter case, when it is determined that there is a start command in the process of S206 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter (that is, the number of virtual medals) immediately before the start command is temporarily stored in the RAM 106. In the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when the one-sheet lottery table (see S406) is set, or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), a payout determination process (see S513) is performed. In this case, if the number of virtual medals immediately before the start command stored temporarily is two, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game when one is multiplied is shown in FIGS. The winning mode, the winning probability and the medal payout number are set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained by the winning mode, the winning probability and the medal payout number shown. It may be. As a result, when only two virtual medals remain, the player can play the game with two. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not three medals are paid out in one game.

  In the first embodiment, even if the game is played with one or two cards when the BB prize winning flag is carried over, the winning mode of the game performed with one or two cards and the winning game Although the case where the probability is configured to be the same as the case where the BB winning winning flag is not carried over has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the one-sheet lottery table (see S406) or the two-sheet lottery table (see S405), the winning flag storage area 106a is carried over from the previous game. If the BB winning winning flag is set, the lottery table may be set so that the probability of losing is high. As a result, if the result of the lottery is lost, since only the BB winning winning flag carried over is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the smooth table setting executed in S310 of the lottery process (see FIG. 14) is set. In the process, a sliding table corresponding to the BB winning can be stored. Therefore, the probability that a BB winning will be established can be increased.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which information related to the number of bets is included in a start command and transmitted from the main control apparatus 101 to the display control apparatus 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is different from the start command. Information regarding the number of bets may be transmitted from the main controller 101 to the display controller 81 by a command. For example, information relating to the number of bets may be transmitted by a dedicated command (hereinafter referred to as “bet number notification command”), or may be transmitted by being included in a lottery result command. When preparing a bet number notification command, in the main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the command received from the main control device 101 is stored in the reception command storage area 185a, and the command is notified of the bet number. If the command is a command, the bet number notification command process is executed. By the bet number notification command process, information regarding the bet number included in the bet number notification command is extracted, and the information regarding the extracted bet number is stored in the bet number storage area. You may make it store in 185b. In addition, when including information on the bet number in the lottery result command, information on the bet number is extracted from the lottery result command and stored in the lottery result command process (see FIG. 20) before the process of S901 is performed. You may make it store in the area 185b. Note that when the information related to the number of bets is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command different from the start command or the lottery result command, the transmission timing of the command is determined after the start command is transmitted. Preferably before the transmission of. Thereby, in the display control device 81, based on the number of bets placed on the game started by operating the start lever 41 and the result of the lottery performed on the game, the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, Various aspects of the effects performed by the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65) can be determined, and the player can play a game with various senses of expectation by the effects of the auxiliary effect unit.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the number of bets is one or two is changed to the BB winning mode. In the case where there are a plurality of winning combinations, an auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65) is started so as to preferentially start the BB winning notification effect informing that the BB winning mode is the winning combination. ) Is controlled (see S903 and S904 in FIG. 20), but when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is two of the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode, the BB winning mode and the watermelon Start the BB winning / watermelon winning announcement production in the auxiliary production department to announce that two of the winning modes are set as winning roles Control may be. In addition, when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode and the Bell winning mode, it is notified that two of the BB winning mode and the Bell winning mode are set as the winning combination. It may be controlled to start the “BB winning / bell winning notification effect” in the auxiliary effect section. Thus, when the player performs the “BB winning / watermelon winning notification effect” or the “BB winning / bell winning notification effect” in the auxiliary directing unit, the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode are simultaneously performed. You can see that it is set as a winning combination. Therefore, for the game in which the announcement effect is performed, the player can be directed to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 to establish the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, and the BB winning mode in the subsequent games. The game can be continued by the player with the expectation that is established.

  In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the number of bets is one or two is in the BB winning mode. In this case, the case where the BB winning announcement effect is announced to notify that the BB winning mode is the winning combination is explained. However, as a candidate for the winning combination when the number of bets is one or two, the special gaming state is set. In the case where there are a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations that give the privilege to be transferred, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command has a predetermined state If it is determined that a transitional winning combination is included, an auxiliary effect is provided to notify that the predetermined transitional winning combination is a winning combination. (Top lamp 63, a speaker 64, an auxiliary display unit 65) may be controlled so as to be executed. It should be noted that the predetermined state transition winning combination in which the notice effect is performed may be a part of the plurality of types of state transition winning combinations, or may be all winning combinations.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, when the bet number is one or two, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the watermelon prize. In the case of the mode or the bell winning mode, the case of performing the watermelon winning notification effect or the bell winning notification effect for notifying that the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode is a winning combination has been described. If there are other winning combinations that may be missed depending on the operation timing of the player's stop switches 42 to 44 as candidates for winning combinations when the number is a piece, the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 In the lottery result command process executed by, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is lost. If it is determined that the winning combination is an effective winning combination, the auxiliary production unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) is caused to execute a notification effect for notifying that the winning combination is a winning combination. You may control. If there are multiple winning combinations that may be missed, the announcement effect may be executed only when some of them win the winning combination. On the other hand, when it is a winning combination, an announcement effect may be executed.

  The stop symbol of each winning form in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the stop symbol. However, it is desirable that the symbols that will not be missed be set as the symbols for stopping the Cherry Bell and 7-bell winning.

  The probability of winning each winning form in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the winning probability. Further, the number of medals paid out for the watermelon winning or the bell winning in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the number of medals paid out. However, it is desirable to set the probability of winning a Cherry Bell prize or a 7-bell prize higher than other prize-winning modes in one or two. In addition, the winning probability and medal payout number for each winning mode are set so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number to the bet number is less than 100% and close to 100% in the case of 1 or 2 It is desirable to do.

  In the first embodiment, the slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and having five lines as effective lines has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, five reels are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine or a slot machine having three effective lines. The active line may be changed according to the number of bets. For example, if the number of bets is 3, the effective line is set to 5 lines, if the number of bets is 2, the effective line is set to 3 lines, and if the number of bets is 1, the effective line is set. May be set to one line. Further, when setting the effective lines to three lines, for example, the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3 shown in FIG. 6 may be set, or the middle line L2, the lower right line L4, and the like may be set. The upper right line L5 may be set.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the maximum bet number is 3 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the maximum bet number may be set to an arbitrary value of 2 or more. For example, the maximum bet number may be four. In this case, if the game is played with a bet number less than the maximum bet number, the winning probability of each winning mode should be set so that the winning mode in which the maximum bet number (or a multiple thereof) is paid out is won with a high probability. That's fine. In addition, when the maximum bet number is 4, if a game is played with one card, for example, winning of each winning mode with one card is won so that a winning mode in which two medals are paid out is won with high probability. If you set a probability and play a game with 2 cards, for example, set the winning probability of each winning mode with 2 cards so that the winning mode with 3 medal payouts won with high probability, When a game is played by multiplying, for example, the winning probability of each winning aspect in three pieces may be set so that a winning aspect in which four medals are paid out is won with high probability. In this way, when the number of bets is small, by setting a small number of medal payout numbers in the winning mode that is won with high probability, the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number to the bet number is less than 100%. Even when the winning probability is set, the winning probability of the winning mode can be increased. It is desirable to set the winning probability and the medal payout number for each winning mode so that the ratio of the expected value of the medal payout number to the bet number is less than 100% and close to 100%.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, after the power is turned on, the display control means 314 first stores image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROMs 434 and 734 when the power-on main of the resident video RAM 435 is turned on. The image data is transferred to the image area 435a and the power-on variation image area 435b. After the transfer is completed, the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROMs 434 and 734. Although the case of transferring to the resident video RAM 435 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the display control means 314 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on from the character ROMs 434 and 734 to the image area 435a when the resident video RAM 435 is turned on after the power is turned on. After the main image at the time of input is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is transferred from the character ROM 434 734 to the resident video RAM 435. Also good. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 431 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 435b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 313 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 435b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 435b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the production execution time table corresponds to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the case where the content (display content) of the image to be displayed at that time is specified has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display contents may be defined as long as the predetermined time interval is specified. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 281 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 281 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 281 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the effect execution time table may define the display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  In addition, in the performance execution time table, the display content defined at each predetermined time interval is not defined by a code associated with each image type, but a character in which image data corresponding to the image type is stored. The address of the ROMs 434 and 734 may be specified. In the display control device 314, image data corresponding to the image type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is read from the character ROMs 434 and 734, and therefore image data of the image type is stored in association with each image type. It manages the addresses of the character ROMs 434 and 734. Therefore, in the effect execution time table, if the address of the character ROMs 434 and 734 storing the image data corresponding to the image type is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, it is associated with each image type. Thus, it is not necessary to manage both the code and the addresses of the character ROMs 434 and 734, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, in the transfer command specified in the production execution time table, the transfer target image type is not specified by a code, but the address of the character ROM 434, 734 storing the image data of the target image is specified. Also good. As a result, an image data transfer command can be generated using the address specified by the transfer command as it is, so that the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the transfer target image type is specified by the code. it can. In the second embodiment, in this case, the target image to be transferred specified by the transfer command in the image transfer setting process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 is the first priority image. The determination process (S3002) for determining whether or not there is a determination process (S3007) for determining whether or not the image is a second priority image includes an address defined by the transfer instruction and the first priority image or the second priority image. It may be performed by directly comparing the stored address of the character ROM 434.

  In the second embodiment, two areas (first priority image A area 436a and first priority image B area 436b) are provided as areas for storing the first priority image data in the normal video RAM 436. May be set as appropriate. Similarly, the number of areas for storing second priority image data and the number of areas for storing normal image data may be set as appropriate. Further, the number of areas for storing the first priority image data, the number of areas for storing the second priority image data, and the number of areas for storing the normal image data may be different from each other. Further, the third priority image data may be set from the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436, and one or more areas for storing the third priority image data may be provided.

  When three or more areas for storing the first priority image data are set, the first priority image data may be stored in order for the plurality of areas. In this case, instead of the first priority image storage flag 433d, a first priority image storage counter is provided in the work RAM 433, and the first priority image storage counter is updated each time the first priority image data is stored. The first priority image data may be stored in an area designated by the first priority image storage counter.

  Similarly, when three or more areas for storing normal image data are set, the normal image data may be stored in order for the plurality of areas. In this case, instead of the normal image storage flag 433d, a normal image storage counter is provided in the work RAM 433, and the normal image storage counter is updated each time normal image data is stored, and is specified by the normal image storage counter. Ordinary image data may be stored in the area.

  Further, when three or more areas for storing the second priority image data are set, the second priority image data may be stored in order for the plurality of areas. In this case, instead of the second priority image storage flag 433d, a second priority image storage counter is provided in the work RAM 433, and the second priority image storage counter is updated each time the second priority image data is stored. The second priority image data may be stored in an area designated by the second priority image storage counter. Further, when image data used for the continuous notice effect is stored in one area where the second priority image data is stored, a second priority image storage indicating the area where the image data used for the continuous notice effect is stored. The counter value is stored, and the second priority image storage counter value indicating the area where the image data used for the continuous notice effect is stored is skipped until the continuous notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. The priority image storage counter may be updated. Thereby, until the continuous notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times, the image data used for the continuous notice effect can be held in the area where the second priority image data is stored without being overwritten.

  In the second embodiment, the image type discriminated as the first priority image data or the second priority image data is an example, and the first priority image data or the second priority is selected at the development stage according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 200. An image type determined as priority image data may be appropriately selected.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the display control device 314 stores the image data used for the continuous notice effect in the area where the second priority image data is stored is described. However, instead of this, the normal image data is stored. You may comprise so that it may store in the area stored. In this case, control may be performed so that the area in which the normal image data in which the image data used for the continuous notice effect is stored is not overwritten until the continuous notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. Thereby, it is possible to keep the image data used for the continuous notice effect in the area where the normal image data is stored until the continuous notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. Further, the normal video RAM 436 may be provided with another area for storing only image data used for the continuous notice effect, and the image data used for the continuous notice effect may be stored in the area. As a result, the image data used for the continuous notice effect can be held without being overwritten by other image data.

  On the other hand, in the third to fifth embodiments, the case where the display control device 314 stores the image data used for the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice image F area 536f has been described, but instead, the image A area 536a. The image may be stored in any one of the image D areas 536d. In this case, the area storing the image data used for the continuous notice effect may be controlled not to be overwritten until the continuous notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. Thereby, it is possible to keep the image data used for the continuous notice effect in the area where the normal image data is stored until the continuous notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the audio lamp control device 313 transmits the continuous notice setting command to the display control device 314 when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 45). The display control device 314 explained the case where the image data used for the continuous notice effect is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 when the continuous notice setting command is received. The timing for transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROMs 434 and 734 to the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the display control device 314 receives a display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) from the sound lamp control device 313, the continuous notification effect is executed in the “continuous notice execution setting” of the display variation pattern command. If it is set and the continuous notice effect image of the aspect indicated by “continuous notice effect” is not stored in the normal video RAMs 436 and 536, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is obtained from the character ROMs 434 and 734. You may make it transfer to normal video RAM436,536. Thus, since the image data used for the continuous notice effect is stored in the normal video RAM 436 and 536 before the continuous notice effect is performed during the variable display, the image stored in the normal video RAM 436 and 536 is stored. Using the data, the image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 immediately at the execution timing of the continuous notice effect.

  Also, in this case, if the continuous notice mode is a step-up type production mode, all the image data corresponding to the continuous notice mode that may be used thereafter is transferred from the character ROM 434, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, It may be transferred to 536. For example, if the continuous notification mode is “egg”, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” may be used as the subsequent continuous notification mode. All the image data to be processed may be transferred from the character ROMs 434 and 734 to the normal video RAMs 436 and 536. Further, when the continuous notice mode is “chicken”, “chicken” and “chicken group” may be used as the subsequent continuous notice mode. Therefore, all of the image data corresponding to them is the character ROM 434. The data may be transferred from 734 to the normal video RAM 436, 536. As a result, each time a variable effect set to execute a continuous notice effect is started, the corresponding image data need not be transferred from the character ROM 434, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, 536. Can be reduced.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect may be included in the display variation pattern command. Thereby, the display control device 314 uses the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect shown in the display variation pattern command, and the remaining number of executions is 1 or more without counting the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. In this case, the display control device 314 can be controlled so that the image data used in the continuous notice effect stored in the normal video RAMs 436 and 536 is not overwritten. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 314 can be reduced. In addition, by including the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect in the display variation pattern command, the display control device 314 determines the following from the “continuous notice mode” of the display variation pattern command and the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect. The continuous notice mode used in the continuous notice effect can be grasped more accurately. For example, when the continuous notice mode is “egg” and the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect is 3, it is understood that “egg”, “chick”, and “chicken group” are used as the subsequent continuous notice modes. can do. Therefore, in this case, when the display control device 314 receives the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 49) from the sound lamp control device 313, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is obtained from the character ROMs 434 and 734 for normal use. It is configured to be transferred to the video RAMs 436 and 536, and from the “continuous notice mode” of the display variation pattern command and the remaining number of executions of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice mode used in subsequent successive notice effects is grasped. Then, it is possible to transfer all the image data used in the recognized continuous notice mode from the character ROM 434, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, 536.

  In the second embodiment, when the image data used for the continuous notice effect is transferred to the normal video RAM 436, the display control device 314 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 436 until the continuous notice effect is executed a predetermined number of times. The stored image data used for the continuous notice effect is controlled so as not to be overwritten. Instead, every time the continuous notice effect is executed, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is used. If the image data to be used in the continuous notice effect to be displayed is stored, the transfer of the image data to be used in the continuous notice effect from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 is not executed. On the other hand, if the image data to be used in the continuous notice effect to be displayed is not stored, the character RO It may be controlled to perform the transfer of image data to be used in the continuous announcement attraction to the normal video RAM436 from 434. Thus, only when the image data used in the continuous notice effect transferred to the normal video RAM 436 is overwritten before the start of the continuous notice effect, the image data used in the continuous notice effect is again used for normal use. Since it is transferred to the video RAM 436, the display control device is compared with the case where the image data used in the continuous notice effect is transferred to the normal video RAM 436 each time the fluctuating effect set to execute the continuous notice effect is performed. The increase in the processing load of 314 can be reduced. In addition, since the image used for the continuous notice effect is reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 436, the continuous notice effect can be displayed on the third display device 281 without delay.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, when the display control device 314 receives a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 314 displays the display variation pattern command on the third symbol display device 281. An effect execution time table storage area 432a, an effect execution time table used for the change effect is based on each information of “change pattern setting”, “continuous notice execution setting”, and “continuous notice form” of the display change pattern command. Although the case where one of the plurality of time tables stored in 732a is selected and stored in the work RAM has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, from among a plurality of other effect execution time tables stored in the effect execution time table storage areas 432a and 732a as effect execution time tables used for the change effect executed for the received display change pattern command, One time table corresponding to the “variation pattern setting” of the display variation pattern command is selected and stored in the work RAM, and the continuous replay effect is executed in the “continuous advance notice execution setting” of the display variation pattern command. When the setting has been made, the display timing of the information for instructing the display of the continuous notice effect according to the “continuous notice mode” of the display variation pattern command with respect to the effect execution time table stored in the work RAM is displayed. You may make it add to the location corresponding to. In addition, display information of other various effects may be added to a location corresponding to the display timing of the effects for the selected effect execution time table. As a result, the effect execution time table storage areas 432a and 732a need only have an effect execution time table corresponding to the “variation pattern setting” of the display variation pattern command. The increase in capacity can be suppressed, and various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by adding processing to the effect execution time table.

  In the second embodiment, the image types of the first priority image data stored in the first priority image A area 436a and the first priority image B area 436b are stored, and the second priority image C area 436c and the second priority image C area 436c are stored. The image type of the second priority image data stored in the priority image D area 436d is stored, and the first priority image data ("super reach A", "super reach B", "notice effect A", "notice effect) B ”) or second priority image data (“ Super Reach C ”to“ Super Reach E ”,“ Notice Effect A ”to“ Notice Effect B ”) needs to be transferred to the normal video RAM 436. The image data of the target image to be transferred is the first priority image A area 436a, the first priority image B area 436b, or the second priority image C area 43. If the image data is stored in c or the second priority image D area 436d, the image data of the target image is not transferred to the normal video RAM 436, and the drawing process is already performed using the image in the normal video RAM 436. In addition to this, in addition to this, the image type of the normal image data stored in the normal image F area 436f and the normal image G area 436g is stored, and when the normal image becomes a transfer target, the normal image is stored. If the data is stored in the normal image F area 436f or the normal image G area 436g, the image data of the target image is not transferred to the normal video RAM 436 and the image in the normal video RAM 436 is already used. A drawing process may be performed. Thus, if the normal image is stored in the normal video RAM 436, the normal image data can be prevented from being repeatedly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, an increase in the load on the MPU 431 can be suppressed, and the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state can be reduced.

  Further, an image storage discrimination table similar to the image storage discrimination table 533d in the third embodiment is also provided in the work RAM 433 in the second embodiment, and all image types (“super reach” displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are provided. Information for identifying whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436 may be stored in the image storage determination table. . Then, when a predetermined image type becomes a target image to be transferred, whether or not image data corresponding to the image type is stored in the normal video RAM 436 is determined based on the identification information stored in the image storage determination table. If not stored in the normal video RAM 436, the image data may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. In this case, the image type identification information corresponding to the transferred image data is updated to information indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436, and is overwritten and erased by the transfer of the image data. The identification information of the image type corresponding to the image data thus obtained may be updated to information indicating that the corresponding image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 436. On the other hand, when a predetermined image type becomes a target image to be transferred, if the corresponding image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 436 according to the identification information of the image type, the character ROM 434 transfers to the normal video RAM 436. The drawing process may be performed using the image of the normal video RAM 436 without performing the image data transfer process. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the repeated transfer of the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. Therefore, an increase in the load on the MPU 431 can be suppressed, and the time during which the character ROM 434 and the normal video RAM 437 are in a busy state can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, when image data of a predetermined image type is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, it is determined whether or not the image data of the image type is stored in the normal video RAM 437. The case where the MPU 431 performs the process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined image type is stored in the normal video RAM 436 has been described. The image controller 437 performs this process. You may do it. In this case, the image type of the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 437. Further, a table similar to the image storage determination table 601a in the fourth embodiment may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 437. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined image type from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the MPU 431 sends an image controller 437 to the image controller 437 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 436. On the other hand, a transfer command for the image data may be transmitted.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, but is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead of this, image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. For example, in the fifth embodiment, the image data of the back image corresponding to “super reach A” may be resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. In particular, this “super reach A” is an effect aspect that is clearly indicated as an initial candidate for the effect form of super reach when the super reach selection effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. There is a high possibility that “Super Reach A” is selected as a super reach production mode. Accordingly, the rear image of “Super Reach A” that is highly likely to be selected is made resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, whereby the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the production execution time table defines the image data transfer command in association with the display pointer, and the MPU 431 is instructed by the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 437 is controlled so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, 536. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Information related to the image type required in the effect execution time table is described, and the MPU 431 transmits necessary image data from the character ROM 434, 734 to the normal video RAM 436, based on the information described at the top of the effect execution time table. Forward to 536 It may control the image controller 437. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 determines the image type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is stored in the character ROM 434, 734. The image controller 437 may be controlled to transfer to the normal video RAMs 436 and 536.

  In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back D, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. May be. Further, in the back E which is a back image of the “urban stage”, the case where the person changes with time has been described. However, what changes with time is not limited to a person, and any person can be changed. Good.

  In the above second to fifth embodiments, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 281 where the variable effect is performed has been described. By providing a fourth symbol display device separate from the display device 281 and displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 281, a continuous notice effect is provided. May be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 314 or the sound lamp control device 313. In addition, a continuous notice effect may be executed by providing an accessory that operates in accordance with various effects in the pachinko machine 200 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 426 of the pachinko machine 200 under the control of the voice lamp control device 313, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 200 The continuous notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 229 to 233 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 281 (and the first symbol display device 237), the symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 426, or the lighting parts 229 to 233 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps playing the game by gazing at the third symbol display device 281 where the variation effect is performed, but the symbol display by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 281 is performed. Because the action of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 426, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting parts 229 to 233, the continuous notice effect is performed, and an effect different from normal is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 426, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 229 to 233. A notice effect can be performed.

  In addition, if the continuous notice effect is performed by sound output from the sound output device 426 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 229 to 233, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 313. The main control device 310 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 313 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 314 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 281, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 426. A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 229 to 233 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. In addition, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 281, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 426, lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 229 to 233 Or a combination of them), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, time shortage hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect are prepared. Good.

  Moreover, although the said 2nd-5th embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notice effects different from a change effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 when a continuous notice effect is performed, However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the continuous notice effect is used as a stop symbol displayed when the fluctuating effect ends. For example, the combination of symbols on the middle line L2 is “3” “4”. "1"), which is a so-called "chance eye", may be displayed. In this case, when the value of the continuous notice counter 423d is not 0 in the process of S2205 of the variable display process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 (that is, the continuous notice effect is executed). May be set as a chance eye as a stop pattern of the variation effect. As a result, in the third symbol display device 281, if chances are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained. .

  In the second to fifth embodiments, in the main control device 310, when the result of the lottery for the winning ball is a big hit and the display mode is a 15R probability variation big hit, and the result of the lottery for the ball won for the starting win And the display mode is out-of-front reach, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the number-of-holds command is set to “1”, and the permission to start the continuous notice effect is sounded. Although the case of notifying the lamp control device 313 has been described (see S1405 to S1410 in FIG. 37), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the condition for setting the continuous notice permission flag to “1” depends on the specifications of the pachinko machine 200. In addition, it may be set appropriately. For example, the continuous notice permission flag may be set to “1” when the lottery result at the start winning prize is a big hit, and the continuous notice permission flag may be set to “0” when the lottery is off. This suggests to the player that if a continuous notice effect is continuously performed along with all of the variation effects that have been put on hold, it will surely be a big hit at the last change effect that has been put on hold. Can do. Therefore, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  In addition, when the result of the lottery at the start winning prize is a big hit and the resulting game state is of a specific type, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set to “1”. It may be set. As a result, for example, if the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to “1” only in the case where the game state is the most advantageous game state for the player (15R probability variation big hit), the continuous notice effect is set to the third pattern. When displayed on the display device 281, a high expectation can be given to the player.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, it is determined whether or not the main control device 310 permits the start of the continuous notice effect (see S1405 to S1410 in FIG. 37), and the start of the continuous notice effect is permitted (holding). At the first bit (when the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the number command is set to “1”, the audio lamp control device 313 performs the continuous notice according to the continuous notice determination probability set by the continuous notice determination table 422a. The case where the presence / absence of the performance is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The continuous notice determination table is stored in the ROM 402 of the main controller 310, and the continuous notice effect is executed by the main controller 310. The presence or absence may be determined. In this case, the main control device 310 may instruct the audio lamp control device 313 to execute the continuous notice effect using the hold count command.

  Further, a lottery result (big hit, miss) determined by the main controller 310 when the ball is won by starting or following the hold number command, or a win type when the lottery result is a big win (15R When the probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time-shortage jackpot), or the lottery result is out, the final stop pattern (rear / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete reach) is transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp controller 313, The sound lamp control device 313 may determine whether to permit the continuous notice effect start or whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on these pieces of information. Alternatively, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 when the ball is won for starting is determined by the main control by the hold count command or following the hold count command. It may be transmitted from the device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313, and the sound lamp control device 313 may make all the determinations of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect. In these cases, the main control device 310 does not determine whether or not to allow the continuous notice effect to start and whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, so that the processing load on the main control device 310 can be further reduced and the start prize is won. It is possible to prevent a delay or malfunction of the lottery process performed on the ball.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, permission of the start of the continuous notice effect determined by the main control device 310 is notified to the sound lamp control device 313 by the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a continuous notice permission command for notifying permission to start a continuous notice effect may be prepared separately from the hold count command. In the second to fifth embodiments, the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect notified to the sound lamp control device 313 by the 0th bit (the game state flag after the continuous notice) of the high-order byte of the hold count command (“big hit” "," Off ") may be included in the continuous notice permission command and transmitted. In these cases, only when the main control device 310 determines that the start of the continuous notice effect is permitted, the continuous notice permission command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313 following the hold count command, or the continuous notice is given. The permission command may be configured to notify the presence / absence of permission to start the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice permission command may always be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313 following the hold count command.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, there are different continuous notice determination ranges depending on the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit”, “out”) and the number of variable effects held on the main control device 310. Although the case where the continuous notice determination probability is changed using the associated continuous notice determination table 422a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect ("big hit", “Continuous notice determination probability” is changed using a continuous notice determination table in which different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with each other only according to either “off” or the number of times of fluctuating effects held in the main controller 310. May be. In addition, when associating different continuous notice determination ranges according to the number of hold times, the number of hold times may be divided into several groups, and different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. In this case, the continuous notice determination range may not be set and the start of the continuous notice effect may not be determined. In the latter case, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect is continuously performed together with the fluctuating effect more than a predetermined number of times. Thereby, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed by continuously performing the continuous notice effect for a predetermined number of times or more. A sense of expectation can be given.

  On the other hand, in the second to fifth embodiments described above, the continuous notice determination table describes a case where different consecutive notice determination ranges are associated with two states of “big hit” and “miss” as game states after the end of the continuous notice effect. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with the states of “15R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “time / temporal jackpot”, and “out”. Further, these states may be divided into several groups, and different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. Thus, for example, if the consecutive notice determination range is associated with each gaming state so that the consecutive notice determination probability increases in the order of “15R probability change big hit”, “2R probability change big hit”, “time / temporary big hit”, and “out”. When a continuous announcement effect is continuously performed together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, there is a high possibility that the game state will be more advantageous to the player after the last change effect that has been put on hold ends. Can suggest that. Therefore, a high sense of expectation can be given to the player. In this modification, the main control device 310 determines whether or not the continuous notice start is started, or the main control device 310 does not determine whether the continuous notice effect start is permitted or not, and the sound lamp control device 313 directly starts the continuous notice. This is useful when determining whether or not to allow the start of the continuous notice effect if the result of the lottery in the main controller 310 is “big hit”.

  In the second to fifth embodiments described above, the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbols (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete-reach reach) determined by the main control device 310. Although the case where it is set by the sound lamp control device 313 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the sound lamp control device 313, the last variation effect that has been put on hold. If the stop symbol is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main controller 310, instead of the stop symbol in the front-rear reach manner. In this case, for example, in the variation display processing (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313, in the processing (S2205) of setting the variation effect stop symbol, the variation effect stop symbol is not included. It is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (that is, the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed) In the case where the stop symbol of the variation effect is out and the value of the continuous notice counter 423d is other than 0 and is equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c, in the process of S2205, the stop symbol is used as the stop symbol. A corresponding stop symbol may be set. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 310, and is always a back-and-forth reach, so that the player has high expectation be able to.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, in the case where the continuous notice effect is performed together with all the suspended variation effects, each variation effect is performed in the effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each variation. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the continuous notice effect is performed together with all of the suspended variation effects, the effect mode of the variation effect other than the last variation effect that has been suspended is updated to the variation effect. You may comprise.

  In this case, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is 0 (that is, the continuous notice effect is not performed) or the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and the value of the continuous notice number register 423c is If they are equal (that is, if it is the last variation effect for performing the continuous notice effect), the variation effect of the aspect set in the process of S2205 (see FIG. 47) based on the variation pattern determined by the main control device 310 is used. In addition, when the execution of the continuous notice effect is set and the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d is other than 0 and is not equal to the value of the continuous notice number register 423c (that is, it is not the last variable effect for performing the continuous notice effect). In the case of), instead of the variation effect of the mode set in the process of S2205 (see FIG. 47), after setting the deviant variation effect, Ete may be set the execution of the continuous announcement attraction. In addition, when the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is not updated, and is set in the process of S2205 (see FIG. 47) based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 310. You may make it display the effect aspect of a fluctuation effect as it is.

  Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In the said 2nd-5th embodiment, when execution of the continuous notice effect was determined, although the case where a continuous notice effect was always performed to the 3rd symbol display apparatus 281 was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, For example, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 281 when the player presses the frame button 222 in a situation where the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  In the second to fifth embodiments described above, when the variation effect is executed, the case has been described in which the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. Instead of display, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are reduced to an invisible level, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Also good.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the case where one first entrance 264 is arranged in the game board 213 where a lottery win is started when a ball enters the game board 213 is described. The game board 213 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the lottery lottery is started. In this case, in the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 when there is a hold at each first entrance, information indicating which hold is held by the first entrance. May be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 313, when a holding number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a hold number command is received, the hold for the first entrance indicated by the hold number command is held. When the number of holds is set in the number counter and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of hold times for the first entrance indicated by the change pattern command is decremented by 1, the number of holds is counted for each first entrance. can do.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the continuous notice number register 223c and the continuous notice number counter 223d of the sound lamp control device 313 are the maximum number of reservations that can be held by all the first entrances. The number of executions is set so that the continuous notice effect can be executed for the fluctuation effect (holding ball) of minutes (that is, the number obtained by adding the maximum number of times that can be held by each first entrance). Further, it may be configured to be able to count. In this case, when the sound lamp control device 313 receives the hold frequency command and determines to start the continuous notice effect, the change lamp (hold ball) held by all the first entrances at that time is held. The number of times may be calculated by adding the values of all the holding number counters corresponding to each first entrance, and the calculated value may be stored in the continuous notice number register 223c. Thereby, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect can be executed over the fluctuating effects held by all the first entrances.

  Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310, the value of the hold count counter 423a is decreased by 1 (see S2207 in FIG. 47). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the hold count counter of the main controller 310 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S1206). A hold count command is set so that the value (N) of 403a is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 (see S1204 in FIG. 35), and the hold count command is a transmission of a variation pattern command. And may be transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313. In this case, S2207 in FIG. 47 is omitted. In addition, when the value (N) of the subtraction number counter 403a of the main controller 310 subtracted is transmitted, the number of hold times so that both the continuous notice permission flag and the game state flag after the continuous notice of the hold number command are “0”. Just generate a command. That is, the value (N) of the hold count counter 403a of the main control device 310 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command set by the change start process (S1206) is sent from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp by the hold count command. In the case of transmission to the control device 313, the continuous notice effect flag is set to “0”. In other words, only when the winning at the first entrance is detected and the value (N) of the holding number counter 403a of the main controller 310 is added, the continuous notice effect flag is “1” under a predetermined condition. And the main control device 310 notifies the sound lamp control device 313 of permission of the continuous notice effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 37, the main control device 310 determines whether or not to permit the continuous warning effect to the sound lamp control device 313, when there is a winning at the first entrance 264. Therefore, the relationship between the determination as to whether or not to permit the continuous advance notice effect and the number of times of the fluctuating effect on hold that increases due to the winning at the first entrance 264 is determined as a prize at the first entrance 264. Can be accurately transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, when the sound lamp control device 313 receives the hold frequency command and determines the start of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is provided for all the variable effects that have been held at that time. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it is further determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each individual variable effect. Also good. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, a counter is provided that is updated every time the variation display process (see FIG. 47) is executed by the MPU 421 of the sound lamp control device 313 and determines whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed in each variation effect. May be. In the variation display process, when the variation start flag is on, the value of the continuous notice counter 423d is other than 0, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. If the value of the counter is a predetermined value, continuous notice effect execution may be set for the corresponding variable effect. In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the holding number counter 423a when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the value of the continuous notice number counter 423d, the continuous notice number register 423c, and the continuous notice number counter 423d Difference (that is, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effects), the contents of the effect form of the change effect to be judged (super reach change effect, normal reach change effect, off-change effect), the game state after a series of continuous notice effects end (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, hour and junior big hit, off), or a combination of two or more of these. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the second to fifth embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 310 to the sound lamp control device 313, and the sound lamp control device 313 instructs the display control device 314 to perform display. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 310 to the display control device 314. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

  In the second to fifth embodiments, the winning entry to the first entrance 264 and the passing of the second entrance 267 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of times of holding is 4 times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 264 is different for the part of the 3rd symbol display device 281 by a number or by dividing the area divided into four by the number of times of the hold. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 237, and the number of holding times is notified by the light emitting member. May be.

  Further, as shown in the second to fifth embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is limited to the one in which the symbol as identification information is scrolled in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281. Instead, the symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be implemented in a slot machine of a type different from the so-called A type slot machine described in the first embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as B type, C type, A type and C type composite type, B type and C type composite type, or even a type equipped with a CT game. In any case, it is obvious that the same effects as those of the first embodiment described above can be obtained. In addition, examples of bonus winning in each type include BB winning, RB winning, SB winning, CT winning and the like.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the second embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

  A main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub-control means. In the slot machine, the sub-control unit is capable of performing a reading operation faster than the first storage unit storing image information for displaying an image on the image display unit and the first storage unit. A second storage means having a first storage area for storing the image information stored in the first storage means, and display on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second storage means; An image control means for controlling the image to be transferred, and a first transfer process for transferring image information stored in the first storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means at the time of start-up by power-on First transfer processing execution means to be executed, and the first storage area of the second storage means holds image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. A slot machine 1 characterized in that

  Note that the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all image information stored in the first storage means, or a part of the images. It may be information.

  According to the slot machine 1, the sub-control means stores image information for displaying an image on the image display means in the first storage means, and the image information stored in the first storage means is turned on. Is transferred by the first transfer processing execution means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation faster than the first storage means. The first storage area of the second storage means holds the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. The first storage area of the second storage means Based on the image information held in the image, the image control means controls the image displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display using the image information held in the second storage means capable of high speed reading operation. Since the image is controlled, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.

  A main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and an image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub-control means. The sub-control unit is capable of performing a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage unit storing image information for displaying an image on the image display unit and the first storage unit. A second storage means having a first storage area for storing the image information stored in the first storage means, and display on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second storage means; An image control means for controlling an image to be executed, and a first transfer process for transferring image information stored in the first storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on You First transfer processing execution means, and the first storage area of the second storage means holds the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. A gaming machine A1 characterized by that.

  Note that the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all image information stored in the first storage means, or a part of the images. It may be information.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the sub-control means, image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored in the first storage means, and the image information stored in the first storage means is turned on. Is transferred by the first transfer processing execution means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation faster than the first storage means. The first storage area of the second storage means holds the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. The first storage area of the second storage means Based on the image information held in the image, the image control means controls the image displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display using the image information held in the second storage means capable of high speed reading operation. Since the image is controlled, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub control means can perform a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, and has a second storage area for storing the image information stored in the first storage means. The image control means controls the image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, and the first transfer process includes: A part of the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on, and the sub control means When image information not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, the third storage unit stores the third storage unit before the image information is used. Before the means Gaming machine A2, characterized in that it comprises a second transfer process executing means for executing a second transfer process of transferring the image information to the second storage area.

  According to the gaming machine A2, a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means is held at least until the predetermined trigger is reached. On the other hand, when image information not held in the first storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, the image information is sent by the second transfer processing execution means before the image information is used. And transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, the image control means is transferred to the image information held in the second storage means and the third storage means capable of high-speed reading operation even when the memory having a low reading speed of the first storage means is used. Since the image displayed on the image display means is controlled using the image information, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time when the image is desired to be displayed. In addition, since part of the image information stored in the first storage unit is stored in the first storage area of the second storage unit, an increase in the storage capacity of the second storage unit is suppressed. can do.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the sub control means includes first determination means for determining whether or not the image information stored in the second storage means is being read out by the image control means, The first transfer process is stored in the first storage means when it is determined by the first determination means that the image information stored in the second storage means is not read out by the image control means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the transferred image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first transfer process is executed when the first determination unit determines that the image information stored in the second storage unit is not read by the image control unit. Since the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the transfer processing execution means, the image control means transfers the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer processing. The image displayed on the image display means can be controlled while reading the image information stored in the second storage means in a state where the influence of the transfer of the image data is suppressed. Thereby, the first transfer processing execution means transfers the image information stored in the first storage means to the first area of the second storage means, and uses the image information already stored in the second storage means, A desired image can be displayed on the image display means without any problem at a desired time.

  In the gaming machine A2, the sub-control means includes second determination means for determining whether or not the image information stored in the third storage means is being read out by the image control means. The transfer process is stored in the first storage unit when it is determined by the second determination unit that the image information stored in the third storage unit is not read by the image control unit. A gaming machine B2 that transfers image information to the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the second transfer process is executed when the second determination unit determines that the image information stored in the third storage unit is not read by the image control unit. Since the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the transfer processing execution means, the image control means transfers the image information to the third storage means by the second transfer processing. The image displayed on the image display means can be controlled while reading the image information stored in the third storage means in a state where the influence of the transfer of the image data is suppressed. Thus, the image information stored in the first storage unit is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage unit by the second transfer processing execution unit, and the image information already stored in the third storage unit is used. The desired image can be displayed on the desired time at the image display means.

  In the gaming machine B2, the sub-control means includes first determination means for determining whether or not the image information stored in the second storage means is being read out by the image control means. The transfer process is stored in the first storage unit when it is determined by the first determination unit that the image information stored in the second storage unit is not read by the image control unit. A gaming machine B3, wherein image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the first transfer process is executed when the first determination unit determines that the image control unit does not read the image information stored in the second storage unit. Since the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the transfer processing execution means, the image control means transfers the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer processing. The image displayed on the image display means can be controlled while reading the image information stored in the second storage means in a state where the influence of the transfer of the image data is suppressed. Thereby, the first transfer processing execution means transfers the image information stored in the first storage means to the first area of the second storage means, and uses the image information already stored in the second storage means, A desired image can be displayed on the image display means without any problem at a desired time.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B3, the first determination unit is in a state where the control of the image by the image control unit is scanning a region where there is no image to be displayed in the image scanning region of the image display unit. In addition, it is determined that the image information stored in the second storage means is not read out by the image control means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, when the control of the image by the image control means is in a state of scanning an area where there is no image to be displayed among the image scanning areas of the image display means, (2) Since it is determined that the image information stored in the storage unit is not read by the image control unit, the determination can be easily performed from the control state of the image control unit.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second determination unit is in a state where the image control by the image control unit is scanning a region where there is no image to be displayed among the image scanning regions of the image display unit. A gaming machine B5, wherein it is determined that the image information stored in the third storage means is not read by the image control means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, when the control of the image by the image control means is in a state of scanning an area where there is no image to be displayed in the image scanning area of the image display means, 3 Since it is determined that the reading operation by the image control unit of the image information stored in the storage unit is not performed, the determination can be easily performed from the control state of the image control unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, the sub-control device includes a fourth storage unit that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the first storage unit, and the first transfer process includes the first transfer process, When transferring the image information stored in one storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred to the fourth storage means, and then The gaming machine C1, wherein the image information transferred to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the image information stored in the first storage unit is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage unit by the first transfer process, the image information stored in the first storage unit is temporarily stored. The image information transferred to the fourth storage means and then transferred to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means. Here, since the fourth storage means is configured to be able to perform a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, when image information is transferred from the fourth storage means to the second storage means, it is directly from the first storage means. Compared with the case where image information is transferred to the second storage means, the transfer can be completed in a short time. That is, since the time during which the second storage means is actually receiving the image information can be shortened, the image control means suppresses the influence of the transfer of the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer process. In this state, the image displayed on the image display unit can be controlled while reading out the image information stored in the second storage unit. Therefore, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means, and the image information already stored in the second storage means is used to generate an image. A desired image can be displayed on the display means at a desired time without any problem.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2, B2, B3, and B5, the sub-control device includes a fifth storage unit that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the first storage unit, and the second transfer process includes the second transfer process, When transferring the image information stored in one storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred to the fifth storage means, and then A gaming machine C2, wherein the image information transferred to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, when the image information stored in the first storage unit is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage unit by the second transfer process, the image information stored in the first storage unit is temporarily stored. The image information transferred to the fifth storage means and then transferred to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. Here, since the fifth storage means is configured to be able to perform a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, when image information is transferred from the fifth storage means to the third storage means, it is directly from the first storage means. Compared with the case where image information is transferred to the third storage means, the transfer can be completed in a short time. In other words, since the time during which the third storage unit is receiving the image information can be shortened, the image control unit can suppress the influence of the transfer of the image information to the third storage unit by the second transfer process. In this state, it is possible to control the image to be displayed on the image display unit while reading out the image information stored in the third storage unit. Therefore, the second transfer processing execution means transfers the image information stored in the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and uses the image information already stored in the third storage means, A desired image can be displayed on the image display means without any problem at a desired time.

  In the gaming machine C2, the sub control device includes a fourth storage unit capable of performing a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage unit, and the first transfer process is performed by image information stored in the first storage unit. Is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means, the image information stored in the first storage means is once transferred to the fourth storage means, and then transferred to the fourth storage means. A gaming machine C3, wherein the image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer process, the image information stored in the first storage means is temporarily stored. The image information transferred to the fourth storage means and then transferred to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means. Here, since the fourth storage means is configured to be able to perform a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, when image information is transferred from the fourth storage means to the second storage means, it is directly from the first storage means. Compared with the case where image information is transferred to the second storage means, the transfer can be completed in a short time. In other words, since the time during which the second storage means is receiving the image information can be shortened, the image control means can suppress the influence of the transfer of the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer process. In this state, it is possible to control the image displayed on the image display unit while reading out the image information stored in the second storage unit. Therefore, the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means, and the image information already stored in the second storage means is used. A desired image can be displayed on the image display means without any problem at a desired time.

  In C3, the fourth storage means and the fifth storage means are configured by the same memory.

  According to the gaming machine C4, since the fourth storage means and the fifth storage means are constituted by the same memory, an increase in the capacity of the memory used for the sub-control means can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1, C3, and C4, the sub-control unit scans an area where there is no image to be displayed in the image scanning area of the image display unit when the image control unit controls the image. Third determining means for determining whether or not the image is in a state, and the first transfer process scans an area in the image scanning area of the image display means where there is no image to be displayed by the third determining means. The image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fourth storage means when transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means, The fourth storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing the transfer of image information to the second storage means while scanning an area where no image to be displayed exists in the image scanning area of the image display means. Have Gaming machine C5, characterized in that the at it.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the third determination means determines whether or not the image control by the image control means is in a state of scanning an area in which no image to be displayed exists in the image scanning area of the image display means. When the third determination unit determines that the region where the image to be displayed does not exist is scanned in the image scanning region of the image display unit, the first transfer is executed. The image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fourth storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the processing execution means. Here, the fourth storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing the transfer of the image information to the second storage means while scanning the area where the image to be displayed does not exist in the image scanning area of the image display means. Therefore, the transfer of image information from the fourth storage means to the first storage area of the second storage means performed by the first transfer processing execution means includes an image to be displayed in the image scanning area of the image display means. This can be done while scanning the non-scanning area. Therefore, while scanning the area where the image to be displayed exists in the image scanning area of the image display means, the image control means is in a state where the influence of the transfer of the image information to the second storage means by the first transfer process is suppressed. Thus, the image information stored in the second storage means can be read to control the image.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the sub-control means is in a state where the image control by the image control means is scanning an area where there is no image to be displayed among the image scanning areas of the image display means. A third determination unit configured to determine whether or not the second transfer process is performed, and the third determination unit scans an area in the image scanning area of the image display unit where an image to be displayed does not exist. The image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means when determined to be in the state; The storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing transfer of image information to the third storage means while scanning an area where no image to be displayed exists among the image scanning areas of the image display means. Gaming machine C6, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine C6, it is determined by the third determining means whether the image control by the image control means is in the state of scanning the area where the image to be displayed does not exist among the image scanning areas of the image display means. And when the third determination unit determines that the region where the image to be displayed does not exist is scanned in the image scanning region of the image display unit, the second transfer is executed. The image information once transferred from the first storage means to the fifth storage means is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the processing execution means. Here, the fifth storage means is configured with a storage capacity capable of completing the transfer of the image information to the third storage means while scanning the area where the image to be displayed does not exist among the image scanning areas of the image display means. Therefore, the transfer of image information from the fifth storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means performed by the second transfer processing execution means includes an image to be displayed in the image scanning area of the image display means. This can be done while scanning the non-scanning area. Therefore, while scanning the area where the image to be displayed exists in the image scanning area of the image display means, the image control means is in a state where the influence of the transfer of the image information to the third storage means by the second transfer process is suppressed. Thus, the image information stored in the third storage means can be read to control the image.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2, B2, B3, B5, C2 to C4, C6, the image control means is an image displayed on the back side of the main image displayed on the image display means, Back image display means for displaying one back image on the image display means from among a plurality of back images whose display contents change over time, and the back image display means based on a second predetermined opportunity A rear image to be displayed on the image display means, and a rear image change means to display the changed rear image on the image display means from an initial image preset in the rear image, the first transfer The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by processing is the initial image set as the back image in each of the plurality of back images. Thereafter it by further means is displayed on said image display means, a game machine, characterized in that it comprises image information of an image to be displayed on the image display unit until at least a predetermined time has elapsed D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the back image display means causes the back image of the main image to be displayed on the back side of the main image, and the image display means changes the display content of the image as time passes. Is displayed. Then, based on the second predetermined opportunity, the rear image displayed on the image display unit by the rear image display unit is changed by the rear image changing unit, and the initial image set in advance as the rear image after the change The image is displayed on the image display means. Here, in the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage unit by the first transfer process, the initial image set as the back image is displayed by the back image change unit in each of the plurality of back images. Image information of an image to be displayed on the image display means is included after the display on the display means until at least a predetermined time has elapsed. Thus, when the rear image displayed on the image display unit is changed by the rear image changing unit based on the second predetermined trigger, the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage unit is used. Thus, the initial image can be immediately displayed as the rear image after the change, and the image to be displayed without delay until the predetermined time elapses after the initial image is displayed. Can be displayed. Therefore, even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, it is possible to promptly respond to the second predetermined trigger and display the changed rear image on the image display means while changing with the passage of time. .

  In addition, "Back A" to "Back C" which are the back images described in the second to fifth embodiments, and "Back D", "Back E" and "Back images" described in the fifth embodiment. The “super-reach back image” corresponds to the “back image” described in the gaming machine D1.

  In the gaming machine D1, the second transfer process is performed during a period from when the initial image set as the rear image after the change by the rear image changing unit is displayed on the image display unit until the predetermined time elapses. The non-transferred image information to the first storage area of the second storage means among the image information of the rear image after the change is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. Machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, using the image information held in the first storage area of the second storage means, the initial image set as the back image after the change by the back image change means is displayed on the image display means. Thereafter, until the predetermined time elapses, the second transfer process execution unit that executes the second transfer process does not transfer the changed back surface image information to the first storage area of the second storage unit. Is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. Thus, after the rear image is changed, the corresponding rear image is displayed using the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage unit, and then the remaining rear image is displayed in the second storage unit of the third storage unit. The image information transferred to the storage area can be displayed on the image display means without delay. Therefore, even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, it is possible to promptly respond to the second predetermined trigger and display the changed back image on the image display means and display the back image. Therefore, the rear image can be displayed while changing over time without transferring all the image information for the purpose to the first storage area of the second storage means.

  In the gaming machine D2, the second storage area of the third storage means has at least a back image dedicated area for storing only image information for displaying the back image, and the second transfer process includes: Among the image information of the back image after the change by the back image changing means, non-transferred image information to the first storage area of the second storage means is transferred to the back image dedicated area and image information other than the back image Is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means other than the dedicated rear image area.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the second transfer process execution unit that executes the second transfer process is not transferred to the first storage area of the second storage unit among the image information of the rear image after the change by the rear image change unit. The image information is transferred to the rear image dedicated area provided in the second storage area of the third storage means. On the other hand, image information other than the back image is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means other than the back image dedicated area. Thereby, once the image information of the back image is transferred to the back image dedicated area, the image information can be held until the back image is changed by the back image changing means. Transfer processing can be minimized. Therefore, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first transfer process includes the second storage unit that stores all image information necessary for displaying a predetermined back image among the plurality of back images. The game machine D4 including a process of transferring to the first storage area.

  According to the gaming machine D4, when the first transfer process is executed by the first transfer process execution unit, all image information necessary for displaying a predetermined back image among the plurality of back images is stored in the second storage unit. To the first storage area. Therefore, when the rear image to be displayed on the image display unit is changed to the predetermined rear image by the rear image changing unit based on the second predetermined trigger, it is held in the first storage area of the second storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the second transfer process in order to display the predetermined back image, and the processing load is reduced. Can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine D4, the back image display means sets a specific back image among the plurality of back images as an initial back image displayed first after power-on, and is included in the first transfer process The predetermined back image in which all the image information necessary for displaying the back image is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the processing performed includes at least the initial back image. A gaming machine D5 to play.

  According to the gaming machine D5, when the first transfer process is executed by the first transfer process execution unit, all the images necessary for displaying the initial rear image displayed first after the power is turned on by the rear image display unit. Information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means. Therefore, when the back image displayed on the image display unit is changed to the initial back image by the back image change unit based on the second predetermined opportunity, the image is stored in the first storage area of the second storage unit. All the initial rear images can be displayed using the image information. Here, in general, a player often plays a game by continuously displaying the initial back image. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, the image information for displaying the continuously displayed initial back image is held in the first storage area of the second storage means, and therefore the second transfer process is performed. Since it is not necessary to execute, the processing load can be reduced.

  The “back A” described in the second to fifth embodiments corresponds to the “initial back image” described in the gaming machine D5.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, at least one of the plurality of back images is displayed on the image display means in a manner that scrolls in a predetermined direction as time passes. Game machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the rear image that is changed by the rear image changing unit based on the second predetermined opportunity is changed to the rear image that is displayed on the image display unit in a manner that scrolls in a predetermined direction over time. can do. Thereby, since a back image changes in the aspect which scrolls, the display which does not get a player bored can be performed on an image display means. Further, since the image information of the rear image displayed in the scrolling mode is prepared corresponding to the entire range to be scrolled, the information amount of the image information becomes large, but the first storage unit 1 Using the image information transferred to the storage area, the initial image can be displayed immediately as a rear image after the change, and is displayed until at least a predetermined time has passed since the initial image was displayed. Since the image to be displayed can be displayed on the image display means without delay, even if the first storage means having a slow readout speed is used, the image display means is immediately updated in response to the second predetermined opportunity. The rear image can be displayed in a manner that scrolls with time. Thereby, the back image displayed in a scrolling manner with image information having a large amount of information can be displayed on the image display means without waiting time.

  “Back A” to “Back C” described in the second to fifth embodiments correspond to “one rear image” described in the gaming machine D6.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, at least one of the plurality of back images is displayed on the image display means in a manner in which a part or all of the color tone of the image changes over time. A gaming machine D7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D7, as a back image that is changed by the back image changing unit based on the second predetermined opportunity, a part or all of the color tone of the image is displayed on the image display unit with the passage of time. The back image can be changed. As a result, the rear image is displayed in such a manner that part or all of the color tone thereof changes, so that it is possible to cause the image display means to perform display that does not get the player bored. Further, since the image information of the back image displayed in a manner in which the color tone changes is prepared for each color tone, the information amount of the image information becomes large, but the first storage area of the second storage means The initial image can be displayed immediately as a rear image after the change using the image information transferred to the image, and should be displayed at least until a predetermined time has elapsed since the initial image was displayed. Since the image can be displayed on the image display means without delay, even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, the rear image after the change is displayed on the image display means in response to the second predetermined opportunity immediately. Can be displayed in such a manner that part or all of the color tone changes over time. Thereby, the back image displayed in a mode in which part or all of the color tone is changed by image information having a large amount of information can be displayed on the image display means without waiting time.

  The “back D” described in the fifth embodiment corresponds to “one back image” described in the gaming machine D7.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, at least one of the plurality of back images is displayed on the image display means in such a manner that an image that appears over time changes. A gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the rear image that is changed by the rear image changing unit based on the second predetermined opportunity is changed to the rear image displayed on the image display unit in such a manner that the image that appears over time changes. Can be changed. Thereby, since the back image is displayed in a manner in which the appearing image changes, it is possible to cause the image display means to perform a display that does not get the player bored. Further, since the image information of the rear image displayed in a manner in which the appearing image changes is prepared for each appearing image, the information amount of the image information becomes large, but the second memory By using the image information transferred to the first storage area of the means, the initial image can be immediately displayed as the rear image after the change, and at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the initial image was displayed Since the image to be displayed can be displayed on the image display means without delay, even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, the image display means responds immediately to the second predetermined opportunity. The rear image after the change can be displayed in a manner in which the image that appears over time changes. Thereby, the back image displayed in the aspect which the image which appears by the image information with a large amount of information changes can be displayed on the image display means without waiting time.

  The “back E” described in the fifth embodiment corresponds to “one back image” described in the gaming machine D8.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the image control unit dynamically displays an image for performing dynamic display of identification information on the image display unit as the main image based on an instruction from the main control unit. The display means and a predetermined combination of identification information according to the game value to be given to the player are made to appear after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means is stopped, and the game value advantageous to the player Is provided with identification information appearing means for revealing a predetermined combination of identification information, and the dynamic display means for displaying the identification information on the image display means includes: A part of the identification information is stopped during the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information constitutes a part of the combination of the predetermined identification information which is displayed by the identification information displaying means. The plurality of back images include an expected mode, and the plurality of back images are displayed when the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the image display unit by the dynamic display unit is the expected mode. An image is included, and the rear image changing means is triggered by the second predetermined trigger when the dynamic display means causes the dynamic display of the identification information to be displayed on the image display means in the expected manner. Based on the plurality of expected aspect rear images, one expected aspect rear image is selected, and the rear image displayed on the image display means by the rear image display means is changed to the selected expected aspect rear image. Then, the gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the changed expected mode rear image is displayed on the image display means from an initial image preset in the expected mode rear image.

  According to the gaming machine D9, based on an instruction from the main control means, an image on which the identification information is dynamically displayed is displayed as a main image on the image display means by the dynamic display means. Then, a predetermined combination of identification information appears according to the game value to be given to the player after the stop of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. At this time, when a game value advantageous to the player is given, a predetermined combination of identification information appears by the identification information appearing means. Here, in the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the image display means by the dynamic display means, a part of the identification information is stopped during the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information is the identification information. An expected mode that constitutes a part of a combination of predetermined identification information displayed by the display means is included. Thereby, when the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed on the image display means according to the expected mode, the predetermined identification information appears to the player after the dynamic display is stopped, and the advantageous game value is displayed. Can be expected.

  Further, the rear image displayed on the image display unit by the rear image display unit includes a plurality of items displayed when the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the image display unit by the dynamic display unit is the expected mode. An expected aspect rear image is included. If this expected aspect back image is displayed as a back image of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed in the expected aspect, the expectation given to the player can be further improved by the dynamic display of the identification information of the expected aspect, It is possible to display an image that does not bore the player.

  The display of the expected aspect rear image is performed by the rear image change means based on the second predetermined trigger when the dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the identification information on the image display means in the expected form. One expected aspect back image is selected from the plurality of expected aspect back images, and the back image to be displayed on the image display means by the back image display means is changed to the selected expected aspect back image. The expected aspect rear image is displayed on the image display means from the initial image preset in the expected aspect rear image. Here, since each expected aspect rear image is a kind of rear image, after displaying the initial image of each expected aspect rear image, the image displayed on the image display means at least until a predetermined time elapses. The image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means. Therefore, using the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means, it is possible to immediately display the initial image of the changed expected aspect rear image, and after the initial image is displayed, The image to be displayed at least until the predetermined time elapses can be displayed on the image display means without delay. Therefore, even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, immediately after the second predetermined trigger, the expected display back image after the change is displayed on the image display means while being changed over time. Therefore, the expected aspect rear image selected based on the second predetermined opportunity can be displayed on the image display means without waiting time.

  The “super reach” described in the fifth embodiment corresponds to the “expectation aspect” described in the gaming machine D9, and the “super reach back image” described in the fifth embodiment corresponds to the gaming machine D9. This corresponds to the “expected aspect rear image” described.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the sub-control unit includes an operation detection unit that detects that the operation unit has been operated by the player, and the rear image change unit is configured to perform the second predetermined opportunity. As one aspect, the back image displayed on the image display means is changed by the back image display means based on the fact that the operation detecting means has detected that the operation means has been operated by the player, and after the change The game machine D10 is characterized in that a rear image of the image is displayed on the image display means from the initial image.

  According to the gaming machine D10, the back image displayed on the image display means by the back image display means is displayed on the image display means by the back image change means based on the operation detection means detecting that the operation means is operated by the player. The changed rear image is displayed on the image display means from the initial image. At this time, the configuration described in the gaming machine D1 can immediately display the initial image as the back image after the change using the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means, After the initial image is displayed, the image to be displayed can be displayed on the image display means without delay until at least a predetermined time elapses. Here, the operation of the operation means by the player is performed at an arbitrary timing, but even if the first storage means having a slow reading speed is used, the player immediately responds to the operation of the player performed at the arbitrary timing, The rear image after the change can be displayed on the image display means while changing over time.

  In any of the gaming machines A2, B2, B3, B5, C2 to C4, C6, D1 to D10, the main control means detects a start condition of a predetermined start condition, and the start condition by the detection means Acquisition means for acquiring random information when the establishment of is detected, and selection means for selecting a first effect mode that is a dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means And the sub-control unit is configured to display the first effect on the image display unit on the basis of the first effect mode selected by the selection unit in response to an instruction from the main control unit. The game machine has a predetermined combination of identification information in the first effect displayed by the first effect display means. value The main control means determines whether or not to execute a second effect different from the first effect, and the second effect is determined by the effect determination means. And a permission transmitting means for transmitting a permission command for permitting execution of the second effect to the sub-control means when it is determined to perform the second effect, wherein the sub-control means is the first effect display means. Based on receiving the permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means, the storage means for storing the number of standby times of the first effect displayed by the first effect, the number of times of waiting stored in the storage means In each of the first effects, a setting means for setting the second effect to be executable in addition to the first effect, and a first effect in which the second effect is added by the setting means is the first effect. By 1 effect display means A second effect display means for displaying the second effect on the image display means when displayed on the image display means, and the second transfer process is performed by the setting means on the first effect. In addition, when the second effect is set to be executable, the first storage unit stores image information necessary to display the second effect added to the first effect on the image display unit. The game machine E1 is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the first control mode is selected by the selection unit in the main control unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit when the start unit is detected by the detection unit. In the sub-control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means as the first effect in the selected manner. Further, in the main control means, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect different from the first effect. As a result, when it is determined that the second effect is to be performed, the second control is performed. The permission command for permitting execution of the effect is transmitted to the sub-control means by the permission transmission means of the main control means. On the other hand, when the establishment of the start condition is detected in the main control means, the first effect corresponding to the establishment of the start condition detected in the past is being displayed on the first effect display means of the sub-control means The first effect corresponding to the establishment of the detected start condition this time is on standby, and the number of standby times is stored in the storage means provided in the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the permission command transmitted from the main control means, in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times stored in the storage means, the second effect is added to the second effect. When the first effect that is set by the setting means of the sub-control means and the second effect is added is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means, the second effect can be executed. Is displayed on the image display means by the second effect display means.

  Here, when the second effect is set to be executable in addition to the first effect by the setting means, it is necessary to display the second effect added to the first effect on the image display means. The image information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means by the second transfer processing execution means for executing the second transfer processing. As a result, the second effect is displayed on the image display means by the second effect display means as the first effect to which the second effect is added is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means. In this case, the image control means can cause the image display means to display the second effect without any problem at a desired time based on the image information transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means.

  The “variation effect (variation display)” described in the second embodiment corresponds to the “first effect” described in the gaming machine E1, and the “continuous notice effect” described in the second embodiment is This corresponds to the “second effect” described in the gaming machine E1. Further, the “third symbol” described in the second embodiment corresponds to the “identification information” described in the gaming machine E1, and the “big hit” described in the second embodiment is described in the gaming machine E1. Corresponding to “predetermined game value”, the “holding number command” described in the second embodiment corresponds to the “permission command” described in the gaming machine E1.

  In the gaming machine E1, the setting means displays the second effect on the image display unit in a different manner in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times to which the second effect is added. The second effect is set to be executable, and the second transfer process is performed when the second effect is set to be executable in addition to the first effect by the setting unit. The mode of the second effect added to the first effect is determined, and the image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means in each of the determined modes is the first information. A gaming machine E2 which is transferred from the storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the setting means causes the second effect to be displayed on the image display means so that the second effect is displayed in a different manner in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of times the second effect is added. Is set to be executable. At this time, the second transfer processing execution means determines the second effect aspect added to each first effect, and causes the image display means to display the second effect in each of the determined aspects. The image information necessary for this is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, the second effect is set to the second effect in the set manner as the first effect in which the second effect of a different aspect is added is displayed on the image display means by the first effect display means. When displaying on the image display means by the effect display means, the image control means images the second effect in a desired manner at a desired time based on the image information transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. It can be displayed without any problem on the display means.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the setting means is configured to change the first effect in a different manner depending on the number of standby times stored in the storage means in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times to which the second effect is added. The second effect is set to be executable so that the second effect is displayed on the image display means, and the second transfer process is performed in addition to the first effect by the setting means. When the second effect is set to be executable, it is necessary to determine the number of standby times stored in the storage unit, and display the second effect on the image display unit according to the determination result. The gaming machine E3, wherein the image information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of standby times to which the second effect is added, the second effect is displayed on the image display unit in a different manner depending on the number of standbys stored in the storage unit. As described above, the second effect is set to be executable by the setting means. At this time, the second transfer processing execution means determines the number of standby times stored in the storage means, and according to the determination result, image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is the first. The data is transferred from one storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. Accordingly, the first effect in which the second effect having a different aspect is added according to the number of standby times is displayed on the image display unit by the first effect display unit, and the first effect is displayed in a mode according to the number of standby times. When displaying the second effect on the image display means by the two effect display means, the image control means in a desired mode at a desired time based on the image information transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means. The second effect can be displayed on the image display means without any problem.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the second effect set by the setting unit is displayed on the image display unit by the second effect display unit, the sub-control unit determines the number of display times. The second transfer process is added to the first effect when the display number of the second effect by the second effect display means is the first time based on the determination by the display frequency determination means. Image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and based on the determination by the display number determination means. When the display number of the second effect by the second effect display means is the second time or later, the image information necessary for causing the image display means to display the second effect added to the first effect. of The gaming machine F1 the transfer to the second storage area and the third storage means from the first storage means, characterized in that the non-execution.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when the second effect set by the setting unit is displayed on the image display unit by the second effect display unit, the display count is determined by the display count determination unit, and based on the determination, When the display number of the second effect by the second effect display means is the first time, the second effect added to the first effect is imaged by the second transfer process executing means for executing the second transfer process. Image information necessary for display on the display means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. On the other hand, if the display number of the second effect by the second effect display means is after the second time based on the determination by the display frequency determination means, the second transfer process executing means adds the first effect to the first effect. The transfer of the image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means is not executed. As a result, every time the second effect is displayed on the second effect display means, the image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is repeatedly stored in the third storage means. Since the transfer to the second storage area can be suppressed, the load on the sub-control unit can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second control means transfers the second storage of the third storage means to which image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is transferred by the second transfer process. Control a predetermined sub storage area of the storage area based on the determination by the display number determination unit so that the second effect is not overwritten by other image information until the second effect is displayed a predetermined number of times on the image display unit. A gaming machine F2 characterized by comprising overwriting control means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the predetermined sub storage area of the second storage area of the third storage means to which the image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is transferred by the second transfer process. However, based on the determination by the display number determination means, the overwriting control means controls so that it is not overwritten by other image information until the second effect is displayed a predetermined number of times on the image display means. Thereby, once the image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is stored in a predetermined sub storage area of the second storage area of the third storage means, the second effect is obtained. Since it is not overwritten by other image information until it is displayed a predetermined number of times on the image display means, the image information stored in the predetermined sub storage area of the second storage area of the third storage means is used by one transfer. Thus, the second effect can be displayed on the image display means a predetermined number of times. Therefore, every time the second effect is displayed on the second effect display means, the image information necessary to display the second effect on the image display means is repeatedly obtained from the first storage means to the third storage means. Since the transfer to the two storage areas can be more reliably suppressed, the load on the sub-control unit can be further reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, the sub-control unit includes an image type determination unit that determines the type of image information stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit, and the second transfer process includes the display count Based on the determination by the determination means, when the display number of the second effect by the second effect display means is the second time or later, based on the determination result by the image type determination means, the second storage of the third storage means If image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is not stored in the storage area, the image is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. A gaming machine F3 characterized by transferring information.

  According to the gaming machine F3, when the display number of the second effect by the second effect display unit is the second or later based on the determination by the display number determination unit, the third is based on the determination result by the image type determination unit. If the image information necessary for displaying the second effect on the image display means is not stored in the second storage area of the storage means, the second transfer process execution means for executing the second transfer process executes the first transfer process. The image information is transferred from the storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. Thereby, when the display number of the 2nd effect by the 2nd effect display means is the 1st time, it is required in order to display on the image display means the 2nd effect transferred to the 2nd storage area of the 3rd storage means. Even if a situation occurs in which the image information is overwritten, the image control means can display the second effect on the image display means without any problem.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the setting means applies the second effect to the image display means in the same manner in each of the first effects for the number of standby times to which the second effect is added. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second effect is set to be executable so as to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the setting means causes the first effect to be displayed on the image display means so that the second effect is displayed in the same manner in each of the first effects corresponding to the number of times the second effect is added. 2 effects are set to be executable. Then, with the configuration described in the gaming machine F1, when the number of times of display of the second effect by the second effect display means is the first time, the second transfer process execution means for executing the second transfer process causes the first effect to be displayed. One piece of image information necessary for causing the image display means to display the second effect added to the effect in the same manner is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. Therefore, when the number of times of display of the second effect by the second effect display means is the second time or later, the first image information transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means at the time of the first display is used. The image control means can display the second effect on the image display means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress one image information from being repeatedly transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, it is possible to reduce the load on the sub-control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2, B2, B3, B5, C2 to C4, C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, and F1 to F4, the first storage means is provided for each image type displayed on the image display means. The first transfer process stores image information corresponding to a predetermined image type among a plurality of pieces of image information stored in the first storage unit when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the image type not held in the first storage area of the second storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the image control means. When used in image control, the image information corresponding to the image type is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means before the image information is used. Special Game machine G1 to.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first storage unit stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each image type displayed on the image display unit, and the first transfer process is executed by the first transfer process execution unit. The image information corresponding to a predetermined image type among the plurality of image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. As a result, the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type transferred to the first storage area of the second storage unit continues to be held at least until a predetermined trigger is released. On the other hand, when image information corresponding to an image type not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, it corresponds to the image type before the image information is used. The image information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means by the second transfer processing execution means. As a result, even if a memory having a low reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means can store the image information of the image type held in the second storage means capable of a high-speed reading operation and the third storage means. By using the transferred image information of the image type, it is possible to control the image that causes the image display means to display the image of the image type. Can do. In the first transfer process and the second transfer process, the transfer of the image information to the second storage area of the third storage unit can be controlled in units of image types, so that the process can be easily performed. .

  In the gaming machine G1, the image control means subdivides a series of images to be displayed on the image display means into elements, and when displaying a predetermined series of images, the elements constituting the predetermined series of images are displayed. The first storage means stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each element, with one element as one image type. In the first transfer process, the image information corresponding to a predetermined element among the plurality of image information stored in the first storage means is stored in the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. When the image information corresponding to the element not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, the second transfer process Before being used Gaming machine G2, characterized in that the image information corresponding to the element from the first memory means is intended to be transferred to the second storage area of said third memory means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, when a series of images to be displayed on the image display means are segmented into elements by the image control means and a predetermined series of images are displayed, elements constituting the predetermined series of images Is determined, and image control is performed in units of elements. The first storage means stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each element, with one element as one image type, and when the first transfer process is executed by the first transfer process executing means, Image information corresponding to a predetermined element among a plurality of pieces of image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. Further, when image information corresponding to an element not held in the first storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, image information corresponding to the element is used before the image information is used. Is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means by the second transfer processing execution means. Thus, in the first transfer process and the second transfer process, the transfer of the image information to the second storage area of the third storage unit can be controlled in element units obtained by subdividing a series of images. It is possible to control the transfer of image information finely while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the sub-control unit includes an image type determination unit that determines whether image information corresponding to a desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit. In the second transfer process, image information corresponding to a predetermined image type among image information corresponding to image types not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is controlled by the image control unit. When the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit based on the determination result by the image type determination unit, the first storage A gaming machine G3, wherein transfer of image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is not executed from the means to the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, when image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is used for image control by the image control means among image information corresponding to image types not held in the first storage area of the second storage means. If the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit based on the determination result by the image type determination unit, the second transfer for executing the second transfer process is performed. The processing execution means does not transfer the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, the image information corresponding to the image type already stored in the second storage area of the third storage means is prevented from being duplicated and transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. can do. Therefore, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G3, for the image type in which image information is not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit, the sub-control unit stores image information corresponding to the image type in the third storage unit. (2) storage information storage means for storing storage information indicating whether or not the information is stored in a storage area, wherein the image type determination means is configured to select a desired image based on the storage information stored in the storage information storage means. A gaming machine G4, which determines whether or not image information corresponding to a type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, for image types for which image information is not held in the first storage area of the second storage means, is the image information corresponding to the image type stored in the second storage area of the third storage means? Is stored in the storage information storage means. Based on the storage information stored in the storage information storage means, the image information corresponding to the desired image type is stored in the second storage of the third storage means. Whether the image is stored in the area is determined by the image type determining means. Thereby, it is possible to simply determine whether or not the image information corresponding to the desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit.

  In the gaming machine G4, the sub-control unit causes the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit to store image information corresponding to a predetermined image type in the second storage area of the third storage unit. When transferred, the storage information corresponding to the predetermined image type stored in the storage information storage means is information indicating that it is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means Image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the first storage information updating means for updating and the second transfer processing executed by the second transfer processing execution means. If the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored, the storage information corresponding to the image type of the image information deleted from the second storage area of the third storage means is stored. Gaming machine G5, characterized in that it comprises a second storage information update means for updating the information indicating that the second memory area of said third memory means is a non-memory.

  According to the gaming machine G5, when image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage unit by the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit, the stored information The storage information corresponding to the predetermined image type stored in the storage means is updated by the first storage information update means to information indicating that it is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means. The storage information corresponding to the image type of the image information that is deleted from the second storage area of the third storage unit by storing the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored by the second storage information update unit. It is updated to information indicating that it is not stored in the second storage area of the third storage means. As described above, the update of the storage information corresponding to the image type stored in the storage information storage means is performed as the second transfer process is executed by the second transfer process execution means. Therefore, the stored information can be easily updated.

  In the gaming machine G3, the sub-control means includes image type information storage means for storing image type information indicating an image type of image information stored in the second storage area of the third storage means, and the image The type discriminating unit determines whether image information corresponding to a desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit based on the image type information stored in the image type information storage unit. A gaming machine G6 characterized by determining whether or not.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the image type information indicating the image type of the image information stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit is stored in the image type information storage unit, and the image type information storage unit stores the image type information. Based on the stored image type information, the image type determining unit determines whether image information corresponding to a desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether or not image information corresponding to a desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit.

  In the gaming machine G6, the sub-control unit causes the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit to store image information corresponding to a predetermined image type in the second storage area of the third storage unit. When transferred, the image identification information stored in the image type information storage means is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means by storing image information corresponding to the predetermined image type. Instead of the image type of the image information to be erased from the game machine, the game machine G7 is provided with an image type information update means for updating by overwriting information on the predetermined image type.

  According to the gaming machine G7, when image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the second transfer processing executed by the second transfer processing execution means, the predetermined information By overwriting the information related to the predetermined image type transferred instead of the image type of the image information erased from the second storage area of the third storage unit by storing the image information corresponding to the image type The image type information stored in the image type information storage unit is updated by the image type information update unit. As described above, the update of the image type information stored in the image type information storage unit is performed in accordance with the content of the second transfer process as the second transfer process is executed by the second transfer process executing unit. Therefore, it is possible to easily update the image type information.

  In any one of the gaming machines G3 to G7, the sub control means includes a command receiving means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means, and a command analyzing means for analyzing the contents of the command received by the command receiving means. When the command analysis unit analyzes that the command received by the command reception unit is related to the image to be displayed on the image display unit, the command display unit displays the command on the image display unit based on the command. Display image type determining means for determining the image type of the image, and the second transfer process includes the second image processing unit for selecting the second image of the image types to be displayed on the image display means determined by the display image type determining means. Image information corresponding to an image type not held in the first storage area of the storage means is the second storage area of the third storage means. Judgment processing for judging whether or not it is stored based on the result of discrimination by the image type discrimination means, and by the judgment processing, it is judged that the second storage area of the third storage means is not stored. Transfer execution processing for transferring the image information corresponding to the image type to the second storage area of the third storage means before the image information is used for image control by the image control means, and the determination process. Transfer non-execution processing in which image information corresponding to the image type determined to be stored in the second storage area of the third storage means is not transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means And a gaming machine G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in the sub control means, the command transmitted from the main control means is received by the command receiving means, and the contents of the received command are analyzed by the command analyzing means. Here, when it is analyzed that the command received by the command receiving unit is related to the image displayed on the image display unit, the image type of the image displayed on the image display unit based on the command is the display image type. Determined by the determining means. When the second transfer process is executed by the second transfer process execution unit, the first storage area of the second storage unit among the image types of the images to be displayed on the image display unit determined by the display image type determination unit. Whether the image information corresponding to the non-held image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit is determined by the determination process based on the determination result by the image type determination unit. Then, as a result of the determination, the image information corresponding to the image type corresponding to the image type determined not to be stored is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the transfer execution process, The image information corresponding to the image type determined to be stored in the second storage area of the third storage means is not transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the transfer non-execution process. Thereby, among the image types of the images to be displayed on the image display unit in response to the command transmitted from the main control unit, the image type is not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit, and the third storage unit Since only the image information corresponding to the image type that is not stored in the second storage area is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means, the execution of the transfer can be minimized, An increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machines A2, B2, B3, B5, C2 to C4, C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, the second storage area of the third storage means is a plurality of sub storage areas And the second transfer process transfers one piece of image information not held in the first storage area of the second storage means from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. In this case, the gaming machine H1 is characterized in that a sub storage area for storing the one image information is determined from the plurality of sub storage areas in accordance with the contents of the one image information.

  According to the gaming machine H1, when one piece of image information not held in the first storage area of the second storage means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, the second transfer process Accordingly, a sub storage area for storing the one image information is determined from the plurality of sub storage areas in accordance with the contents of the one image information. Thereby, the sub storage area in which the image information is stored can be easily determined, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the first storage unit stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each image type displayed on the image display unit, and the first transfer process is stored in the first storage unit. The image information corresponding to a predetermined image type among the plurality of image information is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on, and the second transfer process includes the second storage When image information corresponding to an image type not held in the first storage area of the means is used for image control by the image control means, a plurality of pieces of image information corresponding to the image type are used as the one image information. A sub-storage area for storing image information corresponding to the image type in accordance with the image type, and before the image information corresponding to the image type is used, The image information corresponding to the image type is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and the transferred image information is stored in the sub storage area determined by the determination process. A game machine H2 including a transfer execution process.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the first storage unit stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each image type to be displayed on the image display unit, and the first transfer process is executed by the first transfer process execution unit. The image information corresponding to a predetermined image type among the plurality of image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. As a result, the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means continues to be held until at least the predetermined trigger is released. On the other hand, when the image information corresponding to the image type not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit is performed. The sub-storage area for storing the image information corresponding to the image type is determined from the plurality of sub-storage areas according to the image type by the determination process, and the image type is determined by the transfer execution process of the second transfer process. Before the corresponding image information is used, the image information corresponding to the image type is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and transferred to the sub storage area determined by the determination process. The processed image information is stored. As a result, even if a memory having a low reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means can store the image information of the image type held in the second storage means capable of a high-speed reading operation and the third storage means. By using the transferred image information of the image type, it is possible to control the image that causes the image display means to display the image of the image type. Can do.

  In the gaming machine H2, the image control means subdivides a series of images to be displayed on the image display means into elements, and when displaying a predetermined series of images, the elements constituting the predetermined series of images are displayed. The first storage means stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each element, with one element as one image type. In the first transfer process, the image information corresponding to a predetermined element among the plurality of image information stored in the first storage means is stored in the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. When the image information corresponding to the non-holding element in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, the second transfer process is Multiple sub-memory A determination process for determining a sub-storage area for storing image information corresponding to the element from the area according to the element, and image information corresponding to the element before the image information corresponding to the element is used. A transfer execution process for transferring from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means and storing the transferred image information in the sub storage area determined by the determination process. Characteristic gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, when a series of images to be displayed on the image display means are segmented into elements by the image control means and a predetermined series of images are displayed, the elements constituting the predetermined series of images Is determined, and image control is performed in units of elements. The first storage means stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each element, with one element as one image type, and when the first transfer process is executed by the first transfer process executing means, Image information corresponding to a predetermined element among a plurality of pieces of image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. In addition, when image information corresponding to an element not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, determination of the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit By processing, a sub storage area for storing image information corresponding to the element is determined from the plurality of sub storage areas according to the element, and image information corresponding to the element is determined by the transfer execution process of the second transfer process. Is used, the image information corresponding to the element is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and the transferred image information is transferred to the sub storage area determined by the determination process. Remembered. In this way, in the second transfer process, the transfer of image information to the sub storage area provided in the second storage area of the third storage means can be controlled in units of elements obtained by subdividing a series of images. Therefore, it is possible to control the transfer of image information finely while simplifying the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the predetermined sub storage area of the plurality of sub storage areas stores only image information corresponding to a predetermined image type, and the determination process is performed by the second storage means. When image information corresponding to an image type not held in the first storage area is used for image control by the image control means, if the image type is the predetermined image type, the predetermined sub-storage area Is determined as a sub storage area for storing image information corresponding to the predetermined image type.

  According to the gaming machine H4, when the image information corresponding to the image type not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, the second transfer process is the second transfer process. When executed by the executing means, if the image type is a predetermined image type, the predetermined sub-region is determined as a sub-region for storing image information corresponding to the predetermined image type. Thereby, the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type can be continuously stored in the predetermined sub storage area without being overwritten with the image information corresponding to the other image type. Therefore, the number of times that image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the sub-control unit includes an image type determination unit that determines whether a desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit, The second transfer process is performed when image information of a predetermined image type is used for image control by the image control unit among image information corresponding to image types not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit. If the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit based on the determination result by the image type determination unit, the first storage unit to the first storage unit 3. A gaming machine H5, wherein transfer of image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is not executed to the second storage area of three storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the image type of the image information stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit is determined by the image type determination unit. When the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is used for image control by the image control unit among the image information corresponding to the image type not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit, the image type determination is performed. If the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit based on the result of the determination by the unit, the second transfer process executing unit that executes the second transfer process, The transfer of the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type from the first storage unit to the second storage area of the third storage unit is not executed. As a result, the image information corresponding to the image type already stored in the second storage area of the third storage means is prevented from being duplicated and transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. can do. Therefore, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H5, for the image type in which image information is not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit, the sub-control unit stores the image information corresponding to the image type in the third storage unit. (2) storage information storage means for storing storage information indicating whether or not the information is stored in a storage area, wherein the image type determination means is configured to select a desired image based on the storage information stored in the storage information storage means. A gaming machine H6 that determines whether or not image information corresponding to a type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H6, whether image information corresponding to the image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means for the image type in which the image information is not held in the first storage area of the second storage means. Is stored in the storage information storage means. Based on the storage information stored in the storage information storage means, the image information corresponding to the desired image type is stored in the second storage of the third storage means. Whether the image is stored in the area is determined by the image type determining means. Thereby, it is possible to simply determine whether or not the image information corresponding to the desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit.

  In the gaming machine H6, the sub-control unit causes the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit to store image information corresponding to a predetermined image type in the second storage area of the third storage unit. When transferred, the storage information corresponding to the predetermined image type stored in the storage information storage means is information indicating that it is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means Image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the first storage information updating means for updating and the second transfer processing executed by the second transfer processing execution means. If the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored, the storage information corresponding to the image type of the image information deleted from the second storage area of the third storage means is stored. The third game machine characterized by comprising a second storage information update means for updating the information indicating that the second storage area of the storage means is a non-storage H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, when image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage unit by the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit, the stored information The storage information corresponding to the predetermined image type stored in the storage means is updated by the first storage information update means to information indicating that it is stored in the second storage area of the third storage means. The storage information corresponding to the image type of the image information that is deleted from the second storage area of the third storage unit by storing the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored by the second storage information update unit. It is updated to information indicating that it is not stored in the second storage area of the third storage means. As described above, the update of the storage information corresponding to each image type stored in the storage information storage means is performed as the second transfer process is executed by the second transfer process execution means. Since it is performed according to the contents, the stored information can be easily updated.

  In the gaming machine H6, the sub control unit stores image type information indicating an image type of image information stored in at least a part of the sub storage area provided in the second storage area of the third storage unit. Image type information storage means, and the image type determination means stores image information corresponding to a desired image type in the third storage means based on the image type information stored in the image type information storage means. A gaming machine H8 that determines whether or not the second storage area is stored.

  According to the gaming machine H8, image type information indicating the image type of the image information stored in at least a part of the sub storage area provided in the second storage area of the third storage means is stored in the image type information storage means. Whether the image information corresponding to the desired image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit based on the image type information stored in the image type information storage unit. Discriminated by the discriminating means. Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether or not image information corresponding to a predetermined image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit.

  In the gaming machine H8, the sub-control unit causes the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit to store image information corresponding to a predetermined image type in the second storage area of the third storage unit. The image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored as the image identification information stored in the previous image identification information storage means when transferred to the predetermined sub-storage area provided. Instead of the image type of the image information deleted from the sub-storage area, the game machine H9 is provided with an image type information updating means for updating by overwriting information relating to the predetermined image type.

  According to the gaming machine H9, the predetermined sub storage area in which the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is provided in the second storage area of the third storage means by the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process executing means. Image information corresponding to the predetermined image type is stored as the image identification information stored in the image identification information storage means, and the image information is erased from the predetermined sub-storage area. Instead of the type, the image type information stored in the image type information storage unit is updated by the image type information update unit by overwriting information on a predetermined image type. As described above, the update of the image type information stored in the image type information storage unit is performed in accordance with the content of the second transfer process as the second transfer process is executed by the second transfer process executing unit. Therefore, it is possible to easily update the image type information.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H9, the sub-control means includes a command receiving means for receiving a command transmitted from the main control means, and a command analyzing means for analyzing the contents of the command received by the command receiving means If the command analyzing means analyzes that the command received by the command receiving means relates to an image to be displayed on the image display means, the command display means displays the command on the image display means. Display image type determining means for determining the image type of the image, and the second transfer process includes the second image processing unit for selecting the second image of the image types to be displayed on the image display means determined by the display image type determining means. Image information corresponding to an image type not held in the first storage area of the storage means is the second storage area of the third storage means. Judgment processing for judging whether or not it is stored based on the result of discrimination by the image type discrimination means, and by the judgment processing, it is judged that the second storage area of the third storage means is not stored. A transfer execution process for transferring the image information corresponding to the image type corresponding to the image type to the second storage area of the third storage unit before the image information is used for image control by the image control unit; The image information corresponding to the image type corresponding to the image type determined to be stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit by the determination process is stored in the second storage of the third storage unit. A gaming machine having a transfer non-execution process for non-transfer to an area.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in the sub control means, a command transmitted from the main control means is received by the command receiving means, and the contents of the received command are analyzed by the command analyzing means. Here, when it is analyzed that the command received by the command receiving unit is related to the image displayed on the image display unit, the image type of the image displayed on the image display unit based on the command is the display image type. Determined by the determining means. When the second transfer process is executed by the second transfer process execution unit, the first storage area of the second storage unit among the image types of the images to be displayed on the image display unit determined by the display image type determination unit. Whether the image information corresponding to the non-held image type is stored in the second storage area of the third storage unit is determined by the determination process based on the determination result by the image type determination unit. Then, as a result of the determination, the image information corresponding to the image type determined to be non-stored is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the transfer execution process, while the third storage means The image information corresponding to the image type corresponding to the image type determined to be stored in the second storage area is not transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means by the transfer non-execution process. Thereby, among the image types of the images to be displayed on the image display unit in response to the command transmitted from the main control unit, the image type is not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit, and the third storage unit Since only the image information corresponding to the image type that is not stored in the second storage area is transferred to the second storage area of the third storage means, the execution of the transfer can be minimized, An increase in processing load can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H10, the determination process is the same when a sub storage area for storing image information corresponding to the image type is determined from a plurality of sub storage areas according to the image type. The gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the same sub-storage area is determined for each of the image types.

  According to the gaming machine H11, when the determination process is executed by the second transfer process execution unit, the sub storage area for storing the image information corresponding to the image type is selected as the image type from the plurality of sub storage areas. When determining accordingly, the same sub storage area is determined for the same image type. As a result, the sub storage area determination process can be executed with a small load.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H11, the plurality of sub storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage unit have different numbers of types of image information to be stored for each of the sub storage areas. In the second transfer process, when the sub storage area for storing one image information is determined from the plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one image information, The gaming machine H12 is characterized by deciding to store one piece of image information in a sub storage area where the number of types of image information to be stored is smaller as the image information is used more frequently.

  According to the gaming machine H12, the plurality of sub storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage means are configured so that the number of types of image information to be stored differs for each sub storage area. In the second transfer process, when a sub storage area for storing one image information is determined from a plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one image information, the one image information is frequently used. It is determined that the image information to be stored is stored in the sub storage area where the number of types of image information to be stored is small. Thereby, since the probability that frequently used image information is overwritten can be lowered, the number of times image information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H12, the plurality of sub storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage means are further divided into one or more divided areas capable of storing image information, The number of the divided areas is different for each sub storage area, and the second transfer process is configured such that the plurality of sub storage areas for storing one piece of image information according to the type of the one piece of image information. When determining from among the sub storage areas, it is determined to store the one image information in the sub storage area where the number of the divided areas is larger as the one image information is used more frequently. A gaming machine H13 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine H13, the plurality of sub storage areas provided in the second storage area of the third storage means are further divided into one or more divided areas capable of storing image information, and the division is performed for each sub storage area. The number of areas is different, and in the second transfer process, a sub storage area for storing one piece of image information is determined from a plurality of sub storage areas according to the type of the one piece of image information. In this case, it is determined that the one image information is stored in the sub storage area where the number of the divided areas is larger as the one image information is used more frequently. Thereby, since the probability that frequently used image information is overwritten can be lowered, the number of times image information is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means can be suppressed.

  Gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G8, and H1 to H13 are stored in the first storage area of the second storage means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the held image information is image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means is held in the first storage area of the second storage means, so that the image display means displays the image. Since it is not necessary to read out the image information from the first storage means each time, the frequently displayed image can be reliably displayed at a desired time.

  The first memory of the second storage means in any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G8, H1 to H13, I1 The image information to be held in the area is an image to be immediately displayed on the image display unit under the control of the sub control unit based on a command transmitted from the main control unit or a signal input to the sub control unit. A gaming machine I2 which is image information for display.

  The signal input to the sub-control means may be input signals from various sensors such as a vibration sensor provided in the gaming machine and a gaming medium detection sensor that detects gaming media loaded in the gaming machine. It may be an input signal from a button operated by the player. Further, the image to be displayed immediately on the image display unit may be, for example, an image for notifying an error or a back image displayed on the image display unit.

  According to the gaming machine I2, on the basis of a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub control means, an image for displaying an image to be displayed immediately on the image display means under the control of the sub control means. Since the information is held in the first storage area of the second storage means, the image to be displayed immediately after the command transmitted from the main control means or the signal input to the sub control means is displayed. The image control means can control the image by using the image information held in the second storage means without reading out the image information for the purpose from the first storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably display an image to be displayed immediately at a desired time.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G8, H1 to H13, I1, I2, the first storage means is NAND A gaming machine I3 comprising a type flash memory.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the first storage means is configured by a NAND flash memory. Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area and is inexpensive, so that the capacity of the first flash memory can be increased while suppressing an increase in cost. Can do. Therefore, since a large amount of image information for displaying an image on the image display means can be stored in the first storage means, the image displayed on the image display means can be diversified and complicated, and the player's interest Can be improved. On the other hand, NAND-type flash memory is characterized by a slower read speed than other memories, but from gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, and F1 With the configuration described in any of F4, G1 to G8, H1 to H13, I1, and I2, the image control means displays an image using image information held in the second storage means capable of high-speed reading operation. Since the image displayed on the means is controlled, a predetermined image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem even if the first storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory. Therefore, it is possible to display a predetermined image without any problem at a desired time while diversifying and complicating the image to be displayed on the image display means.

  Gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G8, H1 to H13, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a slot machine This is a gaming machine I4. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G8, H1 to H13, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine I5 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D10, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G8, H1 to H13, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine I6 that is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as slot machines, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a gaming machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on a display device is stored in advance in a storage unit, and when displaying an image, the corresponding image information is read from the storage unit, and image processing is performed. In addition, the display device is configured to display the image (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598).
In recent gaming machines, images displayed on a display device have been diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player. As storage means for storing such image information of an image, there is a demand to use an inexpensive device that can provide a large storage capacity with a small area.
However, some inexpensive storage means that can provide a large storage capacity with a small area have a low speed for reading information (reading speed). When such a storage means is used, an image to be displayed is specified. Then, if the corresponding image information is read from the storage means, there is a problem that the generation of the image to be displayed by the desired time is not in time and the image cannot be displayed at that time.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and even if a storage means with a slow reading speed is used as a storage means for image information, an image can be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to be displayed. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that can be made to play.
<Means>
To achieve this object, the slot machine of the technical idea 1 includes a main control means for performing main control of a game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and a sub-control thereof. Image display means for displaying an image based on control by the means, wherein the sub-control means is a first storage means for storing image information for causing the image display means to display an image; A second storage means having a first storage area capable of reading out image information stored in the first storage means and capable of reading operation faster than the first storage means; and at least in the second storage means Based on the stored image information, the image control means for controlling the image to be displayed on the image display means, and the image information stored in the first storage means at the time of start-up upon power-on, are stored in the second memory. First transfer processing execution means for executing a first transfer process for transferring to the first storage area of the means, and the first storage area of the second storage means is at least until a predetermined trigger is released, The image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means is held.
Note that the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all image information stored in the first storage means, or a part of the images. It may be information.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 includes a main control unit that performs main control of a game, a sub-control unit that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control unit, and an image based on control by the sub-control unit. The sub-control unit includes a first storage unit that stores image information for causing the image display unit to display an image, and the first storage unit. The second storage means having a first storage area for storing the image information stored in the first storage means and at least the image information stored in the second storage means. The image control means for controlling the image displayed on the image display means, and the image information stored in the first storage means at the time of start-up upon power-on to the first storage area of the second storage means Forward First transfer processing execution means for executing the first transfer processing, and the first storage area of the second storage means is transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. Stored image information.
Note that the image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means may be all image information stored in the first storage means, or a part of the images. It may be information.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 2, wherein the sub-control means is capable of reading operation faster than the first storage means, and is stored in the first storage means. Third storage means having a second storage area for storing image information is provided, and the image control means displays on the image display means based on at least the second storage means and the image information stored in the third storage means. In the first transfer process, a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is stored in the first storage of the second storage means at the time of startup by turning on the power. When the image information not held in the first storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, the sub-control means uses the image information. Before And a second transfer process executing means for executing a second transfer process of transferring the image information to the second storage area of said third storage means from the first storing means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine of technical idea 3, wherein the second storage area of the third storage means has a plurality of sub-storage areas, and the second transfer process When transferring one piece of image information not held in the first storage area of the two storage means from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, depending on the contents of the one image information Then, a sub storage area for storing one piece of image information is determined from the plurality of sub storage areas.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is the gaming machine of technical idea 4, wherein the first storage means stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each image type displayed on the image display means, In the first transfer process, image information corresponding to a predetermined image type among a plurality of pieces of image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. Transfer, and when the image information corresponding to the image type not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, the second transfer process uses the image type. Determination processing for determining, according to the image type, a sub storage area for storing image information corresponding to the image type from among the plurality of sub storage areas, with the image information corresponding to the image information as the one image information, and the image By type Before the corresponding image information is used, the image information corresponding to the image type is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and is determined by the determination process. And a transfer execution process for storing the transferred image information in the area.
<Effect>
According to the slot machine described in the technical idea 1, in the sub-control means, image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored in the first storage means, and the image stored in the first storage means The information is transferred by the first transfer processing execution means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation faster than the first storage means when the power is turned on. The first storage area of the second storage means holds the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. The first storage area of the second storage means Based on the image information held in the image, the image control means controls the image displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display using the image information held in the second storage means capable of high speed reading operation. Since the image is controlled, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in the sub-control means, image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored in the first storage means, and the image stored in the first storage means The information is transferred by the first transfer processing execution means to the first storage area of the second storage means capable of reading operation faster than the first storage means when the power is turned on. The first storage area of the second storage means holds the image information transferred by the first transfer processing execution means at least until a predetermined trigger is reached. The first storage area of the second storage means Based on the image information held in the image, the image control means controls the image displayed on the image display means. As a result, even if a memory having a slow reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means causes the image display means to display using the image information held in the second storage means capable of high speed reading operation. Since the image is controlled, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, a part of the image information stored in the first storage means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means by the first transfer processing execution means at the time of startup by turning on the power, and at least predetermined The image information transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means is held until the trigger for the second storage is reached. On the other hand, when image information not held in the first storage area of the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means, the image information is sent by the second transfer processing execution means before the image information is used. And transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means. As a result, the image control means is transferred to the image information held in the second storage means and the third storage means capable of high-speed reading operation even when the memory having a low reading speed of the first storage means is used. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is controlled using the image information, there is an effect that the image can be displayed without any problem at a desired time. In addition, since part of the image information stored in the first storage unit is stored in the first storage area of the second storage unit, an increase in the storage capacity of the second storage unit is suppressed. There is an effect that can be done.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when one piece of image information not held in the first storage area of the second storage means is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, In accordance with the content of the image information, a sub storage area for storing the one image information is determined from among the plurality of sub storage areas. Thereby, the sub storage area in which the image information is stored can be easily determined, so that an increase in processing load can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the first storage means stores a plurality of pieces of image information for each image type displayed on the image display means. When the first transfer process is executed by the first transfer process execution means, the first storage means Image information corresponding to a predetermined image type among a plurality of pieces of image information stored in the means is transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means when the power is turned on. As a result, the image information corresponding to the predetermined image type transferred to the first storage area of the second storage means continues to be held until at least the predetermined trigger is released. On the other hand, when the image information corresponding to the image type not held in the first storage area of the second storage unit is used for image control by the image control unit, the second transfer process executed by the second transfer process execution unit is performed. The sub-storage area for storing the image information corresponding to the image type is determined from the plurality of sub-storage areas according to the image type by the determination process, and the image type is determined by the transfer execution process of the second transfer process. Before the corresponding image information is used, the image information corresponding to the image type is transferred from the first storage means to the second storage area of the third storage means, and transferred to the sub storage area determined by the determination process. The processed image information is stored. As a result, even if a memory having a low reading speed of the first storage means is used, the image control means can store the image information of the image type held in the second storage means capable of a high-speed reading operation and the third storage means. By using the transferred image information of the image type, it is possible to control the image that causes the image display means to display the image of the image type. There is an effect that can be.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
65 Auxiliary display (image display means)
81 Display control device (sub-control means, image control means)
101 Main controller (main control means)
187a NAND flash memory (first storage means)
188a Buffer RAM (fourth storage means, fifth storage means)
189 Resident video RAM (second storage means)
190 Normal video RAM (third storage means)
200 Pachinko machines (game machines)
218 3rd symbol display device (image display means)
222 Frame button (operation means)
310 Main control device (main control means)
313 Sound lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
314 Display control device (part of sub-control means, image control means)
423a Retention count counter (storage means)
434a, 734a NAND flash memory (first storage means)
433 Work RAM (image type information storage means)
435 Resident video RAM (second storage means)
436, 536 Normal video RAM (third storage means)
436a First priority image A area (part of sub storage area, divided area)
436b First priority image B area (part of sub storage area, divided area)
436c Second priority image C area (part of sub storage area, divided area)
436d Second priority image D area (part of sub storage area, divided area)
436e, 536e Rear image E area (sub storage area, rear image dedicated area)
436f Normal image F area (part of sub storage area, divided area)
436g Normal image G area (part of sub storage area, divided area)
437a Buffer RAM (fourth storage means, fifth storage means)
533d Image storage discrimination table (storage information storage means)
536a Image A area (sub storage area)
536b Image B area (sub storage area)
536c Image C area (sub storage area)
536d Image D area (sub storage area)
536f Continuous notice image F area (sub storage area)
601a Image storage discrimination table (storage information storage means)
S702 to S710 (first transfer process)
S708 (first determination means, third determination means)
S1911 Fluctuating display processing (part of display image type determining means)
S2403 (part of display image type determination means)
S1912 Command determination processing (command receiving means, command analyzing means)
S1206 Fluctuation start processing (selection means)
S1401 (detection means)
S1404 (Acquisition means)
S1405 to S1410 (production determination means)
S1407, S1409 (permission transmission means)
S2209 Continuous notice determination processing (setting means)
S2302, S2303 (part of the first transfer process)
S2409, S6001 (operation detection means)
S2410 (part of rear image changing means)
S2526 (Part of rear image changing means, rear image display means)
S2516 (Dynamic display means, identification information display means, first effect display means, second effect display means)
S2523 (Display frequency determination means)
S2602 Resident image transfer command processing (part of first transfer processing)
S2603 Normal image transfer command processing (second transfer processing)
S2809 (transfer execution process)
S2902, S3004, S3009, S3102 (decision process)
S4006, S4103, S6602 (decision process)
S3003, S3008 (image type determination means, determination means)
S3003: Yes, S3008: Yes (Transfer non-execution means)
S3003: No, S3008: No (Transfer execution means)
S3010, S4001 (overwrite control means)
S3208 (first determination means, second determination means, third determination means)
S4005, S4102, and S5104 (image type determination means, determination means)
S4005: Yes, S4102: Yes, S5104: Yes (transfer non-execution means)
S4005: No, S4102: No, S5104: No (Transfer non-execution means)
S4007, S4009 (first storage information update means, second storage information update means)
S4104, S5105 (first stored information update means)
S4105, S5106 (second stored information update means)

Claims (2)

Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means operating based on a command transmitted from the main control means, image display means for displaying an image based on control by the sub-control means, and game An operating means disposed at a position that can be operated by a person, and in a gaming machine that dynamically displays identification information by the image display means ,
The sub-control means is
First storage means composed of NAND flash memory in which image information for displaying an image on the image display means is stored;
A second storage means capable of reading operation faster than the first storage means, and storing image information stored in the first storage means;
A third storage means capable of performing a reading operation at a higher speed than the first storage means, and storing image information stored in the first storage means;
Image control means for controlling an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second storage means and the third storage means;
A first transfer process execution means for executing a first transfer process of transferring a portion of the pre-Symbol image information stored in the first storage means to the second storage means,
When using the image information of the non-hold in the second storage means in the control of the image by the image control unit, before the image information is used, before Symbol the third image information storage means navel from the first storage means a second transfer process execution means for executing a second transfer process of transferring,
Determination means for making a determination on the type of image information stored in the third storage means ,
It said second storage means, at least until a predetermined trigger visits, image information transferred by the first transfer process execution means is held,
The third image information transferred to the storage means, which continues to be held until it is overwritten by another image information,
In the first transfer process, at least a part of image information necessary for displaying a rear image to be displayed on the rear side of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the image display unit and the operation unit are operated. Including at least a part of the image information necessary for display of the image to be displayed on the image display unit when triggered by this, and transferred from the first storage unit to the second storage unit,
The second transfer processing execution means uses the third storage means based on the result of determination by the determination means when image information not held in the second storage means is used for image control by the image control means. If the image information is stored in the second transfer process, the second transfer process is not executed .
The sub-control means is
A fourth storage unit that is used when at least the second transfer process is executed, and temporarily stores image information read from the first storage unit before being written to the third storage unit; A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

Images